B. Sc. Physics (Model

Transcription

MAHATMA GANDHI UNIVERSITY, KOTTAYAM
CURRICULUM FOR UNDER GRADUATE PROGRAMMES IN PHYSICS
UNDER CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (UG CBCS) 2016
2016 ADMISSIONS ONWARDS
CONTENTS
1. Acknowledgment
2. List of Members of Board of Studies (UG)
3. Introduction
4. Title
5. Scope
6. Aims and Objectives
7. Course Design - B. Sc. Programmes in Physics
8. Definitions
9. Eligibility Criteria for Admission
10. Duration of Course
11. Attendance
12. Medium of Instruction
13. Examinations & Evaluations
14. Conduct of Practical Examinations
15. Pattern of Questions
16. Consolidated Scheme for I to VI Semesters
17. Syllabus
18.MQPs I to VI Semesters
19. List of Participants in the Workshop and Contributors
1
2
3
3
3
4
5
9
10
10
10
11
11
14
14
16
29
171
335
1. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The Board of Studies in Physics (U G) puts on record our sincere thanks to the
honourble Vice Chancellor of Mahatma Gandhi University, Dr. Babu Sebastian, for the
guidance and help extended to us during the restructuring of B. Sc. Physics syllabus.
We thank the Pro Vice Chancellor of the University Dr. Sheena Shukoor, for her
valuable suggestions.
The Board of Studies thank the members of M. G. University syndicate for all the help
extended to us.
We thank the Registrar of the University, Academic Section and the Finance Section for
extending their service for the smooth completion of syllabus restructuring.
Special thanks are due to the representatives of the colleges affiliated to M. G.
University, who have actively participated and contributed in the two day workshop. The
enthusiasm and sincerity shown by the teachers from various colleges in the context of
syllabus restructuring is highly appreciated.
For the Board of Studies in Physics,
Kottayam
05-05-2016
Prof. K. G. Thomas
(Chairman)
LIST OF MEMBERS OF BOARD OF STUDIES (UG)
1.
Prof. K. G Thomas Chairman, Board of Studies for Physics(UG) (e-mail:
[email protected], Mob: 9496327583)
2.
Dr. Sunny Mathew, Associate Professor, Department of Physics, St. Thomas College,
Pala. (e-mail: [email protected], Mob: 9447964990)
3.
Dr. Jochan Joseph, Associate professor, Department of Physics, St. Aloysius
College, Edathua. (e-mail: [email protected], Mob: 9447596975)
4.
Dr .George James, Associate Professor. Department of Physics, Newman College,
Thodupuzha (email: [email protected])
5.
Dr. Simon Augustine, Associate Professor, Department of Physics, St. Thomas College,
Pala. (e-mail: [email protected], Mob: 9447572374)
6.
Prof. K. C. Zacharia. Associate Professor, Department of Physics, St. Thomas College,
Kozhenchery.
7.
Dr. Samuel Mathew, Associate Professor, Department of Physics, Mar Thoma College
Thuruvalla. (Mob: 9446066490)
8.
Dr. Jacob Mathew M, Associate Professor, Department of Physics, S. B.
Changanassery.
9.
Prof. Sam Rajan, Assistant Professor, Department of Physics, CMS College,
Kottayam. (e-mail: [email protected], Mob: 9567453866)
10.
Smt. Anitha S Nair, Associate Professor, Department of Physics, D B Pampa College,
Parumala
11.
Dr. V. P. Joseph, Associate Professor, Department of Physics, Christ College,
Irinjalakuda.
2
College,
2.
INTRODUCTION.
Mahatma Gandhi University introduced choice based credit and semester and
Grading System in colleges affiliated to the University from the Academic year 200910, under Direct Grading System. Subsequently, the Kerala State
Higher Education
Council constituted a committee of experts headed by Prof. B. Hridayakumari, to study
and make recommendations for the improvement of the working of the Choice Based Credit
and Semester System in Colleges affiliated to the Universities in the State. The State
Government accepted the recommendations of the Committee and the Syndicate and the
Academic Council of the Mahatma Gandhi University has resolved to reform the existing
CBCSS
regulations.
Accordingly
REGULATIONS
FOR
UNDER
GRADUATE
PROGRAMMES UNDER CHOICE BASED COURSE-CREDIT-SEMESTER SYSTEM
AND GRADING, 2013 was introduced in the University from the Academic year 2013-14
onwards, under Indirect Grading System. The University Grants Commission, in order to
facilitate student mobility across institutions within and across countries and also to enable
potential employers to assess the performance of students, insisted to introduce uniform
grading system in the Universities. The Academic Council of the Mahatma Gandhi
University at its meeting held on 23rd May 2015 resolved to introduce the UGC Guidelines
for Choice Based Credit Semester System from the Academic year 2016-17 onwards and the
syndicate of the University at its meeting held on 1st August 2015 approved the resolution of
the Academic Council. Hence it becomes necessary to modify the existing CBCSS regulation
as follows.
4. TITLE
B. Sc. PHYSICS PROGRAMME – Under Graduate Programmes under Choice
Based Credit System, 2016” (UG CBCS β016).
5. SCOPE
5.1.
Applicable to regular Undergraduate Programme -Physics conducted by the
University with effect from 2016 admissions, except for B. Voc programmes. Also applicable
to distance/private Undergraduate Programme- Physics with suitable modifications.
5.2 The provisions herein supersede all the existing regulations for the
regular/distance/private undergraduate Programme -Physics to the extent herein prescribed.
3
6. AIMS AND OBJECTIVES OF THE PROGRAMME
6.1 Aims:
The Board of Studies in Physics (UG) recognizes that curriculum, course content and
assessment of scholastic achievement play complementary roles in shaping education. The
committee is of the view that assessment should support and encourage the broad
instructional goals such as basic knowledge of the discipline of Physics including
phenomenology, theories and techniques, concepts and general principles. This should also
support the ability to ask physical questions and to obtain solutions to physical questions by
use of qualitative and quantitative reasoning and by experimental investigation. The
important student attributes including appreciation of the physical world and the discipline of
Physics, curiosity, creativity and reasoned skepticism and understanding links of Physics to
other disciplines and to societal issues should gave encouragement. With this in mind, we
aim to provide a firm foundation in every aspect of Physics and to explain a broad spectrum
of modern trends in physics and to develop experimental, computational and mathematics
skills of students.
1. The programme also aims to develop the following abilities:
2. Read, understand and interpret physical information – verbal, mathematical and
graphical.
3. Impart skills required to gather information from resources and use them.
4. To give need based education in physics of the highest quality at the undergraduate
level.
5. Offer courses to the choice of the students.
6. Perform experiments and interpret the results of observation, including making an
assessment of experimental uncertainties.
7. Provide an intellectually stimulating environment to develop skills and enthusiasms of
students to the best of their potential.
8. Use Information Communication Technology to gather knowledge at will.
9. Attract outstanding students from all backgrounds.
6.2 Objectives:
The syllabi are framed in such a way that it bridges the gap between the plus two and
post graduate levels of Physics by providing a more complete and logical framework in
almost all areas of basic Physics.
4
By the end of the first year (2nd semester), the students should have attained a common
level in basic mechanics, physical optics, a secure foundation in mathematics, Chemistry,
Languages and other relevant subjects to complement the core for their future courses and
developed their experimental and data analysis skills through experiments at laboratories.
By the end of the fourth semester, the students should have been introduced to powerful tools
for tackling a wide range of topics in Mechanics and Basic Electronics Semiconductor
devices and circuits. Along with Languages, they should have been familiar with additional
relevant techniques in mathematics, Chemistry and developed their experimental and data
analysis skills through a wide range of experiments through practical at laboratories.
By the end of the sixth semester, the students should have developed their
understanding of core Physics by covering a range of topics in almost all areas of physics
including Quantum Mechanics, Electricity and Electrodynamics, Relativity and spectroscopy,
Thermal
and Statistical Physics, Nuclear and Particle
physics, Solid State Physics,
Optoelectronics, Digital Electronics and Microprocessor etc. along with two choice based
courses and had experience of independent work such as projects; seminars etc. and thereby
developing their experimental skills through a series of experiments which also illustrate
major themes of the lecture courses.
7. COURSE DESIGN - B. Sc. PROGRAMMES IN PHYSICS
The U.G. programme in Physics must include (a) Common courses, (b) Core courses,
(c) Complementary Courses, (d) Choice based courses (e) Generic elective and (f) Project.
No course shall carry more than 4 credits. The student shall select any one Generic Elective
course in Semester 5 offered by the Departments which offers the core courses or physical
education department, depending on the availability of
infrastructure facilities, in the
institution. The number of Courses for the restructured programme should contain 12
compulsory core courses, 1 generic elective, 1 choice based course from the frontier area of
the core courses, 6 core practicals, 1 project in the area of core, 8 complementary courses, 2
complementary practicals otherwise specified, from the relevant subjects for complementing
the core of study. There should be 10 common courses, or otherwise specified, which
includes the first and second language of study.
5
7.1. Programme structure
Model I B. Sc
A
Programme Duration
6 Semesters
B
Total Credits required for successful completion of the
Programme
120
C
Credits required from Common Course I
22
D
Credits required from Common Course II
16
E
Credits required from Core course (including Project) and
Complementary courses
79
F
Generic Elective (GE)
3
G
Minimum attendance required
75%
Model II B. Sc
A
Programme Duration
6 Semesters
B
Programme
120
C
16
D
Credits required from Common Course II
8
E
Credits required from Core (including Project ) +
Complementary + Vocational Courses
93
F
3
G
75%
Model III B. Sc
A
Programme Duration
6 Semesters
B
Programme
C
D
Credits required from Core I + Core II + Complementary +
Project
E
F
120
8
109
3
75%
6
7.2 Courses:
There shall be three different types (models) of courses in Physics programme. The
programme (Model I) consists of common courses with 38 credits, core, Choice based
course, Generic elective & complementary courses with 82 credits. The programme
(Vocational -Model II) consists of common courses with 24 credits, core, Choice based
courses, Generic elective & complementary courses with 96 credits. The programme (Model
III) consists of common courses with 8 credits, core, Choice based course, Generic elective &
complementary courses with 112 credits.
7.3 Scheme of Courses:
The different types of courses and its number are as the following:
Model- I
Courses
Common Courses
Core Courses
Project
Core Practicals
Generic Elective
Choice based Course
No.
10
12
1
6
1
1
Model- II
Courses
Common Courses
Core Courses
Project
Core Practicals
Generic Elective
Choice based Course
Vocational courses
Vocational Practicals
OJT
Complementary
Courses
Complementary Courses
8
Complementary Practicals
2
41 Total
Total
No.
6
12
1
6
1
1
8
3
2
4
Model- III
Courses
Common Courses
First Core Courses
Project
First Core Practicals
Generic Elective
Choice based Course
Second Core Courses
Second Core Practicals
OJT
Complementary
Courses
Complementary Practicals
44
Total
No.
2
12
1
6
1
1
8
3
2
8
2
46
7.4. Course Code:
Every course is coded using an eight digit alpha numeric code that gives a brief
description on the following details.
A. Subject Code (2 characters)
Composed of two characters, which gives a meaningful abbreviation of the subject to
which the paper belongs to.
The abbreviations used here are PH – Physics, AE – Applied Electronics, CA –
Computer Application, EM – Electronic Equipment Maintenance, IN –
Instrumentation, and
EL - Electronics
B. Semester to which course belongs to (1 digit)
Composed of single digit number which indicates the semester to which the paper
belongs to (1to 6). In case of Practicals the number indicates the semester in which
the exam in conducted.
7
C. Course type as per syllabus (2 characters)
Composed of two characters which gives meaningful abbreviation of type of the
course. The abbreviations used here are CM – Complementary Course, CB – Choice
Based Core, CR – Core Course, GE – Generic Elective, OJ – On Job Training, PR –
Project, and
VO – Vocational Course
D. Whether ‘Theory’ or ‘Practical’ or ‘Other’ (1 character)
Letter ‘T’ is used to denote Theory papers, the letter ‘P’ for Practical papers and the
letter ‘O’ to denote Other papers like Project, On Job Training, etc.
E. Serial number of the course in continuous series (2 digits)
Composed of two digits to indicate the paper’s relative position in the programme.
Eg. 01 indicates 1st paper, 05 indicates 5th paper, etc.
Sample Course Code
The Course code “PH1CRT01” indicates that the paper is
“Physics – 1st Semester – Core Course – Theory – 1st paper”
7.5. Courses with Credits:
Courses with Credits of different courses and scheme of examinations of the programme is
the following
Courses
Model I
Credits
Model II
Total
Credits
Total
Model III
Credits
Core Courses
46
46
46
Generic Elective
3
3
3
Choice Based Core
3
3
3
Project
2
2
2
28
Nil
Vocational Courses
Nil
2nd Core Courses
Nil
Total
54
Complementary Courses I
14
Complementary Courses II
14
Total
Common Courses
Nil
30
82
14
84
14
Nil
28
14
14
38
Total
24
28
8
Total
38
24
8
Grand Total
120
120
120
8
7.6. Scheme of Distribution of Instructional hours for Core courses:
Model I
Model II
Model III
Semester
Theory Practical
Theory Practical
Theory
Practical
First semester
2
2
2
2
8
4
Second semester
2
2
2
2
6
4
Third semester
3
2
3
2
9
6
Fourth semester
3
2
3
2
9
6
Fifth semester
17
8
17
8
17
8
Sixth Semester
17
8
17
8
17
8
8. DEFINITIONS
8.1 ‘Academic Week’ is a unit of five working days in which the distribution of work is
organized from day one to day five, with five contact hours of one hour duration on
each day.
8.2 ‘Choice Based Course’ means a course that enables the students to familiarize the
advanced areas of core course.
8.3 ‘Common Course I’ means a course that comes under the category of courses for
English and Environmental Studies & Human Rights and ‘Common Course II’ means
additional language.
8.4 ‘Complementary Course’ means a course which would enrich the study of core courses.
8.5 ‘Core course’ means a course in the subject of specialization within a degree
programme.
8.6 ‘Course’ comprises ‘Paper(s)’ which will be taught and evaluated within a programme.
8.7 ‘Credit’ is the numerical value assigned to a paper according to the relative importance
of the syllabus of the programme.
8.8 ‘Generic Elective (GE)’ means an elective paper chosen from any discipline/ subject, in
an advanced area.
8.9 ‘Grade’ means a letter symbol (A, B, C, etc.), which indicates the broad level of
performance of a student in a Paper/Course/ Semester/Programme.
8.10 ‘Grade Point’ (GP) is the numerical indicator of the percentage of marks awarded to
a student in a paper.
9
8.11 ‘Paper’ means a complete unit of learning which will be taught and evaluated within
a semester.
8.12 ‘Parent Department’ means the department which offers core course/courses within
an undergraduate programme.
8.13 ‘Programme’ means a three year programme of study and examinations spread over
six semesters, the successful completion of which would lead to the award of a degree.
8.14 ‘Semester’ means a term consisting of 90 working days, inclusive of tutorials,
examination days and other academic activities within a period of six months.
8.15 ‘Vocational Course’ (Skill Enhancement Course) means a course that enables the
students to enhance their practical skills and ability to pursue a vocation in their subject
of specialization.
9. ELIGIBILITY FOR ADMISSION AND RESERVATION OF SEATS
9.1
Eligibility for admission, norms for admission and reservation of seats for various
Undergraduate Programmes shall be according to the regulations framed/orders issued
by the University in this regard, from time to time.
9.2 Students can opt for any one of the Generic Elective Papers offered by different
departments of the college in fifth semester (subject to the availability of vacancy in the
concerned discipline).If the number of applications exceeds the number of vacancies for
a particular Generic elective paper, priority will be given to the students from the parent
department (core subject). Selection of students in the generic elective paper will be done
in the college based on merit and interest of the students.
10. DURATION OF COURSE
10.1 The duration of U.G. Programmes shall be 6 semesters.
10.2 A student may be permitted to complete the programme, on valid reasons, within a
period of 12 continuous semesters from the date of commencement of the first semester
of the programme.
11. ATTENDANCE
Students having a minimum of 75% average attendance for all the courses only can
register for the examination.
Attendance Evaluation (For all papers)
% of attendance
Marks
90 and above
5
85 – 89
4
80-84
3
76-79
2
75
1
(Decimals are to be rounded to the next higher whole number)
10
12. MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION
Medium of instructions can be either in English or Malayalam.
13. EXAMINATIONS & EVALUATIONS.
13.1 Evaluation of each paper
The evaluation of each paper shall contain two parts:
(i) Internal or In-Semester Assessment (ISA)
(ii) External or End-Semester Assessment (ESA)
The internal to external assessment ratio shall be 1:4. There shall be a maximum of 80 marks
for external evaluation and maximum of 20 marks for internal evaluation. Both internal and
external marks are to be mathematically rounded to the nearest integer.
For all papers (theory & practical), grades are given on a 10-point scale based on the total
percentage of marks, (ISA+ESA) as given below:Percentage of Marks
95 and above
85 to below 95
75 to below 85
65 to below 75
55 to below 65
45 to below 55
40 to below 45
Below 40
Grade
S
A+
A
B+
B
C
D
F
Ab
Outstanding
Excellent
Very Good
Good
Above Average
Satisfactory
Pass
failure
Absent
Grade Point
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
0
0
13.2 CREDIT POINT AND CREDIT POINT AVERAGE
Credit Point (CP) of a paper is calculated using the formula:CP = C × GP, where C is the Credit and GP is the Grade point
Semester Grade Point Average (SGPA) of a Semester is calculated using the formula:SGPA = TCP/TC, where TCP is the Total Credit Point of that semester, � , ∑� CPi;
TC is the Total Credit of that semester� , ∑� Ci, where n is the number of papers in that semester
Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) is calculated using the formula:CGPA = TCP/TC, where TCP is the Total Credit Point of that programme� , ∑� CPi; TC is the
Total Credit of that programme, ie, ∑� Ci , where n is the number of papers in that programme
Grade Point Average (GPA) of a Course (Common Course I, Common Course II,
Complementary Course I, Complementary Course II, Vocational course, Core Course) is
calculated using the formula:GPA = TCP/TC, where TCP is the Total Credit Point of course ie, ∑� CPi;
11
TC is the Total Credit of that course, ie, ∑� Ci, Where n is the number of papers in that course.
Grades for the different courses, semesters and overall programme are given based on the
corresponding CPA as shown below:
GPA
Grade
9.5 and above
S
8.5 to below 9.5
A+ Excellent
7.5 to below 8.5
A
6.5 to below 7.5
B+ Good
5.5 to below 6.5
B
Above Average
4.5 to below 5.5
C
Satisfactory
4.0 to below 4.5
D
Pass
Below 4.0
F
Failure
Outstanding
Very Good
Note: A separate minimum of 30% marks each for internal and external (for both theory and
practical) and aggregate minimum of 40% are required for a pass for each paper .For a pass in a
candidate secures F Grade for any one of the papers offered in a semester/programme only F
grade will be awarded for that Semester/Programme until he/she improves this to D grade or
above within the permitted period.
13.3 Marks distribution for external examination and internal evaluation
The external theory examination of all semesters shall be conducted by the University at
the end of each semester. Internal evaluation is to be done by continuous assessment. For all
papers (theory and practical) total marks of external examination is 80 and total marks of internal
evaluation is 20.
Marks distribution for external and internal assessments and the components for internal
evaluation with their marks are shown below:
Components of the internal evaluation and their marks are as below.
13. 3.1 For all theory papers
a) Marks of external Examination : 80
b) Marks of internal evaluation
: 20
All the three components of the internal assessment are mandatory.
Components of evaluation
Attendance
Assignment/Seminar/Viva
Test Paper(s) (1 or2) (1x10=10; 2x5=10)
Total
12
MARKS
5
5
10
20
13. 3.2 For all practical papers (conducted only at the end of even semesters)
b) Marks of internal evaluation
: 20
All the three components of the internal assessment are mandatory.
Components of Evaluation
Attendance
Record*
Lab involvement
Total
Marks
5
10
5
20
*Marks awarded for Record should be related to number of experiments recorded.
13. 3.3 For projects
All students are to do a project in the area of core course. This project can be done
individually or in groups (not more than five students) for all subjects which may be carried out
in or outside the campus. The projects are to be identified during the II semester of the
programme with the help of the supervising teacher. The report of the project in duplicate is to
be submitted to the department at the sixth semester and are to be produced before the examiners
appointed by the University. External Project evaluation and Viva / Presentation is compulsory
for all subjects and will be conducted at the end of the programme.
b)
Components of Evaluation (External)
Dissertation (External)
Marks
50
Viva-Voce(External)
30
Total
80
Marks of internal evaluation: 20 (All the four components of the internal assessment are mandatory)
Components of Internal Evaluation
Marks
Punctuality
5
Experimentation/Data Collection
5
Knowledge
5
Report
5
Total
20
13. 3.4 OJT Evaluation (Internal evaluation: 100 marks)
Components of Internal Evaluation
Punctuality
Marks
20
Knowledge
20
Experimentation
20
Report
25
Presentation & Viva Voce
15
Total
100
13
13.4 Assignments
Assignments are to be done from 1st to 4th Semesters, At least one assignment should
be done in each semester for all papers.
13.5 Seminar/ Viva
A student shall present a seminar in the 5th semester and appear for Viva- voce in the
6th semester for all papers.
13.6 Internal assessment test papers
At least one internal test- paper is to be attended in each semester for each paper. The
evaluations of all components are to be published and are to be acknowledged by the
candidates. All documents of internal assessments are to be kept in the college for two years
and shall be made available for verification by the University. The responsibility of
evaluating the internal assessment is vested on the teacher(s) who teach the paper.
13.7 External examination
The external theory examination of all semesters shall be conducted by the University of the
end of each semester.
13.7.1 Students having a minimum of 75% average attendance for all the course only can
register for the examination,
13.7.2 There will be no supplementary exams. For reappearance/ improvement, the students
can appear along with the next batch.
13.7.3 A candidate who has not secured minimum marks/credits in internal examinations can
re-do the same registering along with the University examination for the same
semester, subsequently.
14. CONDUCT OF PRACTICAL EXAMINATIONS
14.1 Practical examinations will be conducted only at the end of even semesters for all
programmes.
14.2 Pattern of questions for external examination of practical papers will be decided by
the concerned Board of practical examination.
15 PATTERN OF QUESTIONS (Theory papers)
Questions shall be set to assess, knowledge acquired, standard application of
knowledge, application of knowledge in new situations, critical evaluation of knowledge and
the ability to synthesize knowledge. The question setter shall ensure that questions covering
all skills are set. He/ She shall also submit a detailed scheme of evaluation along with the
question paper.
A question paper shall be a judicious mix of very short type, short answer type, short essay
type/ problem solving type and long essay type questions
14
Short Answer
Total no. of No of questions Marks
for Total
questions
to be answered
each Question marks
12
9
2
18
Answer
9
6
4
24
Problem/Short Essay
5
3
6
18
Essay
4
2
10
20
Total
30
20
15
80
16.
Consolidated Scheme for I to VI semesters
Credits
5
4
90
3
20
80
English II/ Common Course I
4
3
72
3
20
80
Second Language I
4
4
72
3
20
80
PH1CRT01 - Mechanics I
2
2
36
3
20
80
Complementary I: Mathematics I
4
3
72
3
20
80
Complementary II: Chemistry I
2
2
36
3
20
80
Core Practical I: PH2CRP01
Mechanics, Acoustics and Optics
2
-
36
-
-
-
Complementary II Practical I
2
-
36
-
-
-
English II
5
4
90
3
20
80
English III/ Common Course II
4
3
72
3
20
80
Second Language II
4
4
72
3
20
80
PH2CRT02 – Optics
2
2
36
3
20
80
Complementary I: Mathematics II
4
3
72
3
20
80
Complementary II: Chemistry II
2
2
36
3
20
80
Complementary II Practical I
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
English
5
4
90
3
20
80
II Lang/Common Course I
5
4
90
3
20
80
PH3CRT03 – Mechanics II
3
3
54
3
20
80
3
Complementary I: Mathematics III
5
4
90
3
20
80
Complementary II: Chemistry III
3
3
54
3
20
80
Core Practical II: PH4CRP02
Mechanics and Electronics
Complementary II Practical II
2
-
36
-
-
-
2
-
36
-
-
-
Title of the Course
III
16
Total hrs
Hours\week
2
Marks
English I
Semester
1
University
Exam duration
1. B. Sc. Physics Programme – (Model - I)
IA
EA
English
4
5
6
IV
5
4
90
3
20
80
II Lang/ Common Course II
5
4
90
3
20
80
PH4CRT04 Basic Electronics
3
3
54
3
20
80
Complementary I: Mathematics IV
5
4
90
3
20
80
Complementary II: Chemistry IV
3
3
54
3
20
80
Complementary II Practical II
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
PH5CRT05 – Quantum Mechanics
3
3
54
3
20
80
PH5CRT06 – Electricity and Electrodynamics
4
3
72
3
20
80
PH5CRT07 – Relativity and Spectroscopy
4
3
72
3
20
80
PH5CRT08 – Thermal and Statistical Physics
3
3
54
3
20
80
Generic Elective
3
3
54
3
20
80
Core Practical III: PH6CRP03
Electricity and Spectroscopy
Core Practical IV: PH6CRP04
Digital Electronics and Microprocessor
Core Practical V: PH6CRP05
Thermal Physics and Properties of Matter
Core Practical VI: PH6CRP06
Optoelectronics and Solid State Physics
PH6CRT09
Nuclear, Particle physics and Astrophysics
PH6CRT10 - Solid State Physics
2
-
36
-
-
-
2
-
36
-
-
-
2
-
36
-
-
-
2
-
36
-
-
-
3
3
54
3
20
80
4
3
72
3
20
80
PH6CRT11 – Optoelectronics
3
3
54
3
20
80
PH6CRT12
Digital Electronics & Microprocessor
Choice Based Course
4
3
72
3
20
80
3
3
54
3
20
80
PH6PRO01 – Project
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
-
2
-
-
20
80
17
2. B. Sc. Physics Programme – (Model -II)
3
English I
Second Language I
PH1CRT01 - Mechanics I
Complementary I – Mathematics I
5
5
2
5
4
4
2
3
90
90
36
90
3
3
3
3
20
20
20
20
80
80
80
80
AE1VOT01
Principle of Electronics Components
AE1VOT02 - Electronics Application
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
Mechanics, Acoustics & Optics
2
-
36
-
-
-
Vocational Practical –I: AE2VOP01
2
-
36
-
-
-
English II
Second language II
PH2CRT02 – Optics
Complementary I – Mathematics II
AE2VOT03 - Basics of power Electronics
AE2VOT04 - Power Electronics
5
5
2
5
2
2
4
4
2
3
2
2
90
90
36
72
36
36
3
3
3
3
3
3
20
20
20
20
20
20
80
80
80
80
80
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
Vocational Practical I: AE2VOP01
2
2
36
3
20
80
English III
Complementary I – Mathematics III
AE3VOT05 - Linear Integrated Circuits
AE3VOT06 - Communication Electronics
5
3
5
3
3
4
3
4
3
3
90
54
90
54
54
3
3
3
3
3
20
20
20
20
20
80
80
80
80
80
Mechanics & Electronics
2
-
36
-
-
-
Vocational Practical II: AE4VOP02
2
-
36
-
-
-
Vocational Practical III: AE4VOP03
2
-
36
-
-
-
Title of the Course
18
Unty. Exam
duration
Total hrs/sem
2
Credits
1
Hrs \week
Semester
Vocational Subject 1: APPLIED ELECTRONICS
Marks
EA
IA
English IV
PH4CRT04 Basic Electronics
Complementary I – Mathematics IV
4
AE4VOT07
Microprocessor and Interfacing Devices
AE4VOT08 - Applications of Microprocessors
Core Practical II PH4 CRP02
AE4OJO01: On Job Training
5
6
PH5CRT06 – Electricity and
PH5CRT08 – Thermal and Statistical
Generic Elective
PH6CRT09
PH6CRT12 Digital Electronics and Micro
Processors
Choice Based Course
19
5
3
5
3
4
3
4
3
90
54
90
3
3
3
20
20
20
80
80
80
54
3
20
80
3
3
54
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
0
3
4
4
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
3
54
72
72
54
54
3
3
3
3
3
100
20
20
20
20
20
80
80
80
80
80
2
-
36
-
-
-
2
-
36
-
-
-
2
-
36
-
-
-
2
-
36
-
-
-
3
3
54
3
20
80
4
3
3
3
72
54
3
3
20
20
80
80
4
3
72
3
20
80
3
3
54
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
-
2
-
-
20
80
Credits
hrs/semester
Unty. Exam
duration
English I
5
4
90
3
20
80
Second Language I
5
4
90
3
20
80
PH1CRT01 – Mechanics I
2
2
36
3
20
80
Complementary I – Mathematics I
5
3
90
3
20
80
CA1VOT01 - Computer Fundamentals
2
2
36
3
20
80
CA1VOT02
Operating System and Computer Networks
Vocational Practical I: CA2VOP01
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
-
36
-
-
-
2
-
36
-
-
-
English II
5
4
90
3
20
80
Second Language II
5
4
90
3
20
80
PH2CRT02 – Optics
2
2
36
3
20
80
5
3
72
3
20
80
CA2VOT03
Word and Data processing Packages
CA2VOT04 - Programming in ANSI C
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
Vocational Practical 2 CA2 V0P01
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
English III
5
4
90
3
20
80
3
3
54
3
20
80
Complementary I – Mathematics III
5
4
90
3
20
80
CA3VOT05
Concepts of Object Oriented Programming
CA3VOT06 - C++ PROGRAMMING
3
3
54
3
20
80
3
3
54
3
20
80
Vocational Practical II: CA4VOP02
2
-
36
-
-
-
2
-
36
-
-
-
Vocational Practical III: CA4VOP03
2
-
36
-
-
-
Semester
Hours\week
Vocational Subject 2: COMPUTER APPLICATION
1
2
3
Title of the Course
20
marks
IA
EA
4
5
6
English IV
5
4
90
3
20
80
PH4CRT04 - Basic Electronics
3
3
54
3
20
80
Complementary I – Mathematics IV
5
4
90
3
20
80
CA4VOT07 - Visual Basic Programming
3
3
54
3
20
80
CA4VOT08
Computer Web Application and Graphics
Vocational Practical II: CA4VOP02
3
3
54
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
Vocational Practical III: CA4VOP03
2
2
36
3
20
80
CA4OJO01 - On Job Training
0
2
100
-
3
3
54
3
20
80
4
3
72
3
20
80
4
3
72
3
20
80
3
3
54
3
20
80
Generic Elective
3
3
54
3
20
80
PH6CRT09
2
-
36
-
-
-
2
-
36
-
-
-
2
-
36
-
-
-
2
-
36
-
-
-
3
3
54
3
20
80
4
3
72
3
20
80
3
3
54
3
20
80
PH6CRT12
Digital Electronics & Microprocessor
Choice Based Course
4
3
72
3
20
80
3
3
54
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
-
2
-
-
20
80
21
Generic Elective Courses for Model I and Model II B. Sc. Physics Programmes
Sl. No.
Semester
Paper Title
1
V
PH5GET01: Material Science
2
V
PH5GET02: Computational Physics
3
V
PH5GET03: Instrumentation
Choice Based Course for Model I and Model II B. Sc. Physics Programmes
Sl. No.
Semester
Paper Title
1
VI
PH6CBT01: Nanoscience and Nanotechnology
2
VI
PH6CBT02: Renewable Energy
3
VI
PH6CBT03: Astronomy and Astrophysics
22
3. B. Sc. Physics (Model -III) Programme (2 Core Courses)
University Exam
duration
5
4
90
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
EM1CRT01 - Principles of Electronics
3
2
54
3
20
80
EM1CRT02 - Communication Engineering
3
2
54
3
20
80
1
4
3
72
3
20
80
Complementary II : CA1CMT01
Computer Fundamentals
2
2
36
3
20
80
Core 1 Practical I: PH2CRP01
Mechanics, Acoustics and optics
Core 2 Practical I: EM2CRP01
2
-
36
-
-
-
2
-
36
-
-
-
Complementary II Practical I: CA2CMP01
2
-
36
-
-
-
English II
5
4
90
3
20
80
PH2CRT02 – Optics
2
2
36
3
20
80
EM2CRT03 - Power Electronics
3
2
54
3
20
80
EM2CRT04 – Analogue Integrated Circuits
3
2
54
3
20
80
4
3
72
3
20
80
2
Complementary II: CA2CMT02
Object oriented programming with C++
Core 2 Practical I: EM2CRP01
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
Complementary II Practical I: CA2CMP01
2
2
36
3
20
80
EM2OJO01- On Job Training I
0
2
0
-
100
-
No. of hours per
week
No. of Credits
English I
Semester
Total hrs/semester
(1) ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
Title of the Course
23
marks
IA
EA
3
4
5
3
3
54
3
20
80
EM3CRT05
Microprocessor and its applications
EM3CRT06
Trouble Shooting of Audio Equipments
Complementary I - Mathematics III
3
3
54
3
20
80
3
3
54
3
20
80
5
4
90
3
20
80
Java Programming Language
Core 1 Practical II: PH4CRP02
Core 2 Practical II: EM4CRP02
3
3
54
3
20
80
2
-
36
-
-
-
2
-
36
-
-
-
Core 2 Practical III: EM4CRP03
2
-
36
-
-
-
Complementary II Practical II: CA4CMP02
2
-
36
-
-
-
PH4CRT04 - Basic Electronics
3
3
54
3
20
80
EM4CRT07 - Network Theory
3
3
54
3
20
80
EM4CRT08
Trouble Shooting of Video Equipments
3
3
54
3
20
80
5
4
90
3
20
80
The Java Library
3
3
54
3
20
80
Core 2 Practical II: EM4CRP02
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
Core 2 Practical III: EM4CRP03
2
2
36
3
20
80
Complementary II Practical II: CA4CMP02
2
2
36
3
20
80
EM4OJ02: On Job Training II
0
2
0
-
100
-
3
3
54
3
20
80
4
3
72
3
20
80
PH5CRT07 – Relativity and spectroscopy
4
3
72
3
20
80
3
3
54
3
20
80
Generic Elective (core 2)
3
3
54
3
20
80
Core 1 Practical III: PH6CRP03
Core 1 Practical IV: PH6CRP04
Core 1 Practical V: PH6CRP05
Core 1 Practical VI: PH6CRP06
2
-
36
-
-
80
2
-
36
-
-
80
2
-
36
-
-
80
2
-
36
-
-
80
24
6
PH6CRT09
3
3
54
3
20
80
4
3
72
3
20
80
3
3
54
3
20
80
PH6CCRT12
4
3
72
3
20
80
Choice Based Course (core 2)
3
3
54
3
20
80
PH6BO6U Project
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
-
3
20
80
-
Generic Elective (core 2) for B. Sc. Physics (Model III) EEM Programme
Sl. No.
Semester
Paper Title
1
V
EM5GET01: IC Technology
2
V
EM5GET02: Digital Signal Processing
3
V
EM5GET03: Microcontrollers and Embedded Systems
Choice Based Course (core 2) for B. Sc. Physics (Model III) EEM Programme
Sl.
Semester
Paper Title
1
VI
EM6CBT01: Computer Hardware And Networking
2
VI
EM6CBT02: Modern Communication Systems
3
VI
EM6CBT03: Advanced Networks and Systems
No.
25
2
3
Total
hrs/semester
University
Exam duration
Credits
1
hours \ week
Semester
(2) INSTRUMENTATION
English - I
IN1CRT01 - Basics of Mechanical Engineering
IN1CRT02 - Basic Instrumentation
Complementary II: EL1CMT01
Electronics I
Core 2 Practical I: IN2CRP01
Complementary II Practical I: EL2CMP01
English II
PH2CRT02 – Optics
IN2CRT03 - Basic Measurements
IN2CRT04 - Industrial Instrumentation 1
Complementary I: Mathematics II
Electronics II
Core 1 Practical I:PH2CRP01
Core 2 Practical I: IN2CRP01
Complementary II Practical I: EL2CMP01
5
2
3
3
4
4
2
2
2
3
90
36
54
54
72
3
3
3
3
3
20
20
20
20
20
80
80
80
80
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
-
36
-
-
-
2
2
5
2
3
3
4
4
2
2
2
3
36
36
90
36
54
54
72
3
3
3
3
3
20
20
20
20
20
80
80
80
80
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
2
2
36
36
3
3
20
20
80
80
IN2OJO01 - On Job Training I
0
3
2
3
54
3
100
20
80
IN3CRT05- Industrial Instrumentation 2
3
3
54
3
20
80
IN3CRT06 - Transducers and Signal Conditioners
3
3
54
3
20
80
Complementary I: Mathematics III
5
4
90
3
20
80
Electronics III
Mechanics and electronics
Core 2 Practical II: IN4CRP02
3
3
54
3
20
80
2
-
36
-
-
-
2
-
36
-
-
-
Core 2 Practical III: IN4CRP03
2
-
36
-
-
-
Complementary II Practical II: EL4CMP02
2
-
36
-
-
-
Title of the Course
26
Marks
IA
EA
4
5
6
PH4CRT04: Basic Electronics
3
IN4CRT07 - Microprocessor and Microcontroller
3
IN4CRT08 - Industrial Automation
3
5
Complementary II: EL4CMT04 - Electronics IV
3
2
Core 2 Practical II: IN4CRP02
2
Core 2 Practical III: IN4CRP03
2
Complementary II Practical II: EL4CMP02
2
IN4OJO02 - On Job Training II
0
3
4
PH5CRT07 – Relativity and spectroscopy
4
3
Generic Elective (core 2)
3
2
2
2
2
PH6CRT09
3
4
3
PH6CRT12 - Digital Electronics and Microprocessor 4
Choice Based Course (core 2)
3
2
2
2
2
-
27
3
3
3
4
3
72
54
72
90
72
3
3
3
3
3
20
20
20
20
20
80
80
80
80
80
2
36
3
20
80
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
-
36
36
36
54
72
72
54
54
36
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
20
20
20
100
20
20
20
20
20
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
20
80
-
36
3
20
80
-
36
3
20
80
-
36
3
20
80
3
54
3
20
80
3
3
3
3
2
72 3
54 3
72 3
54 3
36 3
20
20
20
20
80
80
80
80
20
80
2
36
3
20
80
2
36
3
20
80
2
36
3
20
80
2
-
3
20
80
Generic Elective (core 2) for B. Sc. Physics (Model III) Instrumentation
Sl. No.
Semester
Paper Title
1
V
IN5GET01 - Digital Electronics
2
V
IN5GET02 -Process Control Instrumentation
3
V
IN5GET03-Biomedical Instrumentation
Choice Based Course (core 2) for B. Sc. Physics (Model III) Instrumentation
Sl.
Semester
Paper Title
1
VI
IN6CBT01- Analytical Instrumentation
2
VI
3
VI
IN6CBT02
Ultrasonic and Optoelectronic Instrumentation
IN6CBT03 - Power Plant Instrumentation
No.
28
17. SYLLABUS CORE & COPLIMENTARY
17.1 B.Sc. Physics Programme (Model -I)
Semester-1
36 hours (Credit – 2)
Core Course: I
PH1CRT01: MECHANICS-I
Module I
Elasticity
(10 hours)
Basic ideas on elasticity, Young’s modulus, bulk modulus, isothermal and adiabatic
elasticities, rigidity modulus, Poisson’s ratio, relations connecting various elastic constants,
work done per unit volume in deforming a body, angle of twist and angle of shear, work done
in twisting a wire or rod, determination of rigidity modulus (static and dynamic methods)
bending of beams, uniform and non-uniform bending, bending moment, flexural rigidity,
cantilever, I –section girders.
Text book: Mechanics by J.C. Upadhayaya-Chapter 12
Module II
Oscillations
(12 hours)
Periodic motion, simple harmonic motion and harmonic oscillator, energy of a harmonic
oscillator, examples of harmonic oscillator, simple and compound pendulum, anharmonic
oscillator, composition of two simple harmonic motions of equal periods in a straight line,
composition of two rectangular simple harmonic motions of equal periods: Lissajous figures,
damping force, damped harmonic oscillator, examples of damped harmonic oscillator, power
dissipation, quality factor, forced harmonic oscillator, resonance.
Text book: Mechanics by J.C. Upadhayaya-Chapter9,10
Module III
Wave motion
(8 hours)
General equation of wave motion, plane progressive harmonic wave, energy density,
intensity of a wave, superposition of waves, beats, transverse waves in stretched strings,
modes.
Text book: Mechanics by J.C. Upadhayaya-Chapter11
29
Module IV
Acoustics
(6 hours)
Intensity of sound- decibel and bel, loudness of sound, ultrasonics, piezoelectric effect,
production of ultrasonic waves- piezo electric crystal method, properties of ultrasonic waves,
determination of velocity of ultrasonic waves in a liquid, application of ultrasonic waves,
reverberation, Sabine’s formula (derivation not required), absorption coefficient, acoustics of
buildings, noise pollution.
Text book: Properties of Matter and Acoustics by Murugeshan and K. Sivaprasath-Unit 4
Text books:
1. Mechanics by J.C. Upadhayaya, Ramprasad publications
2. Properties of Matter and Acoustics by Murugeshan and K. Sivaprasath, S. Chand
References:
1. Mechanics by Hans and Puri, TMH
2. Mechanics by D.S. Mathur and P.S. Hemne, S. Chand.
3. Properties of Matter by Mathur, S. Chand,
4. Mechanics by Somnath Datta, Pearson
5. Mechanics by H.D Young and R.A Freedman, Pearson.
30
Semester-2
Core Course: II
PH2CRT02: OPTICS
Module I
Basic ideas about light
(6 hours)
The four important theories about the nature of light- Corpuscular theory, Wave theory,
Electromagnetic theory, Quantum theory. Optical path and geometrical path. Fermat’s
principle of least time, Fermat’s principle of extreme path, proof for laws of reflection by
Fermat’s principle, proof for laws of refraction by Fermat’s principle.
Text book: Optics by Subramanayam, Brijlal and M.N Avadhanulu- Chapter 1 and 2
Module II
Interference
(12 hours)
Review of basic ideas of interference, Coherent waves-Optical path and phase changesuperposition of waves-theory of interference-intensity distribution. Young’s double slit
experiment, Coherence-Conditions for interference.
Thin films-plane parallel film- interference due to reflected light-conditions for brightness
and darkness-interference due to transmitted light-Haidinger fringes-interference in wedge
shaped film-colours in thin films-Newton’s rings-applications. Michelsoninterferometerconstruction-working and applications.
Text book: Optics by N.Subramanayam, Brijlal, M.N Avadhanulu-Chapter 14 and 15
Module III
Diffraction
(9 hours)
Fresnel Diffraction – Huygens- Fresnel theory –zone plate –Difference between zone plate
and convex lens. Comparison between interference and diffraction –diffraction pattern due to
a straight edge, single silt. Fraunhoffer diffraction at a single slit, double slit, theory of plane
transmission grating. Dispersive power and resolving power of grating.
Text book: Optics by N.Subramanayam, Brijlal, M.N Avadhanulu-Chapter 17, 18 and 19
31
Module IV
Polarization
(9hours)
Concept of polarization – plane of polarization- Types of polarized light-production of plane
polarized light by reflection-refraction. Malu’s law-Polarization by double refraction- calcite
crystal. Anisotropic crystals-optic axis-Double refraction-Huygens explanation of double
refraction. Retarders - Quarter wave plate and Half wave plate. Production and Detection of
plane, elliptically and circularly polarized light-Optical Activity- specific rotation.
Text book: Optics by N.Subramanayam, Brijlal, M.N Avadhanulu-Chapter 20
Text book: Optics by N.Subramanayam, Brijlal, M.N Avadhanulu, S.Chand (25th edition)
References
1. Optics, E Hecht and AR Ganesan, Pearson
2. Optics, 3rd edition, Ajoy Ghatak, TMH
3. Optical Electronics, Ajoy Ghatak and K Thyagarajan, Cambridge
4. Optics and Atomic Physics, D P Khandelwal, Himalaya Pub. House
5. Optics, S K Srivastava, CBS Pub. N Delhi
6. A Text book of Optics, S L Kakani, K L Bhandari, S Chand.
32
Semester-3
Core Course: III
PH3CRT03: MECHANICS-II
Module I
Frames of reference
(7 hours)
Inertial frames of reference, Conservation of Momentum, Non inertial frames and fictitious
forces, Rotating frames of reference, Centrifugal force and Coriolis force, Foucault’s
pendulum.
Text book: Mechanics by J.C. Upadhayaya- Chapter 2
Energy
(8 hours)
Conservation laws, kinetic energy, work-energy theorem, conservative forces, potential
energy, conservation of energy for a particle: energy function, potential energy curve, Non
conservative forces
Text book : Mechanics by J.C. Upadhayaya-Chapter 5
Module II
Momentum and collision dynamics
(10 hours)
Conservation of linear momentum, centre of mass, motion of the centre of mass, centre of
mass frame of reference, determination of centre of mass, collision of two particles,
deflection of a moving particle by a particle at rest, impact, rockets, angular momentum and
torque, motion under central force, areal velocity conservation, conservation of angular
momentum with examples.
Text book : Mechanics by J.C. Upadhayaya- Chapter 6
Potentials and fields
(9 hours)
Central force, inverse square law force, potential energy of a system of masses, gravitational
field and potential, escape velocity, Kepler’s laws, Newton’s deductions from Kepler’s laws.
33
Hydrodynamics
(6 hours)
Streamline and turbulent flows, equation of continuity, energy possessed by a liquid,
Bernoulli’s theorem, Torricelli’s theorem, venturimeter.
Module III
Lagrangian formulations of Classical Mechanics
(11 hours)
Constraints, generalized co-ordinates, principle of virtual work, D’Alembert’s principle,
Lagrange’s equations, kinetic energy in generalized co-ordinates, generalized momentum,
cyclic co-ordinates, Conservation laws and symmetry properties, Hamiltonian.
Text book: Classical Mechanics by J.C. Upadhyaya-Chapter 2 & 3.
Error analysis
(3 hours)
Precision and accuracy, types of errors, reading error of instrument, calibration error, random
error, analysis of data, standard deviation, propagation of errors.
Text book: Advanced course in Practical Physics by D Chattopadhyay- Chapter 1
Text books:
1. Mechanics by J.C. Upadhayaya, Ramprasad Pub.
2. Classical Mechanics by J.C. Upadhyaya, Himalaya Pub.
3. Advanced course in Practical Physics by D Chattopadhyay, Central Book
References:
1. Mechanics- Hans and Puri, TMH
2. Mechanics-D.S.Mathur, S.Chand.
3.
Classical Mechanics-Takwale and Puranik, TMH.
4. Classical mechanics- K.SankaraRao, PHI.
34
Semester-IV
Core Course: IV
Credit-3 (54 hours)
PH4CRT04: BASIC ELECTRONICS
Module I
(14 hours)
Semiconducting diodes and applications
PN Junction, Depletion layer, Barrier potential, Biasing- forward and reverse, Reverse
breakdown, Junction capacitance and diffusion capacitance- PN Juction diode – V-I
characteristics–Diode parameters, Diode current Equation, Diode testing, Ideal diode. Zener
diode and reverse characteristics. Thermistors.
Rectification - Half wave, Full wave, Centre tapped, Bridge rectifier circuits - Nature of
rectified output, Efficiency & Ripple factor-Filter circuits – Inductor Filter, Capacitor Filter,
LC Filter, � Filter-Regulated Power supplies - Zener diode voltage regulator-Voltage
multipliers – Doubler & Tripler- Wave shaping circuits - Clipper-Positive, negative and
biased – Clampers- Positive, negative and biased.
Text Book: Basic Electronics-B.L.Theraja Chapters 13,14,15,17
Text Book: A Text Book of Applied Electronics-R.S.Sedha Chapters-11, 12, 19,20,33
Module II
(24 hours)
Transistors, Amplifiers and Oscillators
Bipolar junction transistors, Transistor biasing, CB, CC, CE configurations and their
characteristics-Active, saturation and cut-off regions. Current gain α,
,
and their
relationships. Leakage currents- Thermal runaway. DC operating point and AC and DC Load
line, Q-Point.
Need for biasing-Stabilization- Voltage divider bias. Single stage transistor Amplifiers-CE
amplifier - amplification factors. Decibel system, Variations in Amplifier gain with
frequency.
Basic principles of feedback, positive & negative feedback, Advantages of negative
feedback, negative feedback circuits – voltage series &shunt, current series & shunt.
35
Oscillatory Circuits, LC oscillators – Hartley Oscillator, Colpit’s Oscillator, RC oscillators Phase shift Oscillator. Astable and monostable multivibrator (basic idea only)
Text Book: Basic Electronics-B.L.Theraja-Chapters 18, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 28, 29.
Text Book: A Text Book of Applied Electronics-R.S.Sedha Chapters 14, 15, 22,24, 29,31,32
Module III
(16 hours)
FET, Operational Amplifier & Modulation
FETs, JFET & MOSFET - characteristics – FET Parameters. Comparison between FET and
BJT. ICs (familiarisation)
OP-amp- Symbol and terminals. Characteristics of ideal OP-amp, CMRR, Applications inverting, Non-inverting, Unity follower and Summing amplifiers.
Types of modulation - Amplitude modulation- modulation index - Analysis of AM wave –
Sidebands –bandwidth- AM Demodulation. Frequency Modulation –Frequency deviation and
carrier swing, FM sidebands.
Text Book: Basic Electronics-B. L. Theraja - Chapters 26, 30, 31
Text Book: A Text Book of Applied Electronics-R.S.Sedha-Chapter-16, 35
Text Books:
1. Basic Electronics-B.L.Theraja: S.Chand Co.
2. A Text Book of Applied Electronics-R.S.Sedha: S.Chand Co.
References:
1. Principles of electronics, VK Mehta, S Chand
2. Basic Electronics(7th Edition), Malvino and Bates, TMH
3. Electronics Fundamentals and Applications- D. Chattopadhyay and P.G.Rakshit, New
Age International Publishers.
4. Electronics: Fundamentals of Analog circuits, Thomas L. Floyd, David Buchla, Prentice
Hall
5. Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory, Robert Boylestad, Louis Nashelsky, Prentice
Hall
6. Basic Electronics, Debashis De , Pearson 2010
7. Basic Electronics, Santiram Kal, PHI 2010
36
Semester-V
Core Course: V
Credits-3 (54 hours)
PH5CRT05: QUANTUM MECHANICS
Module I
Historical development and origin of quantum theory
(16 hours)
Failure of classical physics- Black Body radiation-Planck’s radiation law, Photoelectric
effect-Einstein’s explanation, Specific heat of solids-Einstein’s formula, Hydrogen atomBohr model Failure of old quantum theory-Bohr’s correspondence principle-Wave particle
Dualism-Dual nature of light-Compton effect, Dual nature of matter- De Broglie hypothesis,
Davisson-Germer Experiment, De Broglie waves-Group and phase velocities
Text Book: A Textbook of Quantum Mechanics- G Aruldhas-Chapter 1
Module II
General Formalism of Quantum Mechanics
(18 hours)
Linear vector space- Hilbert space- Orthogonality- Linear operator-Eigen functions and eigen
values- Hermitian operator- Schmidt orthogonalization procedure- Postulates of Quantum
Mechanics- wave function, Operators, Expectation value, Eigen value, Time developmentSimultaneous measurability- General uncertainty relation- angular momentum operators LX ,
Ly, LZ and their basic commutation relations.
Text Book: A Textbook of Quantum Mechanics- G Aruldhas-Chapter 3 and 8
Module III
Schrodinger equation and its applications
(20 hours)
Time dependent Schrodinger equation- interpretation of wave function- Ehrenfest theoremExtension to three dimensions- Time independent Schrödinger equation- Stationary statesAdmissibility conditions of wave function-general properties of one dimensional Schrödinger
equation- harmonic oscillator- particle in a box - one dimensional barrier problem- square
potential barrier- tunneling- Alpha emission
Text Book: A Textbook of Quantum Mechanics- G Aruldhas-Chapter 2 and 4.
Text Book:
1. A Textbook of Quantum Mechanics- G Aruldhas- (2nd Edition)- PHI
References:
1. Concepts of Modern Physics- Arthur Beiser, TMH
2. Introductory Quantum Mechanics- RI Liboff, Pearson
3. Quantum Physics- Gasiorowicz,John Wiely
4. Quantum Mechanics- Griffith, Pearson
37
Semester-V
Core Course: VI
PH5CRT06: ELECTRICITY AND ELECTRODYNAMICS
Module I
(18 hours)
Alternating Current and Network Theorems
EMF induced in a coil rotating in a magnetic field- Analysis of LCR series circuits- LCR
parallel resonant circuit- comparison- Power in ac circuits- Wattless current- choke coiltransformer- skin effect.
Ideal voltage source and current source- Superposition theorem-Reciprocity theoremThevenin’s theorem- Norton’s theorem-Maximum power transfer theorem.
Text Book: Electricity and Magnetism, R. Murugeshan- Chapter 13 and 18
Module II
(16 hours)
Transient Current and Thermo electricity
Growth and decay of current in an LR circuit- Charging and discharging of a capacitor
through a resistor- Measurement of high resistance by leakage- BG- Growth and decay of
charge in an LCR circuit.
Seebeck effect-Laws of thermo emf-measurement of thermo emf using potentiometerPeltier effect- SG Starling method- Thomson effect- Thermodynamics of thermocoupleThermo electric diagrams – uses.
Text Book: Electricity and Magnetism, R. Murugeshan- Chapter 12 and 8.
Module III
(24 hours)
Electrostatics and Magnetostatics
Coulomb’s law and electric field- Field due to continues charge- electric flux densityGauss Law and its applications- Electric potential- Relationship between E and V- Energy
density in electrostatic field. Boundary conditions of E.
38
Biot-Savart’s law- Ampere’s circuital law and its applications- Magnetic flux densityMaxwells’s equation for static fields- Magnetic scalar and vector potential. Boundary
conditions of B.
Text Book: Principles of Electromagnetics, Mathew N.O Sadiku Chapter 3, 4, 6 and 7
Module IV
(14 hours)
Maxwell’s Equations and Electromagnetic wave propagation
Faraday’s law- Transformer and motional emf, Displacement current- Maxwell’s equations
in final forms- Time varying potential.
Electromagnetic wave in vacuum- Plane waves in Free space - Power and Poynting vectorPoynting’s theorem.
Text Book: Principles of Electromagnetics, Mathew N.O Sadiku- Chapter8 and 9
Text Book: Introduction to Electrodynamics, David J Griffiths-Chapter 9
Text Books:
1. Electricity and Magnetism, R. Murugeshan, 1stEdition(Revised) 2006, S Chand.
2. Principles of Electromagnetics, Mathew N.O Sadiku- 4th Edition 2009, Oxford
3. Introduction to Electrodynamics, David J Griffiths –3rd Edition 2007, Pearson.
References:
1. Fundamentals of Magnetism and Electricity, D.N Vasudeva - S Chand
2. Electricity and Magnetism, KK Tewari- S Chand
3. Electricity and Electronics, Saxena, Arora and Prakash- Pragati Prakashan
4. Classical Electromagnetism, Jerrold Franklin- Pearson
5. Electromagnetic Fields and Waves, KD Prasad- Satya Prakashan
6. Field and wave Electromagnetics, David K Cheng- Pearson.
39
Core Course: VII
PH5CRT07: RELATIVITY AND SPECTROSCOPY
Module I
Atomic Spectroscopy
(21 hours)
Early atomic spectra- Hydrogen spectrum- angular momentum – Larmor precession-energy
of magnetic moment in a magnetic field- Vector atom model- spin orbit interaction- spectra
of alkali atoms- angular momentum of many electron atoms- energy levels and spectral
transitions of helium- Normal Zeeman effect- anomalous Zeeman effect- Paschen Bach
effect- Stark effect.
Text Book: Molecular structure and Spectroscopy,G Aruldas- Chapter3.
Module II
Rotational and Vibrational Spectroscopy
(18 hours)
Interaction of radiation with rotating molecules- Rotation al spectra of rigid diatomic
molecule- isotope effect in rotational spectra - intensity of rotational lines – Spectra of non
rigid rotator- vibrational excitation effect- linear polyatomic molecules- vibrational energy
of a diatomic molecules-infrared selection rules- vibrating diatomic molecules- diatomic
vibrating rotator-asymmetry of rotation vibration band.
Text Book: Molecular structure and Spectroscopy,G Aruldas- Chapter 6 and 7.
Module III
Raman, NMR and ESR Spectroscopy
(15 hours)
Classical and quantum theories of Raman effect- rotational Raman spectra - Vibrational
Raman spectra -Mutual exclusion Rule .
Text Book: Molecular structure and Spectroscopy, G Aruldas- Chapter 8.
NMR Spectroscopy- Basic principles and instrumentation- Medical applications of NM R
Text Book: Molecular structure and spectroscopy, G Aruldas- Chapter 10 (Sections
10.1,10.2,10.3 and 10.19)
40
ESR Spectroscopy- Basic principles and instrumentation.
Text Book: Molecular structure and spectroscopy, G Aruldas- Chapter 11 (Sections 11.1,11.2
and 11.3)
Module IV
Relativity
(18 hours)
Inertial and non inertial frames of reference- Galilean transformation, Michelson Morley
experiment, Ether hypothesis- Postulates of Special Theory of Relativity, Time dilation,
Length contraction, Relativistic Velocity addition, Relativistic Doppler effect, Lorentz
transformation equations, Twin Paradox, momentum transformation -Mass-energy relationIntroductory concepts of general theory of relativity.
Text Book: Modern Physics, Kenneth S Krane- Chapter 2.
Text Book: Concepts of modern Physics, Arthur Beiser- Chapter 1.
Text Books:
1. Molecular structure and spectroscopy, Aruldas 2nd ed. EEE.
2. Modern Physics, Kenneth S Krane (2nd Edition)- Wiley .
3. Concepts of modern Physics, Arthur Beiser(6th Edition)- SIE.
References:
1. Spectroscopy: Straughan and Walker –(Vol.1) John Wiley
2. Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy: CN Banwell –(4th edition) TMH .
3. Introduction to Atomic Spectra, HE White, TMH
4. Elements of spectroscopy, Guptha, Kumar and Sharma (Pragathi Prakash)
5. Special Relativity- Resnick, (Wiley)
6. Mechanics – D.S.Mathur (S.Chand).
7. Mechanics by J.C. Upadhayaya (Ramprasad)
41
Semester-V
Core Course: VIII
Credit-3 (54 hours)
PH5CRT08: THERMAL AND STATISTICAL PHYSICS
Module I
Equation of state for gases
(5 hours)
Equation of an ideal gas, behavior of real gases, Andrew’s experiment, critical state, two
phase region, intermolecular forces, van der Waals equation of state, van der Waals
isotherms, critical constants, limitation of van der Waals equation.
Zeroth law of thermodynamics
(4 hours)
Thermodynamic system, surroundings, variables, thermal equilibrium: zeroth law,
thermodynamic equilibrium, thermodynamic processes, reversible and irreversible processes,
equation of state, expansivity and compressibility.
First laws of thermodynamics
(5 hours)
Internal energy, heat, work, cyclic processes, first law, heat capacity, energy equation and
difference of heat capacities, work done in reversible isothermal expansion of ideal gas, work
done in reversible adiabatic expansion of ideal gas.
Heat engines and second law of thermodynamics
(5 hours)
Second law statements, heat engine, efficiency, Carnot’s ideal heat engine, reversibility,
Carnot refrigerator, heat pump, Carnot theorem, absolute scale of temperature, ClausiusClapeyron latent heat equation.
Text Book : Thermal and Statistical Physics, R.B. Singh, part-1 chapter 3,4,5 and6
Module II
Entropy
(5 hours)
Definition of entropy, principle of increase of entropy, entropy and unavailable energy,
change in entropy in heat conduction, change in entropy of a system in reversible process,
increase in entropy in irreversible process, efficiency of Carnot cycle from TS diagram,
entropy of an ideal gas, entropy and disorder.
Thermodynamic relations
(8hours)
Maxwell’s thermodynamic relations, TdS equations, energy equation, heat capacity
equations, thermodynamic functions, third law of thermodynamics.
42
Conduction and radiation
(4 hours)
Conduction, thermal conductivity, thermal conductivity of bad conductor Lee’s disc
experiment -thermal resistance, thermal radiation and its properties, fundamental definitions,
energy flux, intensity and radiant emittance, Stefan-Boltzmann law.
Text Book : Thermal and Statistical Physics, R.B. Singh, part-1 chapter7,8,10 and 11.
Module III
Statistical mechanics
(10 hours)
Phase space, density of states in phase space, ensemble, density of distribution in phase
space, principle of equal a priori probability, ergodic hypothesis, statistical equilibrium,
ensemble formulation of statistical mechanics, microcanonical, canonical and grand
canonical ensemble, partition function, average energy of particle, equipartition theorem,
entropy in terms of probability, entropy in terms of partition function.
Statistical distributions
(8 hours)
Maxwell Boltzmann, Fermi-Dirac and Bose-Einstein statistics, microstate and macrostate,
distribution laws, Maxwell-Boltzmann, Fermi-Dirac and Bose-Einstein distribution.
Text Book : Thermal and Statistical Physics, R.B. Singh, part-2, Chapters 2,3,4 and 5.
Text Book:
1. Thermal and Statistical Physics, R.B. Singh, New Age Pub. (2010)
References:
1. An introduction to thermodynamics by Y.V.C. Rao (New Age Pub.)
2. An introduction to Thermal Physics by D.V. Schroeder (Pearson Pub.)
3. Heat and thermodynamics by Mark W Zemansky, Richard H Dittman & Amit K
Chattopadhyay. MCH New Delhi.
4. Thermodynamics and Statistical physics Brij Lal, N.Subrahmanyam and P S
Hemne (S. Chand &Co, Multi colour edition 2007).
5. Berkeley Physics Course Volume 5; Statistical Physics; Frederick Reif. McGraw
Hill.
6. Statistical Mechanics, R.K. Pathria, Pergamon press, Oxford
43
Semester-V
Generic Elective Course – I
Credit – 3 (54 hours)
PH5GET01: MATERIAL SCIENCE
Module I
(18 hours)
Structure and Properties of Materials
Classification of engineering materials-Engineering requirement of materials- Level of
structures, Microstructure and Macrostructure, Structure-Property relationships, Physical
properties of materials, Mechanical Properties-Stress strain relationship, creep, impact
strength- Thermal properties, Thermal cracking- Electrical properties- Dielectric strength and
dielectric constant- Chemical and Optical properties- Identification of metals and alloysIdentification tests.
Text Book: Material Science-GBS Narang, Chapter 1 and 9
Module II
(18 hours)
Optical Properties of Materials
Absorption processes- Fundamental absorption-Exciton absorption- Free –carrier absorptionPhotoconductivity- Photoelectric effect- Photovoltaic effect- Photoluminescence-colour
centres-Generation of colour centres
Text Book: Solid State Physics, M.A. Wahab, Chapter-15
Nanoscience
Materials at nanoscale- Quantum confinement - Size effect on shape- Magic numbersDifferent types of nanostructures- Quantum dots- Fullerenes- Graphene- Carbon nanotubesStructure, properties and applications
Text Book: Nanotechnology-The science of small, MA Shah and KA Shah, Chapters 1 and 2
Text Book: Nanoscience and Nanotechnology- Fundamentals to frontiers- MS Ramachandra
Rao and Shubra Singh, Chaper 5.
Module III
(18 hours)
Modern Engineering Materials
Display devices- active and passive-Liquid crystals- Types of Liquid crystals- Nematic liquid
crystals-Cholesteric liquid crystals- Smectic liquid crystals-General features of liquid
crystals- Numeric display using LCD-
44
Metallic glasses - Thermodynamic, Mechanical, Electronic and magnetic propertiesApplications
Shape memory alloy-structural change-general characteristic-Thermomechanical behavior
Text Book: Semiconductor Physics and Optoelectronics, V.Rajendran et al. Unit-II
Material Characterization Techniques
Qualitative study of Powder XRD, SEM, TEM, STM, AFM and Raman spectroscopy.
Text Book: Nanotechnology-The science of small- MA Shah and KA Shah, Chapter 5
Text Books:
1. Material Science-GBS Narang, Khanna Publishers.
2. Solid State Physics (2nd ed.), M.A. Wahab, Narosa pub.
3. Nanotechnology-The science of small, MA Shah and KA Shah, Wiley.
4. Nanoscience and Nanotechnology- Fundamentals to frontiers- MS Ramachandra rao
and Shubra Singh, Wiley.
5. Semiconductor Physics and Optoelectronics, V.Rajendran et al., Vikas Publishing
House.
References:
1. Crystallography applied to solid state Physics, A.R Verma, O.N Srivastava, New age
2. Nanotechnology, L.E Foster, Pearson.
3. Nanotechnology: Principles and Practices,2nd edition, Sulabha K Kulkarni, Springer.
4. Introduction to Nanotechnology, C.P Poole, F.J Owens –Wiley
5. Textbook of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, BS Murthy, P Shankar, Baldev Raj,
BB Rath and J Murday- Universities Press-IIM
45
Semester-V
Generic Elective Course – II
PH5GET02: COMPUTATIONAL PHYSICS
Module I
(18 hours)
Solutions of Nonlinear Equations
Bisection Method - Newton Raphson method (two equation solution) - Regula‐Falsi Method,
Secant method - Fixed point iteration method - Rate of convergence and comparisons of
these Methods
Solution of system of linear algebraic equations
Gauss elimination method with pivoting strategies-Gauss‐Jordan method-LU Factorization,
Iterative methods (Jacobi method, Gauss‐Seidel method) - Eigen value and Eigen vector
using Power method
Module II
(18 hours)
Numerical Differentiation and Integration
Numerical Differentiation formulae - Maxima and minima - Newton‐Cote general quadrature
formula - Trapezoidal, Simpson’s 1/γ, γ/8 rule - Romberg integration - Gaussian integration
(Gaussian – Legendre Formula 2 point and 3 point)
Solution of ordinary differential equations
Euler’s and modified Euler’s method - Runge Kutta methods for 1st and 2nd order ordinary
differential equations - Solution of boundary value problem by finite difference method and
shooting method.
Module III
(18 hours)
Algorithm and program development either in MATLAB or Octave

At least two from Bisection method

Newton Raphson method

Secant Method

Gauss elimination method

Gauss Jordan method.

Finding largest Eigen value and corresponding vector by Power method.

Differentiation by Newton’s finite difference method.

Integration using Simpson’s γ/8 rule

Solution of 1st order differential equation using RK‐4 method
46
Text books:
1. Numerical Methods Using MATLAB 4th edition, John. H. Mathews, Kurtis Fink,
Pearson India Education services Pvt Ltd, 2015.
2. Scientific Computing with MATLAB and Octave, Alfio Quarteroni, Fausto Saleri,
Paola Gervasio, Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 2010.
References:
1. An Introduction to Programming and Numerical Methods in MATLAB, S.R. Otto and
J.P. Denier, Springer-Verlag London Limited, 2005.
2. Applied numerical methods using MATLAB, Won Y. Yang, Wenwu Cao, Tae S, John
Wiley & Sons, Inc.,2005
3. Numerical Methods in Engineering with MATLAB, Jaan Kiusalaas, Cambridge
University Press, New York ,2005
4. Computer oriented Numerical Methods, V Rajaraman PHI
5. Introductory Numerical Methods, S S Sastry, PHI.
6. Numerical Methods, Balagurusamy, TMH
47
Semester-V
Generic Elective Course – III
PH5GET03: INSTRUMENTATION
Module I
(15 hours)
Measurements and Measurement Systems
Measurements-Method of measurement-Instruments and measurement systems-Mechanical,
Electrical and Electronic instruments-Classification of Instruments-Applications of
Measurement Systems - Elements of generalized measurement systems
Text book: A Course in Electrical and Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation,
Sawhney. A.K- Chapter 1
Module II
(18 hours)
Primary Sensing Elements and Transducers
Mechanical Devices as Primary Detectors – Mechanical Spring Devices – Pressure Sensitive
Primary Devices – Flow Rate Sensing Elements - Transducers-Classification–Characteristics
(Static and Dynamic) and Choice of Transducers - Characterization
Text book: Sensors and Transducers, Patranabis D., Chapter 1
Sawhney. A.K- Chapter 25
Module III
(18 hours)
Resistive, Inductive and Capacitive Transducers
Potentiometers –Strain gauges (Theory, types) - Rosettes – Resistance thermometer –
Thermistors (materials, Constructions, Characteristics) – Thermocouples-Self inductive
transducer – Mutual inductive transducers – Linear Variable Differential Transformer –
LVDT Accelerometer – RVDT – Synchros – Capacitive transducer – Variable Area Type –
Variable Air Gap type – Variable Permittivity type – Capacitor microphone.
Miscellaneous Transducers
Light transducers (photo-conductive, photo emissive, photo-voltaic, semiconductor, LDR)–
Piezoelectric transducer – Hall Effect transducers – Digital Encoding transducers
Sawhney. A.K- Chapter 1 and 25
48
Text books:
1. A Course in Electrical and Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation, Sawhney
A.K, 18th Edition, Dhanpat Rai & Company Private Limited, 2007.
2. Sensors and Transducers, Patranabis D., 2nd edition, PHI, 2015.
References:
1. Measurement Systems-Applications and Design, Doebelin. E.A, Tata McGraw Hill
2. Sensors and Transducers, Patranabis. D, Prentice Hall of India
3. Principles of Measurement Systems John. P, Bentley,, III Edition, Pearson
4. Transducers and Instrumentation, Murthy.D.V.S,, Prentice Hall of India
5. Instrumentation- Devices and Systems, Rangan, Sarma, and Mani, Tata-McGrawHill
6. Electronic Instrumentation by H.S Kalsi, McGrawHill
7. Instrumentation measurements and analysis, Nakra & Choudhary, Tata-McGrawHill
8. Mechanical and industrial measurement by R.K. Jain, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi
49
Semester-VI
Core Course: IX
Credit-3 (54 hours)
PH6CRT09: NUCLEAR, PARTICLE PHYSICS AND ASTROPHYSICS
Module I
Nuclear structure
(12 hours)
Classification of nuclei-General properties of nucleus-Binding Energy, Binding Energy.
curve, Nuclear stability. Theories of nuclear composition-Nuclear forces-Meson theory of
nuclear forces. Liquid drop model-Semi empirical mass formula-Applications- Nuclear shell
model-Collective model. Ionization chamber-G M counter, Bainbridge’s mass spectrograph.
Text Book: Modern Physics, R Murugeshan, Chapter 27,28,29 and 5.
Module II
Radioactivity
(12 hours)
Natural radioactivity–Alpha, Beta and Gamma Rays- properties- Geiger Nuttal law- Theory
of alpha decay- Gamow’s theory, Beta decay- Neutrino theory, Gamma decay-origin-nuclear
isomerism- internal conversion–Mossbauer effect, Soddy Fajan’s displacement lawRadioactive series- Law of radioactive disintegration- Mean life- measurement of decay
constant- units of radioactivity- Radioactive dating- Biological effects of radiations- Artificial
radioactivity- Applications of radioisotopes.
Text Book: Modern Physics, R Murugeshan, Chapter 31and 34
Nuclear Fission, Fusion and Cosmic rays
(12 hours)
Nuclear fission- Energy released in fission- Bohr-Wheeler’s theory- Chain reaction- Atom
bomb- Nuclear reactors- Nuclear fusion- Source of stellar energy- Thermonuclear reactionsFusion reactors- Plasma confinement-Transuranic elements
Cosmic rays- Lattitude effect, Azimuth effect, Altitude effect, primary and secondary cosmic
rays, cosmic ray showers, Van Allen belts, Origin of cosmic rays
Text Book: Modern Physics byR Murugeshan, Chapter 35, 36 and 37
50
Module III
Particle Physics and particle Accelerators
(12 hours)
Elementary particles –classifications- particles and antiparticles - antimatter- fundamental
interactions-quantum numbers- conservation law and symmetry. Quark model (basic idea
only).
Van de Graff generator, linear accelerator, cyclotron and Betatron.
Text Book: Modern Physics byR Murugeshan , Chapter 30 and 38
Astrophysics
(6 hours)
Classification of star- HR diagram-Luminosity- evolution of stars- white dwarfChandrasekhar limit - neutron star- black hole-supernova explosion- Photon diffusion timeInternal temperature of a star
Text Book: Modern Physics byR Murugeshan , Chapter 78
Text Books:
1. Modern Physics , R Murugeshan,7th Edition(Revised)(2014), S.Chand
References:
1. Atomic and Nuclear Physics, S N Ghoshal, S.Chand.
2. Nuclear Physics, D C Tayal, Himalaya Publishing House
3. Nuclear and Particle Physics S L Kakani and Subhra Kakani -Viva Books 2008
4. Elements of Nuclear Physics, M L Pandya and R P S Yadav
5. Modern Physics, Kenneth S Krane, Wiley
6. Modern Physics, Arthur Beiser, TMH
7. An Introduction to Astrophysics- Baidyanath Basu
8. Introduction to Cosmology, J Narlikar
51
Semester-VI
Core Course: X
Credit-3 (72 hours)
PH6CRT10: SOLID STATE PHYSICS
Module I
Crystal structure
(16 hours)
Solid state, crystalline, polycrystalline and amorphous materials, crystal lattice, periodicity,
translation vectors, unit cell, basis, symmetry operations, point groups and space groups,
bravais lattice in two and three dimensions, miller indices, interplanar spacing, simple crystal
structures-hcp, fcc, bcc and simple cubic, Structures of NaCl, Diamond and ZnS, X-ray
diffraction from crystals- Bragg’s law, powder method, reciprocal lattice-properties,
reciprocal lattice to sc, bcc and fcc, Bragg’s law in reciprocal lattice-Ewald construction.
Text book: Solid State Physics by Puri and Babbar- Chapter 1 & 2
Module II
Bonding in solids
(9 hours)
Inter-atomic forces, ionic bonding, bond dissociation and cohesive energy, madelung energy,
covalent bonding, metallic bonding, hydrogen bonding, van derwaals bonding, LennardJones potential.
Lattice vibrations
(10 hours)
Vibration of one dimensional monatomic lattice, phonons, momentum of phonons, inelastic
scattering of photons by phonons, lattice specific heat, classical model, Einstein model,
Debye model.
Text book :Solid State Physics by Puri and Babbar- Chapter 3 and4
Module III
Free electron theory and elementary band theory
(10 hours)
Free electron gas in one dimension, three dimension, electronic specific heat, band theory,
bloch theorem, Kronig-Penney model (derivation not expected), energy-wave vector
relations, different zone schemes, velocity and effective mass of electron, distinction between
metals, insulators and semiconductors.
52
Semiconducting properties of materials
(8 hours)
Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors, drift velocity, mobility and conductivity of intrinsic
semiconductors, carrier concentration and Fermi level for intrinsic semiconductor, carrier
concentration, conductivity and Fermi level for extrinsic semiconductor.
Text book :Solid State Physics by Puri and Babbar Chapter 5,6 and 7
Module IV
Dielectric properties of materials
(5 hours)
Polarization and susceptibility, local filed, dielectric constant and polarizability, sources of
polarizability, piezoelectricity.
Magnetic properties of materials
(7 hours)
Response of materials to magnetic field, classification of magnetic materials, Langevin’s
classical theory of diamagnetism and paramagnetism, ferromagnetism, Weiss theory, domain
theory, antiferromagnetism and ferrimagnetism.
Superconductivity
(7 hours)
Origin of superconductivity, response of magnetic field, Meissner effect, super current and
penetration depth, critical field and critical temperature, type-I and type –II superconductors,
thermodynamic and optical properties, isotope effect, Josephson effect and tunnelingelements of BCS theory-Cooper pairs-Existence of bandgap.
Text book: Solid State Physics by Puri and Babbar Chapter 8,9 and 10
References:
1. Solid State Physics, M.A. Wahab, (2nd Edition), Narosa
2. Introduction to Solid State Physics, Charles Kittel, (7th Edition), Wiley
3. Crystallography applied to solid state Physics, AR Verma, ON Srivastava, New age
4. Solid State Physics, AJ Dekker- Macmillian.
5. Solid State Physics, NW Ashcroft, ND Mermin – Cengage Learning.
6. Elementary Solid State Physics, M. Ali Omer, Pearson.
7. Solid state physics, R L Singal, KNRN &Co.
8. Solid state physics, S O Pillai, New age
53
Semester-VI
Core Course: XI
Credit-3 (54 hours)
PH6CRT11: OPTOELECTRONICS
Module I
(14 hours)
Laser
Attenuation of light in an optical medium. Thermal equilibrium- Interaction of light with
matter – Einstein relations – Light amplification- Population inversion- Active mediumPumping – Metastable state- principal pumping schemes -Optical resonant cavity -Types of
Laser – Ruby Laser – He Ne laser -Laser beam Characteristics. Applications – Holography –
principle of holography-properties of holography.
Text Book: A text book of Optics by N.Subramanayam, Brijlal, M.N Avadhanulu- Chapter 22
and 23.
Fiber Optics
Propagation of light in a fiber -acceptance angle numerical aperture –number of modes in a
fiber -single and multimode step index fibre –graded index fiber- attenuation- inter modal and
intra
modal
dispersion-waveguide
dispersion-application
of
fiber-optical
fiber
communication – advantages
Text Books: Semiconductor physics and optoelectronics- V Rajendran, J Hemaletha and M S
M Gibson, Unit IV- Chapter 1.
Module II
(12 hours)
Semiconductor Science and light sources
Semiconductor energy bands - semiconductor statistics – extrinsic semiconductors -energy
band diagrams in applied field - direct and indirect bandgap semiconductors, p-n junction
principles - open circuit- recombination life time – p-n junction band diagram - open circuit forward and reverse bias.
Light emitting diodes – principles - device structures - LED characteristics. Principle of
diode laser - heterostructure laser diode-laser diode characteristics-laser diode rate equations.
Text Book: Optoelectronics and Photonics: Principles and Practices, S.O. Kasap- Chapter 3
and 4.
54
Module III
`
(18 hours)
Photodetectors and Photovoltaics
Principle of p-n junction photodiode - Ramo’s theorem and external photocurrent absorption coefficient and photodiode materials – quantum efficiency and responsivity - PINphotodiode – avalanche photodiode –phototransistor.
Solar energy spectrum -Photovoltaic device principles – I-V characteristics - Solar cell
materials, device and efficiencies.
and 6.
Module IV
(10 hours)
Optoelectronic Modulators
Optical polarization, optical anisotropy- birefringence of calcite, Dichroism,retardation
plates, electro-optic Effects– Pockels effect - Kerr effect, Magneto-optic effect
Text Books:
1. Optoelectronics and Photonics: Principles and Practices, S.O. Kasap, Pearson, 2013
2. A text book of Optics (25th edition) N.Subramanayam, Brijlal, M.N Avadhanulu, S.
Chand
3. Semiconductor physics and optoelectronics V Rajendran, J Hemaletha and M S M
Gibson, Vikas publications (2003)
Reference Books:
1. Semiconductor optoelectronic devices: Pallab Bhattacharya, PHI 2009.
2. Lasers and Non linear Optics, BB Laud, New Age Int Pub. 2013
3. Laser Fundamentals, William T Silfvast, Cambridge Univ Press. 2012.
4. Optoelectronics an Introduction, J Wilson & JFB Hawkes, PHI 1999.
5. Fiber Optics and Optoelectronics, R P Khare, Oxford 2012.
6. Introduction to Optics, Frank L Pedrotti, Leno M Pedrotti & Leno S Pefrotti, Pearson
2014.
7. Optical fiber and fiber optic communication system (4thed) Subir Kumar Sarkar, S Chand.
55
Semester-VI
Core Course: XII
Credit-3 (72 hours)
PH6CRT12: DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AND MICROPROCESSOR
Module I
Number systems
(8hours)
Different number systems- decimal, binary, octal and hexadecimal-conversion between
different systems. Binary arithmetic addition, subtraction and multiplication. 1’s and β’s
complement subtraction –signed binary numbers. Signed binary arithmetic. BCD code,
ASCII code.
Digital Gates
(4hours)
AND, OR and NOT Gates. NAND and NOR Gates - Universal Gates. Implementation of
combinational logic. XOR and XNOR Gates
Text Book: Digital fundamentals, Thomas L. Floyed -Chapter 2, 3and 5
Module II
Boolean algebra and logic gates
(8 hours)
Rules and Laws of Boolean algebra. Duality theorem -De Morgan's Theorems. analysis and
simplification of logic circuits. Boolean equation and truth table - SOP and POS. Minterms
and Maxterms. Standard SOP and Standard POS- Conversion between Standard SOP &
Standard POS. Karnaugh Map.(up to four variable). K map SOP minimization.
Text Book: Digital fundamentals, Thomas L. Floyed - Chapter 4
Text Book: Digital electronics, S Salivahanan and S Arivazhagan -Chapter 2
Combinational logic
Half Adder
and Full Adder,
(8hours)
Half
and Full subtractor, 4-bit parallel Adder/Subtractor.
Shift method multiplier, binary divder, Multiplexer, De-multiplexer, Encoder & Decoder.
Text Book: Digital electronics, S Salivahanan and S Arivazhagan - Chapter 4 and 5
Module III
Sequential logic
(20 hours)
Flip-flops, RS, Clocked RS, Master Slave JK FF, DFF JK, T Flip-flop, Buffer registers- Shift
register- Counters- Binary ripple counter- BCD ripple counter- synchronous binary counterDecade counter.
Text Book: Digital design, M Morris Mano- Chapter 6
56
D/A converters (Ladder type), A/D Converter (Counter type).
Text Book: Digital principles and applications- Malvino, Leach and Saha-Chapter 13.
Module IV
Microprocessor
(24hours)
Introduction to 8-bit Microprocessor History of Microprocessor, 8085 Microprocessor
architecture- ALU, Timing unit- buses, register, flags, 8085 pin configuration and function
of each pin. Instruction size, Instruction cycle- Fetch, decode and execute operations,
machine cycle. Timing diagram- fetch cycle, memory read & write, I/O read & write,.
Addressing modes of 8085, status flags,
Intel 8085 Microprocessor Instruction Set,
addressing modes and Programming - Data transfer, Arithmetic, Logical, Rotate, Branch and
machine control instructions. Development of 8085 assembly language programs.
Text Book: Fundamentals of microprocessors and microcomputers, B.Ram- Chapter 3 and 4.
Text books:
1. Digital fundamentals, Thomas L. Floyed (10th edition), Pearson
2. Digital principles and applications, Malvino, Leach and Saha (6th Edition) TMH
3. Digital electronics, S Salivahanan & S Arivazhagan VPH (2010)
4. Digital design, M Morris Mano, PHI
5. Fundamentals of microprocessors and microcomputers,B.Ram,Dhanpatrai Publishers
References:
1. Digital logic and computer design - M Morris Mano, PHI
2. Digital Electronics- William H Gothmann, PHI
3. Digital circuits and design- S Salivahanan and S Arivazhakan, PHI
4. Digital Electronics- Sedha, S Chand
5. Digital computer electronics- Malvino, Brown, TMH
6. Microprocrssor architecher, programming and applications R S Gaonkar, Wiely
Eastern Ltd.
7. Introduction to microprocessors- A P Mathur, TMH
57
Semester-VI
Choice Based Core Course – I
Credit-3 (54 hours)
PH6CBT01: NANOSCIENCE AND NANOTECHNOLOGY
Module I
(21 Hours)
Synthesis of Nanomaterials
Physical
Methods:
Mechanical
Methods-Methods
Deposition- Chemical Vapour Deposition (CVD) -
Based
on
Evaporation-Sputter
Electric Arc Deposition- Ion Beam
Techniques (Ion Implantation) - Molecular Beam Epitaxy (MBE)
Chemical Methods: Colloids and Colloids in Solutions -Growth of Nanoparticles - Synthesis
of Metal Nanoparticles by Colloidal Route -Synthesis of Semiconductor Nanoparticles by
Colloidal Route - Langmuir-Blodgett (LB) Method -Microemulsions -Sol-Gel Method Hydrothermal Synthesis - -Sonochemical Synthesis-Microwave Synthesis- Synthesis Using
Micro-reactor or Lab-on-chip
Text Book: Nanotechnology: Principles and Practices, Sulabha K Kulkarni, Chapter 3 and 4
Module II
(18 Hours)
Analysis Techniques
Microscopes - Electron Microscopes - Scanning Probe Microscopes (SPM) - Diffraction
Techniques - Spectroscopies - Magnetic Measurements - Mechanical Measurements
Properties of Clusters and Nanomaterials
Clusters - Nanomaterials and their Properties - Magnetic Properties.
Text Book: Nanotechnology: Principles and Practices, Sulabha K Kulkarni, Chapter 7 and 8
Module III
(15 hours)
Special Nanomaterials.
Carboneous Nanomaterials
- Porous Silicon - Aerogels – Zeolites-
Ordered Porous
Materials Using Micelles as Templates - Core-Shell Particles – Metamaterials.
Applications
Electronics - Energy - Automobiles - Sports and Toys - Textiles - Cosmetics - Domestic
Appliances - Biotechnology and Medical Field - Space and Defense
Text Book: Nanotechnology: Principles and Practices, Sulabha K Kulkarni, Chapters 10 & 11
58
Text Books:
1. Nanotechnology: Principles and Practices, Sulabha K Kulkarni (2nd Edition)
Springer
References:
1. TextBook of Nanroscience and Nanotechnology- BS Murthy, P Shankar, Baldev Raj,
BB Rath and J Murday- University Press.
2. Introduction to Nanotechnology, Charles P. Poole, Jr. and Frank J. Owens,
Wiley,2003
3. Nano: the essentials, T. PRADEEP,TMH ,2007.
4. Nanoscale Materials ,Luis M. Liz-Marzan and Prashant V. Kamat, Kluwer Academic
Publishers, 2003
5. Nanoscience,Nanotechnologies and Nanophysics, C. Dupas, P. Houdy and M.
Lahmani,Springer-Verlag , 2007
59
Semester-VI
Choice Based Core Course – II
Credit-3 (54 hours)
PH6CBT02: RENEWABLE ENERGY
Module I
(18 hours)
Solar Energy and Solar Radiation
Solar radiation outside the earth’s atmosphere – solar radiation at the earth's surface instruments for measuring solar radiation and sunshine
Solar Thermal Energy
Devices for thermal collection and storage (flat plate collectors, concentrating collectors) –
Solar pond - thermal applications, water heating, power generation, distillation, drying and
cooking, solar space heating
Text Book: Solar Energy – Principles of Thermal Collection and Storage, S.P. Sukhatme,
Chapter 2 and 3
Text Book: Non-conventional Energy Sources, G.D. Rai, Chapters 3, 4 & 5
Module II
(18hours)
Wind Energy – Basic Components of a Wind Energy Conversion System – Site selection
considerations - Applications of wind energy – Environmental Aspects
Energy from Biomass – Biomass conversion technologies – Energy plantation –Methods of
obtaining energy from biomass - Classification of Biogas plants –Thermal gasification of
biomass.
Geothermal Energy – Nature of Geothermal fields –Geothermal resources – Hot dry rock
resources – magma resources – Geothermal exploration - Advantages and Disadvantages –
Applications – Operational and environmental problems
Text Book: Non-conventional Energy Sources-G.D. Rai, Chapters 6, 7 and 8
60
Module III
(18hours)
Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion (OTEC) – Introduction – Open cycle OTEC system –
Closed Cycle OTEC system – Hybrid Cycle
Energy from Tides – Basic principles of Tidal power – Components of Tidal power plantOperation methods of utilization of tidal energy - Single cycle and double cycle systems –
advantages and limitations of tidal power
Hydrogen energy – Hydrogen production (Electrolysis, thermochemical methods) –
Hydrogen storage – hydrogen as an alternative fuel for motor vehicles.
Text Book: Non-conventional Energy Sources-G.D. Rai, Chapters 9 and11
Text Books:
1. Non-conventional Energy Sources-G.D. Rai,Khanna Publishers
2. Solar Energy – Principles of Thermal Collection and Storage, S.P. Sukhatme,
References:
1. Solar energy fundamentals and applications, H P Garg and J Prakash, TMH
2. Non Conventional energy resources, Shobh Nath Singh, Pearson
3. Solar energy fundamentals design modeling and applications, G N Tiwari, Narosa.
4. Renewable energy sources and their environmental impacts,SA Abbasi and N Abbasi,
PHI.
5. Non conventional energy resources, J P Nani and Lond Sapra, S Chand.
6. Non conventional energy resources and utilization, R K Rajput, S Chand.
7. Fundamental of renewable energy systems, D Mukhergee, New Age.
61
Semester-VI
Choice Based Core Course – III
Credit-3 (54 hours)
PH6CBT03: ASTRONOMY AND ASTROPHYSICS
Module I
Observational astronomy
(12 Hours)
Astronomical distance scales – AU, Parsec and light year. Stellar Parallax and distance to
stars from parallax. Magnitude scale - Apparent and absolute magnitudes. Variable stars as
distance indicators. Cepheid variables. Astronomy in different bands of electromagnetic
radiation- Optical, radio and X-ray astronomies, Radiation Laws.
Optical Telescopes. Types of telescopes-refracting and reflecting – Newtonian and
Cassegrain telescopes. Magnification and f number. Resolving Power, Telescope mounts –
alt-azimuth and equatorial mounts. Telescope enhancements (CCD, Spectrograph). Hubble
telescope, Telescopes of the future. Advent of radio astronomy- radio telescopes.
Text Book:Astrophysics: Stars and Galaxies, K D Abhyankar- Section 3.1 & 4.3
Text Book:Introduction to Astronomy and Cosmology, Ian Morison- Chapter 5
Text Book:Astronomy, A Self-Teaching Guide, Dinah L. Moché,-Chapter 2 &3.
Module II:
Celestial sphere
(8 Hours)
Concept of celestial sphere - cardinal points, celestial equator, ecliptic, equinoxes. Diurnal
motion of sun - summer solstice and winter solstice.
Celestial co-ordinate systems: –
Horizon system – Azimuth & Altitude, Equatorial system-Right ascension & declination,
Ecliptic coordinate system.
Time - apparent and mean solar time, sidereal time. Twilight, Seasons- causes of seasons
(qualitative ideas). International Date Line.
Sun
(5 Hours)
Sun - solar atmosphere and internal structure – Photosphere, chromospheres and corona.
Radiation zone & Convection Zone. Sun spots, Activity Cycles, flares, prominences, coronal
holes, Solar wind.
Galaxies
(3 hours)
Galaxies - our galaxy, galaxy types & turning fork diagram. Structure on the largest scaleclusters, super clusters and voids.
62
Text Book: Astronomy, A Self-Teaching Guide, Dinah L. Moché, Chapter 1,4 and 6
Text Book: Astrophysics: Stars and Galaxies, K D Abhyankar, Chapter 2
Introduction to Astronomy and Cosmology, Ian Morison, Chapter 2
Module III
Astrophysics
(14 hours)
Gravitational contraction - Virial theorem, Jeans mass. Energy production inside stars.
Thermonuclear fusion. Hydrogen burning. p-p chain. CNO cycle. Evolution of stars – birth –
protostar, hydrostatic equilibrium, red giant, late stages of evolution - white dwarfs &
Chandrasekhar limit, Neutron stars & Tolman-Volkof limit, Supernovae, Pulsars, Black
holes. Stellar Classification, H-R diagram - Main sequence stars
Cosmology
(12 hours)
Large scale structure of the universe – isotropy and homogeneity. Cosmological principle.
Standard big bang model - GUT, Planck Epoch, Inflation, Nucleosynthesis, Recombination &
CMBR. Expanding universe - red shift. Hubble’s law and Hubble parameter. Age of
universe and its determination. Dark energy and Dark Matter (qualitative idea).
Text Book: Astrophysics: Stars and Galaxies, K D Abhyankar, Chapter 10
Text Book: Astronomy, A Self-Teaching Guide, Dinah L. Moché, Chapter 5 and 7
Text Book: Introduction to Astronomy and Cosmology, Ian Morison, Chapter 9.
Text Books:
1. Astrophysics: Stars and Galaxies- AD Abhyankar, University Press.
2. Astronomy, A Self-Teaching Guide, Dinah L. Moché, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
3. Introduction to Astronomy and Cosmology, Ian Morison, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
References:
1. Introduction to cosmology- J V Narlikar, Cambridge University Press
2. A short history of the Universe – Joseph Silk, Cambridge University Press
3. http://www.astro.cornell.edu/academics/courses/astro201/topics.html
4. http://www.ualberta.ca/~pogosyan/teaching/ASTRO_122/lectures/lectures.html
5. http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/hframe.html
6. An Introduction to Astrophysics- Baidyanath Basu, PHI.
63
B. Sc. PHYSICS PRACTICALS
Minimum 16 experiments to be done in each paper.
Minimum number of experiments for appearing practical examination is 8.
Division of internal marks for record (maximum 5 marks).
No. of Experiments
Marks
16 and above
5
14 & 15
4
12 & 13
3
10 & 11
2
8-10
1
Familiarization Experiments (Not for examination)
1. Determination of density of a solid cylinder using vernier calipers and Common
Balance
2. Determination of density of a glass plate using Screw gauge and common Balance.
3. Measurements using travelling microscope.
4. Spectrometer-standardization.
5. Determination of thickness of a glass plate and radii of curvature of concave and
convex surfaces using Spherometer.
6. Identification of electronic components and testing using multimeter.
7. Voltage and frequency measurements using CRO.
8. 8085 microprocessor- Data Transfer
SEMESTER
PAPER
PAPER CODE
TITLE
1&2
01
PH2CRP01
3&4
02
PH4CRP02
5&6
03
PH6CRP03
5&6
04
PH6CRP04
5&6
05
PH6CRP05
Properties of Matter and Thermal Physics
5&6
06
PH6CRP06
64
SEMESTER 1&2 (First Year)
Core Practical 1: PH2CRP01 - MECHANICS, ACOUSTICS AND OPTICS
1. Symmetric compound pendulum
2. Kater’s pendulum
3. Torsion Pendulum- Rigidity modulus
4. Young’s Modulus- non uniform bending- pin and microscope
5. Young’s modulus- uniform bending- Pin and Microscope
6. Young’s modulus- Cantilever- Scale and telescope
7. Static Torsion- Rigidity Modulus.
8. Flywheel – moment of inertia
9. Melde’s string- frequency
10. Sonometer- Verification of laws, Determination of density
11. AC Sonometer- frequency
12. Lissajous figures-CRO
13. Ultrasonic- Determination of frequency
14. Ultrasonic- Determination of velocity in a liquid
15. Liquid lens- Optical Constants- Boy’s method
16. Liquid Lens- Refractive index of a liquid- Boy’s method
17. Newton’s Rings- Wavelength
18. Spectrometer- Prism- Refractive index of glass
19. Spectrometer- Hollow Prism- Refractive index of liquid
20. Spectrometer- Small angled prism- refractive index- Normal incidence
21. Air wedge –radius of a thin wire
22. Optical constants of a concave lens.
23. Determination of principle refractive indices for O-ray and E-ray using calcite or
quartz prism.
24. Resolving power of a prism.
25. Resolving power of grating.
65
SEMESTER 3&4 (Second Year)
Core Practical 02: PH4CRP02-MECHANICS AND ELECTRONICS
1. Asymmetric Compound pendulum
2. Torsion Pendulum- Rigidity modulus- Equal mass
3. Young’s modulus- uniform bending-Optic lever- Scale and Telescope
4. Young’s Modulus- Cantilever-Oscillation Method
5. Fly wheel- Moment of Inertia- oscillation method.
6. One dimensional elastic collision- law of conservation of energy and momentumHanging sphere method.
7. Viscosity of a liquid- Constant Pressure head
8. Forward characteristics of a pn junction diode
9. Zener characteristics - forward and reverse
10. Half wave rectifier- Ripple factor and efficiency
11. Full wave rectifier- (center tap) Ripple factor and efficiency
12. Full wave rectifier- (bridge) Ripple factor and efficiency
13. FET-characteristics, determination of parameters.
14. Full wave rectifier with L & section filters Bridge/Center tap
15. Voltage regulator using zener diode
16. Diode clippers- (positive, negative and biased)
17. Diode clampers-(positive, negative and biased)
18. Voltage multipliers- doubler & tripler
19. OPAMP characteristics- CMRR and open loop Gain
20. OPAMP- inverter, non inverter and buffer
21. OPAMP- adder and subtractor
22. CE characteristics of a transistor
23. RC coupled common emitter amplifier- frequency response and bandwidth.
24. Phase shift oscillator using transistor.
25. Hartley oscillator
26. Colpit’s oscillator.
27. Amplitude modulation.
28. Voltage regulator using zener diode and transistor.
66
SEMESTER 5&6 (Third Year)
Core Practical 03: PH6CRP03- ELECTRICITY AND SPECTROSCOPY
1. Potentiometer- Resistivity
2. Potentiometer- Calibration of low range voltmeter
3. Potentiometer- Calibration of high range voltmeter
4. Potentiometer- Calibration of low range Ammeter
5. Tangent Galvanometer- Calibration of Ammeter
6. Moving coil galvanometer- emf of a thermocouple
7. Moving coil galvanometer- figure of merit
8. Mirror Galvanometer- figure of merit
9. BG- Measurement of high resistance by leakage method
10. Field along the axis of a coil- BH
11. Searle’s vibration magnetometer- magnetic moment
12. Deflection and vibration magnetometer- m and BH
13. CF Bridge- resistivity
14. Conversion of Galvanometer into voltmeter
15. Conversion of Galvanometer into ammeter
16. LCR series resonant circuit analysis
17. LCR parallel resonant circuit analysis
18. Verification of Thevenin’s and Norton’s theorems
19. Verification of Superposition and Maximum power transfer theorems.
20. Spectrometer- Stoke’s formula
21. Spectrometer- i-d curve
22. Spectrometer -Verification of Fresnel’s equation for reflection of EM waves.
23. Spectrometer - wavelength of Sodium D1 and D2 lines
24. Spectrometer - wavelength of Mercury light using plane diffraction Grating.
25. Dispersive power - Grating-Spectrometer
26. Dispersive power- Prism- Spectrometer
27. Absorption Co-efficient of KMnO4/ Iodine
28. Spectrometer- Cauchy’s constants
67
Core Practical 04: PH6CRP04 - DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AND MICROPROCESSOR
1. Realization of Logic gates- AND, OR and NOT-using diodes, transistors etc.
2. Realization of Logic gates- AND, OR and NOT-from universal gates.
3. Verification of De Morgan’s theorems.
4. BCD to 7 segment decoder
5. Realization of Half adder using gates.
6. Realization of Full adder using gates
7. Astable Multivibrator using Transistor
8. Astable Multivibrator using IC 555
9. Monostable Multivibrator using Transistor
10. Monostable Multivibrator using IC 555
11. Pulse Width Modulation using IC555
12. D/A converter using IC 741(R-2R ladder type)
13. A/D converter using IC 741
14. RS Flip Flop
15. JK Flip Flop
16. Realization of XOR and Ex NOR using transistor.
17. Regulated power supply using zener diode and IC 741
18. Regulated power supply using 78XX/79XX etc.
19. Dual regulated power supply using 78XX/79XX etc.
20. Schmitt trigger using IC 741.
21. Sweep wave generator-(Normally OFF only)
22. 8085 Microprocessor Addition of two eight bit numbers and result exceed 8 bit.
23. 8085 Microprocessor- Multiplication of two eight bit numbers (result 16 bit)
24. 8085 Microprocessor – BCD Addition
25. 8085 Microprocessor- Largest/smallest among a group of 20 numbers
26. 8085 Microprocessor- Sorting in Ascending/ descending order
68
Core Practical 05: PH6CRP05 - PROPERTIES OF MATTER AND THERMAL PHYSICS
1. Characteristics of Thermistor
2. Newton’s law of cooling- Specific heat
3. Newton’s law of cooling- Emissive Power
4. Thermal conductivity of bad conductor- Lee’s disc
5. Thermal conductivity of powder-Lee’s disc
6. Thermal conductivity of Rubber
7. Thermal conductivity of glass using glass tube.
8. CF Bridge- Temperature co-efficient of resistance.
9. CF bridge determination of unknown temperature.
10. Measurement of Stefan’s constant.
11. Heating efficiency of electrical kettle with varying voltages.
12. Thermal behavior of a electric bulb (filament/torch light bulb)
13. To study the variation of thermo emf (Seebeck effect) across two junctions of a
thermocouple with temperature.
14. To study the variation of junction temperature (Peltier effect) across two junctions
of a thermocouple with current.
15. Specific heat capacity of a solid by method of mixtures
16. Electrochemical equivalent of Copper
17. Boltzmann constant using V-I characteristic of PN diode.
18. Planck’s constant using LEDs of at least 4 different colours.
19. To determine e/k using transistor.
20. Diode as a temperature sensor.
21. Young’s Modulus- Koenig’s Method- uniform bending
22. Elastic constants- Searl’s method.
23. Determination of Poisson’s ratio of rubber.
24. Surface Tension of a liquid- Capillary rise method
25. Viscosity- Stoke’s method.
26. Viscosity of a liquid- variable Pressure head
69
Core Practical 06: PH6CRP06 - OPTOELECTRONICS AND SOLID STATE PHYSICS
1. Characteristics of LED (Optical and electrical)
2. Characteristics of photodiode (Optical and electrical)
3. Characteristics of solar cell (Optical and electrical)
4. Thickness of a thin film - air wedge
5. Laser- Grating- Determination of wavelength
6. Laser- Spot size and divergence
7. Numerical Aperture of an optical fiber.
8. Bending losses of an optical fiber.
9. Single slit diffraction using laser- slit width.
10. Laser- Width of a circular Aperture
11. Diffraction patterns of single slit using laser source and measurement of its intensity
variation using photodiode.
12. Diffraction patterns of
double slit using laser source and measurement of its
intensity variation using photodiode.
13. Photosensor and comparison with incoherent source – Sodium light.
14. Photo-electric effect: photo current versus intensity and wavelength of light;
maximum energy of photo-electrons versus frequency of light
15. Magneto optic modulation.
16. Electro optic modulation
17. LED direct modulation.
18. Determination of Band gap of semiconductor using diode equation (heating/cooling)
19. Determination of Band gap of a semi conductor using four probe method
20. Determination of Band gap using thermistor.
21. Determination of Dielectric constant of a thin sheet
22. Determination of Dielectric constant of a liquid
23. Resistivity of Metal -CF Bridge
24. Resistivity of Semiconductor -Four probe
25. X-ray diffraction – lattice constant-Analysis of data.
26. Band gap determination –absorption spectrum analysis- direct band gap material.
27. Band gap determination –absorption spectrum analysis- indirect band gap material.
28. Fermi energy of copper.
70
References:
1. Advanced course in Practical Physics by D Chattopadhyay
2. Practical Physics - Joseph Ittiavirah, Premnath and Abraham(2005)
3. Practical Physics, CL Arora, S.Chand
4. Practical Physics Harnam Singh , S Chand
5. Electronics lab manual Vol 1 & 2, K A Navas.
6. A course of Experiments with He-Ne Laser- R.S Sirohi (2nd Edition) Wiley Eastern
Ltd.
7. Electronics lab manual Vol 1 & 2, Kuryachan T D and Shyam Mohan S, Ayodhya
pub.
71
Complementary Physics for Mathematics and Statistics
Semester 1
PH1CMT01: PROPERTIES OF MATTER & SPECIAL THEORY OF RELATIVITY
Module I
Elasticity
(13 hours)
Stress- strain- Hooke’s law- Elastic moduli- Poisson’s ratio- twisting couple- determination
of rigidity modulus- static and dynamic methods- static torsion- torsion pendulum, bending of
beams- cantilever, uniform and non-uniform bending, I section girder.
Text Book: Elements of properties of matter, D S Mathur, Chapter- 8
Module II
Surface tension
(5 hours)
Molecular theory of surface tension - surface energy - excess pressure in a liquid drop,
transverse waves on the surface of a liquid - effect of gravity - effect of surface tension factors affecting surface tension - applications
Viscosity
(5 hours)
Streamline and turbulent flow - critical velocity - Coefficient of viscosity - Derivation of
Poiseuille’s equation, stokes equation-Determination of viscosity by Poiseuille’s method and
stokes method-Brownian motion – Viscosity of gases
Module III
Special theory of relativity
(13 hours)
Introduction - Galilean transformation - Newtonian principle of relativity - special theory –
postulates - Lorentz transformation - length contraction - time dilation relativity of
simultaneity - addition of velocities - relativistic mass transformation mass - energy relation
Text Book: Modern Physics- R. Murugeshan, Er. Kirthiga Sivaprasad Chapter -1
References:
1. Properties of Matter- Brijlal and N. Subrahmanyam (S. Chand and Co.)
2. Concepts of Modern Physics- A. Beiser (Tata McGraw-Hill, 5th Edn.)
3. Modern Physics- G.Aruldas and P.Rajagopal (PHI Pub)
4. Physics- Resnick and Halliday
72
Semester II
PH2CMT01: MECHANICS, WAVES AND ASTROPHYSICS
Module I
Motion under gravity
(5 hours)
Velocity- acceleration- force – acceleration due to gravity - compound pendulum (symmetric
and asymmetric) radius of gyration - Kater’s pendulum- centripetal acceleration and force centrifugal force
Rotational dynamics
(10 hours)
Angular velocity- angular momentum- torque- conservation of angular momentum- angular
acceleration- moment of inertia- parallel and perpendicular axes theorems- moment of inertia
of rod, ring, disc, cylinder and sphere- flywheel
Module II
Oscillations
(9 hours)
Periodic and oscillatory motion- simple harmonic motion- differential equation,expression
for displacement, velocity and acceleration- graphical representation- energy of a particle
executing simple harmonic motion damped, oscillation- forced oscillation and resonance.
Text Book: Mechanics, D S Mathur, Chapter 8
Waves
(4 hours)
Waves-classifications- progressive wave- energy of progressive wave- superposition of
waves-theory of beats- Doppler effect.
Module III
Astrophysics
(8 hours)
Temperature and color of a star- brightness- size of a star- elements present in a stellar
atmosphere- mass of star- life time of a star- main sequence stars-HR diagram- evolution of
stars- white dwarf- supernova explosion- neutron star- black hole- (all topics to be treated
qualitatively)
Text Book: Modern Physics- R. Murugeshan, Er. Kirthiga Sivaprasad, Chapter 78
References
1. Mechanics- H.S.Hans and S.P.Puri. (Tata McGraw-Hill)
2. A text book on oscillations waves and acoustics, M.Ghosh , D Bhattacharya
3. Introduction to Astrophysics-Baidyanath Basu.
4. Mechanics by D.S. Mathur and P.S. Hemne, S. Chand.
5. Waves, Mechanics & Oscillations- S B Puri
73
Semester III
PH3CMT01: MODERN PHYSICS, ELECTRONICS & STATISTICAL MECHANICS
Module I
Modern Physics
(18 hours)
Basic features of Bohr atom model-Bohr’s correspondence principle-vector atom modelquantum numbers-magnetic moment of orbital electrons-electron spin-Spin-Orbit couplingPauli’s exclusion principle-periodic table. Atomic nucleus-basic properties of nucleusbinding energy and packing fraction-nuclear forces-radioactivity-radioactive decay-decay
laws-decay constant-half life and mean life-radioactive equilibrium-secular and transient
equilibrium-measurement of radioactivity-Nuclear detectors
Text Book: Modern Physics- R. Murugeshan, Er. Kirthiga Sivaprasad chapter -6,27,29,31
Module II
Quantum mechanics
(12 hours)
Inadequacies of classical physics-experimental evidences-evidences for quantum theoryPlanck’s hypothesis-foundation of quantum mechanics-wave function and probability
density-Schrödinger equation-time dependent and time independent- particle in a potential
box.
Text Book: Modern Physics- R. Murugeshan, Er. Kirthiga Sivaprasad chapter-5,9,11
Module III
Electronics
(14 hours)
Current-voltage characteristics of a diode-forward and reverse bias-breakdown mechanism of
p-n junction diode-Zener diode and its characteristics-half wave and full wave rectifiersbridge rectifier-ripple factor, efficiency. Construction and operation of a bipolar junction
transistor-transistor configurations current components-transistor characteristics Transistor
amplifier-basic features of an amplifier-gain, input and output resistances frequency response
and band width-small signal CE amplifier-circuit and its operation .
Text Book: Principles of electronics, V K Mehta, Chapter 9,10,11
74
Module IV
Statistical Mechanics
(10 hours)
Concepts of phase-space-ensemble and statistical equilibrium-probability theorems in
statistical thermodynamics-distribution laws-Maxwell-Boltzmann, Fermi-Dirac and Bose
Einstein distribution laws -comparison of three statistics
Text Book: Modern Physics- R. Murugeshan, Er. Kirthiga Sivaprasad, Chapter 75
References
1. Concepts of Modern Physics: Arthur Beiser (TMH).
2. Basic Electronics , B L Thereja (S. Chand)
3. Statistical Mechanics: Sinha (TMH).
75
Semester IV
PH4CMT01: OPTICS, ELECTRICITY & ELEMENTARY PARTICLES
Module I
Interference & Diffraction
(20 hours)
Analytical treatment of interference-theory of interference fringes and bandwidth.
Interference in thin films-reflected system-colour of thin films-fringes of equal inclination
and equal thickness. Newton’s rings-reflected system-measurement of wavelength and
refractive index of liquid. Phenomenon of diffraction-classification-Fresnel and Fraunhofer.
Fresnel’s theory of approximate rectilinear propagation of light-Fresnel diffraction at a
straight edge and circular aperture. Fraunhofer diffraction at a single slit, two slits and N slits.
Plane transmission grating-determination of wavelength-Resolving power of grating.
Text Book: Optics - Brijlal and N. Subrahmanyam Chapter -8,9
Module II
Laser and Fiber Optics
(10 hours)
Principle of operation of laser-population inversion- pumping-ruby laser, He-Ne laser,
applications of lasers. Light propagation in optical fibers, acceptance angle, numerical
aperture-step index fiber - graded index fiber.
Text Books:
Laser physics and applications , V K Jain(Narosa Publications)Chapter-3,4,5
Optical fiber Communications , John M .Senior Chapter-2
Module III
Dielectrics and electricity
(12 hours)
Dielectrics- polar and non-polar dielectrics- polarization- sources of polarization-Gauss’s law
in dielectrics- permittivity- dielectric displacement vector- dielectric constant-susceptibilityferro-electricity. Peak, mean, rms and effective values of A.C, Ac circuits-AC through RC,
LC, LR and LCR series circuits resonance-sharpness of resonance-power factor .
Text Book: Electricity and Magnetism, D C Tayal - Chapters - 5,12
76
Module IV
Cosmic rays and Elementary particles
(12 Hours)
Cosmic rays (primary and secondary)- cosmic ray showers-latitude effect- longitude effectElementary particles- Classification- Leptons- Hadrons- particles and antiparticles-quarkscolor and flavour- Quantum chromodynamics, standard model.
Modern Physics- R. Murugeshan, Er. Kirthiga Sivaprasad chapter-37
References:
1. Electricity and Magnetism – R.Murugeshan,
2. Nuclear physics –Irvin Kaplan
3. Lasers – theory & applications- Thyagarajan &Ghatak
4. Concepts of Modern Physics- A. Beiser
77
Complementary Physics for Chemistry and Geology
Semester 1
PH1CMT02: PROPERTIES OF MATTER AND THERMODYNAMICS
Module I
Elasticity
(13 hours)
Stress- strain- Hooke’s law- Elastic moduli- Poisson’s ratio- twisting couple- determination
of rigidity modulus- static and dynamic methods- static torsion- torsion pendulum, bending of
beams- cantilever, uniform and non-uniform bending, I section girder.
Module II
Surface tension
(5 hours)
Molecular theory of surface tension - surface energy - excess pressure in a liquid drop,
transverse waves on the surface of a liquid - effect of gravity - effect of surface tension factors affecting surface tension - applications
Viscosity
(5 hours)
Streamline and turbulent flow - critical velocity - Coefficient of viscosity - Derivation of
Poiseuille’s equation, Stokes equation-Determination of viscosity by Poiseuille’s method and
Stokes method-Brownian motion – Viscosity of gases
Module III
Thermodynamics
(13 hours)
Thermodynamic systems- thermodynamic equilibrium- thermodynamic processes- isothermal
process- adiabatic process- zeroth law of thermodynamics first law of thermodynamics- heat
engine- the Carnot engine- refrigerator concept of entropy- second law of thermodynamicsthird law of thermodynamics- Maxwell’s thermodynamic relations
Text Book: Heat and Thermodynamics-Brijlal & Subrahmanyam (S.Chand) Chapters 4 & 6.
References
1. Mechanics - H.S.Hans and S.P.Puri. (Tata McGraw-Hill)
2. Properties of Matter - Brijlal and N. Subrahmanyam (S. Chand and Co.)
3. Mechanics - J.C. Upadhyaya (Ram Prasad and sons)
4. Heat and Thermodynamics – Mark W Zemanski (Tata McGraw-Hill)
78
Semester 2
PH2CMT02: MECHANICS, WAVES AND SUPERCONDUCTIVITY
Module I
Motion under gravity
(5 hours)
Velocity- acceleration- force – acceleration due to gravity - compound pendulum (symmetric
and asymmetric) radius of gyration - Kater’s pendulum- centripetal acceleration and force centrifugal force
Rotational dynamics
(10 hours)
Angular velocity- angular momentum- torque- conservation of angular momentum- angular
acceleration- moment of inertia- parallel and perpendicular axes theorems- moment of inertia
of rod, ring, disc, cylinder and sphere- flywheel
Module II
Oscillations
(9 hours)
Periodic and oscillatory motion- simple harmonic motion- differential equation, expression
for displacement, velocity and acceleration- graphical representation- energy of a particle
executing simple harmonic motion damped, oscillation- forced oscillation and resonance.
Waves
(4 hours)
Waves-classifications- progressive wave- energy of progressive wave- superposition of
waves-theory of beats- Doppler effect.
Module III
Superconductivity
(8 hours)
Super conducting phenomenon- Occurrence- BCS theory (qualitative) Meissner Effect- Type
I and Type II superconductors- Josephson effects- High temperature superconductorsApplications of Superconductivity
Text Book: Modern Physics, Murugesan, Chapter-41, 42, 44
References
1. Properties of Matter- Brijlal and N. Subrahmanyam (S. Chand and Co.)
2. A text book on oscillations waves and acoustics, M.Ghosh , D Bhattacharya
3. Solid State Physics- R. K. Puri and V.K. Babbar (S. Chand and Co.)
4. Elementary Solid State Physics,Ali Omar
79
Semester III
PH3CMT02: MODERN PHYSICS, ELECTRONICS & MAGNETISM
Module I
Modern Physics
(18 hours)
Basic features of Bohr atom model-Bohr’s correspondence principle-vector atom modelvarious quantum numbers-magnetic moment of orbital electrons-electron spin-Spin-Orbit
coupling-Pauli’s exclusion principle-periodic table. Atomic nucleus-basic properties of
nucleus-charge, mass, spin, magnetic moment binding energy and packing fraction-nuclear
forces-salient features-radioactivity radioactive decay-decay laws-decay constant-half life
and mean life-radioactive equilibrium - measurement of radioactivity-Nuclear detectors ,
ionization chambers.
Modern Physics- R. Murugeshan, Er. Kirthiga Sivaprasad chapter -6,27,29,31
Module II
Quantum Mechanics
(12 hours)
Inadequacies of classical physics-experimental evidences-evidences for quantum theoryPlanck’s hypothesis-foundation of quantum mechanics-wave function & probability densitySchrödinger equation-time dependent and time independent particle in a potential box.
Modern Physics- R. Murugeshan, Er. Kirthiga Sivaprasad chapter-5,9,11
Module III
Electronics
(14 hours)
Current-voltage characteristics of a diode-forward and reverse bias-breakdown mechanism of
p-n junction diode-Zener diode and its characteristics-half wave and full wave rectifiersbridge rectifier-ripple factor, efficiency. Construction and operation of a bipolar junction
transistor-transistor configurations-current components-transistor characteristics - Transistor
amplifier-basic features of an amplifier-gain, input and output resistances frequency response
and band width-small signal CE amplifier-circuit and its operation
Principles of electronics, V K Mehta, Chapter 9,10,11
Module IV
Magnetism
(10 hours)
Properties of magnetic materials, Paramagnetism, Diamagnetism, Ferromagnetism,
Hysteresis, Ferrites, Magnetostriction, Earth’s magnetism-elements of earth’s magnetism-dip,
declination, horizontal and vertical components-magnetic maps-magnetographs-cause of
earth’s magnetism
Electricity and magnetism, D C Tayal, Chapter 11
References
1. Modern Physics – R. Murugeshan, (S. Chand & Co. Ltd.)
2. Functional Electronics, Ramanan (Tata McGraw-Hill)
3. Electricity and magnetism - Brijlal and N. Subrahmanyam (S. Chand and Co.)
80
Semester IV
PH4CMT02: OPTICS, ELECTRICITY & CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
Module I
Interference & Diffraction
(20 hours)
Analytical treatment of interference-theory of interference fringes and bandwidth.
Interference in thin films-reflected system-colour of thin films-fringes of equal inclination
and equal thickness. Newton’s rings-reflected system-measurement of wavelength and
refractive index of liquid. Phenomenon of diffraction-classification-Fresnel and Fraunhofer.
Fresnel’s theory of approximate rectilinear propagation of light-Fresnel diffraction at a
straight edge and circular aperture. Fraunhofer diffraction at a single slit, two slits and N slits.
Plane transmission grating-determination of wavelength-Resolving power of grating.
Text Book: Optics - Brijlal and N. Subrahmanyam Chapter -8, 9
Module II
Laser and Fiber Optics
(10 hours)
Principle of operation of laser-population inversion- pumping-ruby laser, He-Ne laser,
applications of lasers. Light propagation in optical fibers, acceptance angle, numerical
aperture-step index fiber - graded index fiber.
Text Books: Laser physics and applications , V K Jain(Narosa Publications)Chapter-3,4,5
Optical fiber Communications , John M .Senior Chapter-2
Module III
Dielectrics and electricity
(12 hours)
Dielectrics- polar and non-polar dielectrics- polarization- sources of polarization-Gauss’s law
in dielectrics- permittivity- dielectric displacement vector- dielectric constant-susceptibilityferro-electricity. Peak, mean, rms and effective values of A.C, Ac circuits-AC through RC,
LC, LR and LCR series circuits resonance-sharpness of resonance-power factor .
Text Book: Electricity and Magnetism , D C Tayal Chapters - 5,12
Module IV
Crystallography
(12 hours)
Crystal structure-crystal lattice and translation vectors-unit cell-types of lattices-lattice
directions and planes interplanar spacing-simple crystal structures-close packed structuresstructure of diamond-zinc blend structure-sodium chloride structure. X-ray crystallographydiffraction of x-rays-Bragg’s law-x-ray diffraction methods rotating crystal method-powder
diffraction method.
Text Book: Solid State Physics, S O Pillai, Chapter-4
References:
1. A text book of Applied Physics – A .K Jha
2. Electricity and Magnetism – R. Murugeshan (S Chand & Co.)
3. Solid state physics, P. K Palanisami
4. Lasers – theory & applications- Thyagarajan &Ghatak
81
COMPLEMENTARY PHYSICS PRACTICALS
Semester I & II
Complementary Physics Practical 1: PH2CMP01
1. Vernier Calipers -- Volume of a cylinder, sphere and a beaker
2. Screw gauge – Radius of wire, thickness of glass piece
3. Beam balance - Mass of a solid (sensibility method)
4. Density of a liquid -U-Tube and Hare’s apparatus
5. Coefficient of viscosity of the liquid - Constant pressure head method
6. Coefficient of viscosity of the liquid - Variable pressure head method
7. Surface Tension – Capillary rise method
8. Cantilever - Pin & Microscope – Determination of Young’s Modulus
9. Cantilever – Scale and Telescope - Determination of Young’s Modulus
10. Symmetric Compound Pendulum - Determination of radius of gyration (k) and
Acceleration due to gravity (g)
11. Asymmetric Compound Pendulum-Determination of radius of gyration(k) and
Acceleration due to gravity (g)
12. Kater’s pendulum- Determination of Acceleration due to gravity (g)
13. Spectrometer – Angle of the Prism.
14. Spectrometer - Refractive Index of material of prism.
15. Laser- Single slit- slit width
16. Liquid lens I - Refractive Index of glass using a liquid of known refractive index
17. Liquid Lens II – Refractive index of liquid
18. Potentiometer - Calibration of low range voltmeter
19. Fly wheel – Moment of Inertia
20. Mirror Galvanometer – Figure of merit
21. Torsion pendulum -Rigidity modulus
82
Semester III & IV
Complementary Physics Practical 2: PH4CMP02
1. Uniform bending – Young’s modulus (Optic lever method)
2. Non-uniform bending – Young’s modulus (Pin and Microscope method)
3. Torsion pendulum (Equal mass method) - Rigidity modulus and Moment of Inertia
4. Static Torsion - Rigidity modulus
5. Spectrometer – Dispersive power of prism
6. Spectrometer – Dispersive power of a Grating
7. Newton’s rings -Wave length
8. Laser- Grating- Wavelength
9. Deflection and Vibration Magnetometer-m & Bh
10. Conversion of Galvanometer into voltmeter
11. Transistor characteristics - CE configuration
12. Gates – AND, OR, NOT- verification of truth tables
13. Field along the axis of circular coil- determination of Bh
14. Carey Foster’s Bridge -Measurement of resistivity
15. Searle’s Vibration Magnetometer - magnetic moment
16. Tangent Galvanometer – Ammeter calibration
17. Potentiometer-Calibration of low range ammeter
18. Construction of half wave rectifier with and without filter – Ripple factor and Load
regulation
19. Construction of full wave rectifier (center-tap) with and without filter – Ripple factor
and Load regulation
20. Construction of regulated power supply using Zener diode
21. Characteristics of Zener diode
References
1. Practical Physics- Joseph Ittiavirah, Premnath and Abraham
2. Properties of Matter -D.S. Mathur
3. Optics -Subrahmanyam& Brijlal
4. Electricity &Magnetism -Sreevastava
5. Electronics Lab Manual (Vol.1) -K. A. Navas
6. Laboratory manual for electronic devices and circuits-David A Bell
83
Complementary Physics for B. Sc. Electronics (Model III) Programme
SEMESTER I
PH1CMT03: SOLID STATE PHYSICS
Objectives:
1. To provide the students of B.Sc. Electronics programme the bare minimum
knowledge in Solid State Physics which is the basis of electronic devices.
2. It aims at developing a taste for solid state physics where the real advances in
electronic device technology happens.
3. To enable students to catch up with the new areas related to electronics which include
quantum computing, nanotechnology etc.
4. Miniaturization has made the physics of devices more demanding. One requires the
application of the methods of quantum mechanics to tackle them.
Hours/Week
Contact Hours
Credit s
:4
: 72
:3
Course Outline
Module I- Crystal structure and atomic bonding
(15hours)
Basic definitions - Crystal lattice, Unit cell- primitive and non primitive cells, Basis. Types of
lattices-Bravais lattices and derived structures, Lattice directions and planes-Miller indices
(simple calculations expected). X-ray diffraction-Bragg's law- Powder crystal method
(qualitative study).Inter-atomic bonding- ionic, covalent, metallic.
Textbook
Chapter One, Two and Three. Solid State Physics-R.K Puri&V.KBabbar.
Module II – Basic quantum mechanics
(15 hours)
Dual nature of matter and wave - de Broglie waves, Particle diffraction - Davison-Germer
experiment, Uncertainty principle(derivation based on Fourier integral not needed),Classical
mechanics as an approximation of quantum mechanics, Wave function, Wave equation,
Schrodinger equation- Time dependent & Steady State forms(Eigen functions and eigen
values not needed).
Textbook
Chapter Three &Five.Concepts of Modern Physics-Arthur Beiser.
Module III –Free electron theory of metals and Band theory of solids
(10 hours)
Free electron theory in one dimension (qualitative study only)-fermi energy and fermilevel,
Band theory -Bloch theorem(proof not required),Metals, insulators and semiconductors
according to energy band picture.
Textbook
Chapter Five, Six. Solid State Physics-R.K Puri & V.K.Babbar.
84
Module IV-Semiconductors (12 hours)
Semiconductors –intrinsic and extrinsic types-doping.Drift velocity, mobility and
conductivity of intrinsic semiconductors, Law of mass action and intrinsic carrier
concentration(only essential formula required), Hall effect-hall coefficient.
Textbooks
Chapter Seven. Solid State Physics-R.K Puri & V.K.Babbar.
Chapter Six. Elementay Solid State Physics-Principles and Applications-Ali Omar, Pearson
Education.
Module V – Magnetism in solids and Super conductivity (20 hours)
Magnetic terminology–Types of magnetism(derivations not needed)-dia,para and
ferromagnetism –Weiss Theory of ferromagnetism-Concept Domain and Hysterisis,
antiferromagnetism, ferrimagnetism.
Superconductivity, Electrical resistivity- zero resistance, Meissner effect, Critical field and
critical temperature, Type I and Type II Superconductors, Applications of superconductivity
(basic information only).
Textbook
Chapter Eight and Ten. Solid State Physics-R.K Puri&V.K.Babbar.
Books for study
1. Concepts of Modern Physics -Arthur Beiser, 6th edn., Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Ltd.
2. Solid State Physics-R.K Puri & V.KBabbar,S.Chand & Company Ltd.
3. Elementay Solid State Physics-Principles and Applications-Ali Omar, Pearson
Education.
Books suggested for further reading
1. Quantum Mechanics-G Aruldhas, PHI Learning.
2. Solid State Physics-S.O Pillai,6th revised edition. New Age International Pvt. Ltd.
3. Introduction to Solid State Physics - Charles Kittel,8th edition, Wiley.
4. Introduction to Quantum Mechanics - Griffiths, 2nd edition. Pearson Education.
5. Solid State Physics-Structures and Properties of materials, M.A Wahab,3rdedition,
Narosa Publishing House.
6. Solid State Physics- C.L. Arora, S Chand & Company Ltd.
7. Solid State Physics-P.K. Palanisamy, Scitech Publications.
8. Solid State Physics- Blakemore, J.S. 2nd edition. Cambridge.
9. Solid State Physics - Gupta & Kumar, K.Nath& Co., Educational Publishers,
10. Fundamentals of Solid State Physics –Saxena, Gupta & Saxena, Pragati Prakashan
85
17.2 VOCATIONAL COURSES (Model II)
(1) APPLIED ELECTRONICS
SEMESTER 1
AE1VOT01: PRINCIPLES OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
Credits: 2
Contact hours: 36 Hours.
Scope: This course is expected to give a familiarization of various electronic components.
Prerequisites: Basic Physics and Mathematics
Module I (12 hours)
Resistors: (6Hours)
Basic Ideas – Resistor Types – Wire wound Resistors – Carbon composition Resistors –
Carbon Film Resistors – Metal Film Resistors – Power Rating – Value- tolerance – Variable
Resistors – Potentiometers and Rheostat – Fusible resistor – Resistor Colour code –Resistors
under 10 Ohm – Resistor troubles – Checking Resistors with an Ohmmeter –Measurement of
resistance-bridge method
Inductors: (6Hours)
Basic Ideas – Comparison of different cores – Inductance of an Inductor – Mutual Inductance
Coefficient of Coupling – Variable Inductors – Series and Parallel combination of inductors –
Energy stored – troubles in coils – Reactance – Impedance – Q factor – Power factor and
wattless current - Measurement of Inductance-Universal bridge method.
Basic Electronics – Solid State, B.L. Theraja-S Chand (2005)
Electronic Components, D.V.Prasad- Radiant Publishing House, Hyderabad.
Module II (12 hours)
Capacitance:(8Hours)
Basic ideas – Capacitor connected to the battery – Capacitance – Factors controlling
capacitance – Types of Capacitors – Fixed Capacitors:- Paper, Mica, Ceramic, Electrolytic –
Variable Capacitors:- Gang, Trimmer, Padder - Voltage ratings of Capacitors – Stray circuit
capacitance – Leakage Resistance – Series and Parallel combination Capacitors – Energy
stored – Troubles in Capacitors – Checking Capacitors with Ohmmeter – Charging of a
86
Capacitor – Capacitor connected across and AC source – Capacitive Reactance – Q factor –
Power factor – Measurement of Capacitance-Universal bridge method.
Transformers (4Hours)
Principle, Symbols – Mains and isolation transformers – Auto, Audio, IF, RF and Power
transformers – Impedance matching – Losses in transformers – Equivalent circuit –
Frequency response – Common fault in transformers.
Electronic Instruments and Systems, R.G. Gupta – TMH (2001)
Electronic Components, D. V. Prasad- Radiant Publishing House, Hyderabad.
Module III (12 hours)
Switches and Relays:(9Hours)
Basic ideas: switching actions, momentary contact actions, maintained contact actions –
Types of switches: SPST, SPDT, DPST, DPDT, Toggle, rotary-Fuses: General idea, fuse
rating
–
Circuit
breaker-Relays:
General
information,
Symbol-Types
of
electromagnetic, reed relay – Specifications – Application areas.
A text Book of Applied Electronics, R.S. Sedha – S. Chand (2005)
Electronic Components and materials, Madhuri A. Joshi – Wheeler Publishing (1996)
Display Devices: (3 Hours)
LED, LCD, Segmental Displays using LEDs, LCDs.
Electronic Instrumentation (2 Ed.) H.S. Kalsi, TMH (2 Edn)
87
relays:
AE1VOT02: ELECTRONIC APPLICATIONS
Credits: 2
Contact hours: 36 hours.
Scope: This course is expected to provide knowledge of various electronic circuits and its
application. Pre-requisites: Basic Electronics, Physics and Mathematics
Module I
Measuring Instruments (6 Hours.)
PMMC Multimeter – Digital Multimeter– Cathode Ray Oscilloscope(CRO):- Principle –
Cathode Ray Tube – Deflection of the Beam – Blanking or Flyback or Retrace-Deflection
Sensitivity- Single Trace Oscilloscope – Recurrent Sweep.
Electronic Instruments and Systems, R.G. Gupta – TMH (2001)
Tuning Circuits and Filters: (6Hours)
Resonance in series and parallel LCR circuits – Operating characteristic of a tuning circuit –
Q value – Bandwidth – Tuning circuit in radio receivers – Double tuned transformers – direct
and indirect coupled circuits – coefficient of coupling – filters: low pass filter-high pass filter
– band pass filter-band stop filter.
Module II
Time base Circuits: (6Hours)
General features of a time base signal – Types of time base circuits – Methods of Generating
a time base Waveform – Exponential Sweep circuit – Sweep Circuit Using Transistor Switch
– A Transistor Constant Current Sweep – Miller Sweep Circuit – Bootstrap Sweep Circuit –
Current Time Base Generator.
A text Book of Applied Electronics, R.S. Sedha – S. Chand (2005)
Transducers: (6Hours)
General information-LDR-Thermistor – Thermocouple – Photodiode – Phototransistor –
LVDT-Piezoelectric transducer, Microphone-moving coil.
Electronic Instrumentation (2 Ed.) H.S. Kalsi, TMH (2006).
88
Module III
Optical Recording: (8Hours).
Types of optical recording of sound – Methods of optical recording of sound of films –
Variable density method – Variable area method – Reproduction of sound from films –
Compact Disc – Optical recording of disc -CD playback process – Advantages and
disadvantages of compact discs.
Audio and Video Systems, R.G. Gupta – TMH (2002)
Printed Circuit Board: (4Hours)
General Information-Types of PCBs-Steps involved in development of PCB-Advantages
A text of Applied Electronics, R.S. Sedha – S.Chand (2005)
Electronic Components and materials, Madhuri A. Joshi – Wheeler publishing (1996)
89
SEMESTER 2
AE2VOT03: BASICS OF POWER ELECTRONICS
Credits: 2 Contact hours: 36 hours.
Scope: This course is expected to provide a knowledge of various Power Electronic
components and its application.
Prerequisites: Basic Electronics, Physics and Mathematics
Module I
Field-Effect Transistors: 12 hours.
Introduction– Types of Field-Effect Transistor. Junction Field-Effect Transistor – Formation
of Depletion Region in JFET – Operation of JFET – Characteristics of JFET – Drain
Characteristics – Effect of Gate-to-Source Voltage on Drain Characteristics – Transfer
Characteristics – Specifications Sheet of JFET – JFET Parameters – Mathematical
Expression for Transconductance – Comparison between Junction Field Effect Transistors
and Bipolar Junction Transistor
A Text book of Applied Electronics, R.S. Sedha – S. Chand (2005).
Basic Electronics – Solid State, B.L. Thereja-S Chand (2005)
Electronic Devices and Circuits, J.B.Gupta-S.K.Kataria & Sons
Module II
MOSFET: 12Hours.
Types of MOSFET – Depletion-Type MOSFET – Working of a Depletion-Type MOSFET –
Drain Characteristics of Depletion-Type MOSFET – Transfer Symbol for Depletion Type
MOSFET – Circuit Symbol for Depletion-Type MOSFET – Enhancement-Type MOSFET –
Drain characteristics for enhancement type MOSFET - Transfer Characteristics of
Enhancement-Type MOSFET – Circuit Symbol for Enhancement type MOSFET – The
MOSFET as a Resistor – Advantages of N-Channel MOSFET’s Over P-Channel –
Complementary MOSFETs (CMOS), Handling Precautions for MOSFET’s.
A Text Book of Applied Electronics, R.S. Sedha – S. Chand (2005).
90
Module III
FET Amplifiers: 12Hours.
Introduction-Biasing the FET- Biasing the JFET-Gate Bias-Self Bias-Setting a Q-Point Setting a Q-Point Using Load Line – Biasing Against Device Parameter Variation – Voltage
Divider Bias – Source Bias – Current Source Bias – Biasing the Enhancement Type
MOSFET ‘s – Biasing the Depletion Type MOSFET ‘s -The Field –Effect Transistor
amplifier-Common source Amplifier-Analysis of Common Source Amplifier-Effect of AC
load on amplifier parameters-Effect of external source resistance on Voltage gain, Common
Drain Amplifier- Analysis of Common Drain Amplifier-Common Gate Amplifier- Analysis
of Common Gate Amplifier
A Text book of Applied Electronics, R.S. Sedha – S. Chand (2005)
91
AE2VOT04: POWER ELECTRONICS
Credits: 2
Contact hours: 36 hours
Scope: This course is expected to provide a knowledge of various Power electronic circuits
and its application.
Module I
Thyristors, SCR, Diac, Triac: (14 hours.)
Basic ideas and Types of Thyristors Basic construction of Silicon Controlled Rectifier – SCR
biasing – SCR operation – SCR equivalent Circuit- Two transistor model of SCR –Trigger
Current and Trigger voltage- Turning ON & Turning OFF an SCR– V-I characteristics –
Forward characteristic – Reverse characteristic – Thyristor Specifications and ratings –
Applications. Basic construction of Diac:- V-I characteristic-Applications. Basic construction
of Triac:- Operation – V-I characteristic – Applications – Difference between SCR and Triac.
Module II
Uni Junction Transistors, Silicon Controlled Switch: (10 hours.)
Unijunction Transistors (UJT) : Basic construction-Equivalent circuit-Intrinsic Standoff ratioUJT operation. V-I characteristic –UJT Relaxation Oscillator- Applications of UJT. Basic
ideas of:- Silicon Controlled Switch(SCS)-SCS operation-SCS application-Silicon Unilateral
Switch (SUS)-Silicon Bilateral Switch (SBS) – Silicon Asymmetrical Switch (SAS).
Module III
Controlled Rectifiers: 12 Hours.
Introduction-SCR – Power control using SCR – SCR half wave rectifier – Average values of
load voltage and current - 90°Variable Half Wave Rectifier - 180º Variable Half Wave
Rectifier – SCR Full Wave Rectifier – UJT Triggered SCR phase control – Triac power
control – Diac-Triac Phase Control Circuit – General ideas of Inverters -Single phase inverter
– Push-pull inverter.
Power Electronics, B.R.Gupta and V.Singhal- S.K. Kataria & Sons
Power Electronics, Dr.P.S.Bimbhra, Khanna Publishers
92
SEMESTER 3
AE3VOT05: LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
Credits: 3
Contact hours: 54 hours.
Scope: This course is expected to provide knowledge of various Linear Integrated Electronic
circuits and its application.
Module I (18 hours)
Operational Amplifiers: 18 Hours.
Introduction – Operational Overview – Op-Amp supply voltages – IC Identification –
Packages – Parameters. Op-amp as an Voltage Amplifier-Inverting Amplifier – Non
inverting amplifier –inverting–Voltage follower(buffer) – Summing Amplifier – Differential
Amplifier- Op. Amp frequency response – Frequency versus gain Characteristics
A Text book of Applied Electronics, R.S. Sedha – S. Chand (2005).
Linear Integrated Circuits, M.P.A.Jaleel-Maliyakkal Publishers, Calicut.
Op-amp Applications: 18Hours.
Comparators- Integrator – Differentiator – Audio amplifier – High Impedance, Voltmeter –
Op-Amp based oscillator circuits: Wein Bridge Oscillator – Colpitts Oscillator, Crystal
Oscillator, Triangular wave Oscillator, Voltage-Controlled Saw tooth Oscillator, Square
Wave Relaxation Oscillator. Active Filters: Low-pass Filters, High Pass Filters, Band Pass
Filters, Notch Filter
Op-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits, Ramakant.A.Gayakwad-PHI(2004)
IC Timer (555): 9Hours.
Monostable Multivibrator – Applications, Astable Multivibrator – Applications, Bistable
Multivibrator – Applications, Schmitt trigger – Applications, VCO
93
Phase – Locked Loops (PLL): 9Hours.
Operating Principles – Phase Detector – Low –Pass Filter – VCO – monolithic PLL
References:
Op-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits, Ramakant.A.Gayakwad-PHI(2004)
94
AE3VOT06: COMMUNICATION ELECTRONICS
Credits: 3
Scope: This course is expected to provide knowledge of various communication systems and
its working Prerequisites: Basic Electronics, Physics and Mathematics
Module I (18 hours)
Communication Systems (6Hours)
Communication Systems- Information, Transmitter, Channel, Noise, Receiver -Modulationneed for modulation.
Electronic Communication Systems- Kennedy & Davis, TMH, 4th Edition.
Electronic Devices: Floyd, Pearson , 6th Edition.
Radio waves (12Hours)
Propagation of radio waves: Ground waves, Sky waves, Space waves, Frequency and band
allocation- ionospheric influence on radio waves. Terms relating sky wave communication,
skip distance, maximum usable frequency, Single and multihop transmission, Fading.
Electronics: Fundamentals and Applications- D. Chattopadhyaya , P.C.Rakshit, NewageRevised 6th edition.
Modulation and Demodulation (7Hours)
Modulation and Demodulation: Amplitude modulation- Modulation index, Frequency
spectrum, Sidebands, Power in AM wave, Amplitude modulation generation. Frequency
modulation- Modulation index, Generation of FM wave, Reactance modulator, Voltage
controlled oscillator.
Wave detectors (11Hours)
Detection of AM wave- Diode detector (qualitative) - Detection of FM waves- Slope
detector, phase discriminator, Pre emphasis, De emphasis - Comparison between AM & FM
Pulse modulation-Analog & digital Pulse modulation, Basic idea of Pulse amplitude
95
modulation (PAM), Pulse width modulation (PWM) & Pulse position modulation (PPM) Radio Receivers- Super heterodyne AM receiver & Super heterodyne FM receiver
(Explanation with block diagram).
Electronics: Fundamentals and applications- D. Chattopadhyaya , P.C.Rakshit, NewageRevised 6th edition.
Electronic Communication Systems- Kennedy & Davis, TMH, 4th Edition.
Electronic Devices: Floyd, Pearson , 6th Edition.
Antenna (12Hours)
Antenna – Half-wave dipole – Antenna parameters – Dipole antenna with reflector and
director – Yagi-Uda Antenna – T.V. Scanning, Colour TV –Luminance, hue and saturationColour signal Transmission, Modulation of colour difference signals, Weighting factors,
Formation of Chrominance Signal, PAL Colour T.V. System, PAL-D Colour system, PAL-D
Colour Receiver, Merits and Demerits of the PAL system. Principles of radar, Radar range
equation, Basic pulsed radar set, Applications of radar.
Forms of communication systems (6Hours)
Other communication systems: Fiber optic communication- Satellite communicationMicrowave communication- Mobile communication- Cellular mobile communication (Basic
ideas only).
Electronics: Fundamentals and applications- D. Chattopadhyaya, P. C. Rakshit, NewageRevised 6th edition.
Monochrome and Colour Television,R.R. Gulati- New Age International(P) LTD, Publishers.
96
SEMESTER 4
AV4VOT07: MICRO PROCESSOR AND INTERFACING DEVICES
Credits: 3
Scope: This course is expected to provide knowledge of Micro Processor and Interfacing
Devices Prerequisites: Basic Electronics, Physics and Mathematics
Module I (27 hours)
Intel 8085
Microprocessor Architecture – Intel 8085 – Instruction cycle - Timing diagram – Instruction
set of Intel 8085 – Addressing Modes – Status Flags – Intel 8085 Instructions – Simple
program for data transfer and arithmetic operations, program branching, looping, using sub
routines, Program for finding smallest and largest number, Program for arranging data in
ascending and descending order.
References: Fundamentals of Microprocessors and Microcomputers – B Ram Pub: Dhanpat
Rai Publications (P) Ltd.(6 th Edn.)
Micro Processor Architectures Programming and Applications – R.S. Gaonkar, Pub: Penram
International
Peripheral Devices
Address space partitioning – Data transfer schemes – Interrupts of Intel 8085 –
Programmable Peripheral Interface (PPI) Intel 8255 - Programmable DMA Controller Intel
8257 – Programmable Interrupt Controller Intel 8259
Fundamentals of Microprocessors and Microcomputers – B Ram Pub: Dhanpat Rai
Publications (P) Ltd.(6th Edn.)
Micro Processor Architectures Programming and Applications – R.S. Gaonkar, Pub:
Penram International
97
AE4VOT08 APPLICATIONS OF MICROPROCESSORS
Credits: 3
Scope: This course is expected to provide knowledge of architecture and applications of
Microprocessors
Module I
Applications of Intel 8085 (18Hours)
Delay Sub routine – 7 segment LED display – Temperature measurement and controlStepper Motor – Traffic control – Generation of square wave or pulse using I/O Port.
Module II
Micro Controller 8051 (10Hours)
Microprocessors and Microcontrollers – Comparison –The Z 80 and The 8051 – A
Microcontroller survey – Four bit, Eight bit, Sixteen bit, Thirty Two bit microcontrollers –
Development system for microcontrollers.
The 8051 Microcontroller, Architecture, Programming & Applications-Kenneth J Ayala –
Second Edition
Module III
The 8051 Architecture (26Hours)
Introduction – 8051 Microcontroller hardware – The 8051 Oscillator and Clock – Program
Counter and Data Pointer – A and B CPU Registers – Flags and the Program Status Word
(PSW) – Internal Memory – Internal RAM – The Stack and the Stack Pointer – Special
Function Registers – Internal ROM – Input/Output Pins, Ports, and Circuits – Port 0 – Port 1
– Port 2 – Port 3 - External Memory – Connecting External Memory – Counter and Timers –
Timer Counter Interrupts – Timing – Timer Modes of Operation – Counting – Serial Data
98
Input/Output – Serial Data Interrupts – Data Transmission – Data Reception – Serial Data
Transmission Modes – Interrupts – Timer Flag Interrupt – Serial Port Interrupt – External
Interrupts – Reset – Interrupt Control – Interrupt Priority – Interrupt Destinations – Software
– Generated Interrupts
The 8051 Microcontroller, Architecture, Programming & Applications-Kenneth J Ayala –
Second Edition
99
VOCATIONAL COURSES (1): APPLIED ELECTRONICS-PRACTICAL
SEMESTER 1 & 2
Vocational Practical I: AE2VOP01
(Minimum 16 experiments)
1. Familiarization of passive components
2. Familiarization of active components
3. Familiarization of CRO
4. PCB layout and fabrication (Hartley, Colpitt’s oscillators, RC coupled amplifier)
5. Zener Diode Characteristics
6. RC Integrator (Design – Set up – Its response to pulses or square waves)
7. RC Differentiator (Design-Set up-its response to pulses or square waves)
8. RC low pass filter (Study the frequency response)
9. RC high pass filter (Study the frequency response)
10. Photo diode –Characteristics
11. Soldering practice
12. Construction & study of regulated power supply using regulator IC’s 78xx 79xx Line
regulation(for a given full load) and load regulation
13. JFET characteristics (Static drain characteristics – Calculation of parameters)
14. UJT characteristics
15. SCR. Characteristics
16. DIAC Characteristics
17. TRIAC Characteristics
18. UJT relaxation Oscillator
19. Common emitter amplifier design and construction. (a) Study the influence the
biasing resistors on D.C operating point. (b)Variation of gain with collector resistor.
(c) Measure the gain with and without the bypass capacitor
20. Common source JFET amplifier
References:
1. Electronics Lab Manual, Vol 1 and 2, K.A. Navas – Rajath Publishers
2. Digital Electonics Theory and Experiments, Virendra Kumar-New Age International
Publishers.
3. Electronics Laboratory Primer, Poorna Chandra and B. Sasikala – S. Chand
100
SEMESTER 3 and 4
1. Op-amp – Square Wave Generator
2. Op-amp – First Order Low Pass Filter (Design, Construction, Study)
3. Op-amp – First Order High Pass Filter (Design, Construction, Study)
4. Op-amp – Pulse Width Modulation
5. Op-amp – Digital/Analog Converter
6. Op-amp – A /D Converter
7. Op-amp –Summing Amplifier
8. OP-Amp – inverter, non inverter, buffer for A.C input voltages
9. Decade Counter (BCD Counter) (IC 7490)
10. Bistable multivibrator using IC 555
11. μP – Conversion of 8 bit binary to BCD/BCD to binary
12. μP – Square of a number
13. μP – Square root of a number
14. μP – Multi byte decimal addition
15. μP – Largest among the set of numbers
16. μP – Smallest among the set of numbers
17. μP – Hex number to ASCII Hex Code conversion
18. μP – ASCII Hex Code to Hex number conversion
19. μP – Binary to BCD conversion
20. μP – BCD to Binary conversion
References:
1. Electronics Lab Manual, Vol 1 and 2, K.A. Navas – Rajath Publishers
2. Digital Electonics Theory and Experiments, Virendra Kumar-New Age International
Publishers.
3. Electronics Laboratory Primer, Poorna Chandra and B. Sasikala – S. Chand
101
1. Amplitude Modulator (Set up – Study using CRO)
2. Demodulator (Set up – Study using CRO)
3. IF Tuned amplifier (Frequency response )
4. Mixer Circuit for 455Hz (Design and set up)
5. Frequency modulation using IC 555
6. Pulse width modulation using IC 555
7. LED- Characteristics
8. LDR- Characteristics
9. PhotoDiode-Characteristics
10. OptoCoupler- Characteristics
11. μP – Move a block of data from one section of memory to another
1β. μP – Square from look up table
1γ. μP – 16 bit multiplication
14. μP – Sorting (ascending order)
15. μP – Sorting (descending order)
16. μP – Factorial of a number
17. μP – Counting the number of occurance
18. μP – Decimal counter to count 00to99
19. μP – Generation of pulse waveform
20. μP – Stepper motor interface
Reference:
Electronics Lab Manual, Vol 1 and 2, K.A. Navas – Rajath Publishers
102
(2): COMPUTER APPLICATIONS (model II)
Semester I
Vocational Paper I: CA1VOT01 - COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS
Credits – 2
No. of contact hours –36
Scope: This course provides the basic knowledge about computers.
Prerequisites: Basic Mathematics, Fundamentals of Electronics.
Module I
Introduction &Characteristics of Computers: (12 Hours)
Evolution of Computers: Abacus, Napier’s Logs and Bones, Mechanical Calculators,
Babbage’s Engines, Holierith’s Machine.
Generation of Computers: First generation, Second generation, Third generation, Fourth
Generation and Fifth generation.
Purpose of using computers, Data & Information
Characteristics of a Computer, Capabilities & Limitations of Computers.
Type of Computers: Analog-Digital-Hybrid. Classification based on memory size: Micro,
Mini andMainframes, Supercomputers.
Basic Organization & Working of a Computer: Arithmetic Logic Unit-Control unit-Central
Processing unit
Module II
Basic Computer Organization: (10Hours)
Input units: Different types of Keyboards, Mouse’s&it’s working, Joystick, Trackball,
Scanner: Flat bed, Sheet-fed and Hand-held scanners, Graphic Tablets, Light Pen
Output units: Working of monochromatic and colour CRT, LCD Panel, Plotters, Audio
output devices, Printers – Working of Dot Matrix, Laser, Inkjet, Colour Thermal printer
Motherboard, Expansion Buses, BIOS
Storage units: Primary Memory-RAM, ROM, PROM, EPROMand EEPROM, Cache
Memory, Secondary Memory-Magnetic storage devices, Optical storage devices,
Semiconductor memory. Working of Hard Disk & Floppy Disk
Module III
Computer arithmetic and number systems: (9 Hours)
Number Systems: Decimal Number System, Binary Number System, Octal Number System,
Hexadecimal Number System. Converting from one number system to another number
system
103
Computer codes-BCD, EBCDIC and ASCII
Computer arithmetic: Binary Addition, Subtraction, Division & Multiplication - Hexadecimal
Addition &Subtraction - Octal Addition & Subtraction - BCD Addition
Computer Software: (5Hours)
What is software?, Relation between Hardware and Software
Types of Software: System software: Operating System, Language Translators- Assembler,
Compiler & Interpreter
Application software: General Purpose Application Software, Customized Application
software.
Utility Software: Antivirus, Disk Defragmenter, Backup Software, Compression Software
Classification of software based on licence: Proprietary, Shareware, Freeware, Open source,
Free Software
Computer Languages-Machine Language, Assembly Language, High-Level Language
References
1. Fundamentals of Computers, V Rajaraman, Prentice-Hall of India, New Delhi.
2. Computer and Commonsense, Roger Hunt & John Shelley, PHI
3.
Computer Fundamentals, P K Sinha, BPB Publications, New Delhi.
4. Microsoft MS-DOS User's Guide & Reference.
5.
The Internet, Complete Reference, Harley Hahn, Tata Mcgraw-Hill.
6. Fundamentals of computers, E Balaguruswamy
104
Vocational Paper II: CA1VOT02 - OPERATING SYSTEM AND COMPUTER NETWORKS
Credits – 2
Scope: This course provides a basic knowledge about the role of Operating System in the
functioning of computers and potential of networks.
Prerequisites: Basic mathematics, Fundamentals of Computers.
Module I
Operating System organization and Scheduling: (10 hours)
Introduction to Operating Systems- Functions / Services provided by the Operating System
Types of Operating Systems: Batch Processing Systems, Multiprogramming / Multitasking
Operating Systems, Time Sharing / Multi User Operating Systems, Real Time Operating
Systems, Distributed Operating Systems, Networking Operating Systems.
Process Management: Process-Process States-Process State Diagrams- Process Control
Block-Process Scheduling-Schedulers-CPU Bound &Input/Output Bound Process-Context
Switch-Dispatcher-CPU Scheduling-Scheduling Criteria’s
CPU Scheduling Problems (6 hours)
First Come First Serve (FCFS)-Shortest Job First (SJF)-Priority Non Preemptive (P-NP)Shortest Remaining Time First (SRTF)-Priority Preemptive - Round Robin (RR)
Module II
Memory management: (8 hours)
Basic ideas-Memory Management requirements-Address Binding- Dynamic address space
binding -Fixed partition memory strategies-Variable partition memory strategies –Dynamic
Storage allocation problems: First Fit, Best Fit, Worst Fit, Next Fit- Fragmentation –
Swapping, Paging, Segmentation, Virtual memory - Page Replacement problems-FIFO,
LRU, Optimal Replacement
Disk Operating System: (4 hours)
Basics, Internal & External Commands- dir, chdir/cd, mkdir/md, rmdir/rd, copy, type,
rename/ren, del/erase, prompt, ver, date, path, cls, diskcopy, diskcomp, format, mem, more,
sys, tree, attrib, chkdsk
Module III
Computer Networks: (8 hours)
Concepts of Network –Network Criteria-Physical topology of networks-Mesh Topology-Star
Topology-Bus Topology-Ring Topology-hybrid Topology-Client Server Model- Peer-to105
Peer, Uses of networks. Categories of network-LAN, WAN, MAN, PAN –Protocols - ISOOSI and TCP/IP reference model
Hardware&Communication
Equipment’s–Network
Interface
Card
(Ethernet),
Modems, Switches, Routers, Repeaters, Gateways, Bridges, Concentrators.
Reference
1. Operating systems Gary Nutt 3rd Edn. Pearson.
3. Operating System Concepts, by Silbereschatz and Galvin
4. Operating System Concepts and design, by Milan Milenkovic
5. Computer Networking: A Top-Down Approach 5th Edition, by James F Kurose
6. Computer Networks- A system approach, by Peterson
7. Microsoft MS-DOS User's Guide & Reference.
106
Hubs,
Semester II
Vocational Paper III: CA2VOT03 - WORD AND DATA PROCESSING PACKAGES
Credits – 2
Scope: This course provides the basic knowledge of Word and data processing
Prerequisites: Basic Computer Knowledge.
Module I
MS Word : (12 hours)
Word Processing Package: MS-Word: Introduction; Features- Word User Interface Elements;
Creating new Documents; Basic editing, Saving a Document; Printing a Document; Print
Preview, Page orientation – Viewing Documents; Setting tabs- Page Margins; Indents; Ruler,
Formatting Techniques; Font Formatting, Paragraph Formatting; Page Setup; Headers &
Footers; Bullets & Numbered List; Borders & shadings; Find & Replace; Page Break & Page
Numbers; Mail Merging ; Spelling & Grammar Checking; Thesaurus; Automating
Documents; Macros; Tables- Side by Side & Nested Tables; Formatting Tables; Word Art,
E-mail editor
Module II
PageMaker (12 hours)
Desktop Publishing: PageMaker: Introduction to Desktop Publishing as a ProcessAdvantages of PageMaker- PageMaker User Interface Elements; Creating new Documents PageMaker Tools & Palettes-Master Pages- Page Setup, Page Orientation, Inserting Pages,
Removing Pages; Headers & Footers, Page Number -Working with objects- Type Styling
Options- Working with text-Formatting Options: Leading, Margins & indents- Scaling TextChanging Line Specifications, Changing Fill Specifications, Fill & Stroke-Paragraph
Formatting Options- Working with Grids-Creating Frames-Adding Graphics to a FrameLayers- Creating a new layer, moving an object to another layer, hiding layers, locking
layers, deleting layers
Module III
MS Excel: (12 hours)
Spreadsheet package: MS-Excel Introduction, Excel User interface, working with cell and
cell addresses, Selecting a range, Moving, Cutting, Copying & Paste, inserting & deleting
cells, freezing cells, adding deleting & copying worksheet within a workbook, Renaming a
worksheet. Cell formatting options-Formatting Fonts, Aligning, Wrapping and Rotating Text,
Using Borders, Boxes and Colors, Centering a heading, Changing row/column and
107
height/width, Formatting a work sheet automatically, Insert Comments, Clear contents in a
cell, using Print preview, Preparing worksheet for the printer, Selecting Print area, Margin
and Orientation, Centering a worksheet, Using header & Footer, inserting page breaks,
creating list, sorting data, Logical & Mathematical functions in excel, Linking data between
work sheets, pie chart, converting a pie chart on a webpage, Use of Pivot Tables
References
1. An Introduction to Business Data Processing, Sardino, Prentice Hall.Microsoft
Office 97, Ned Snell, PustakMahal, New Delhi.
2. Windows and MS Office 2000 with Database Concepts,N Krishnan, Scitech
Publications Pvt. Ltd, Chennai.
3. Adobe PageMaker 7.0 (Illustrated Series: Complete) by Kevin Proot.
4. Discovering Computers and Microsoft Office 2010: A Fundamental Combined
Approach (Shelly Cashman Series) by Gary B Shelly and Misty Vermaat
5. PageMaker(r) 7: The Complete Reference(Paperback) Carolyn Connally
6. PageMaker for macintosh and windows David D Busch BPB Publications.
108
Vocational Paper IV: CA2VOT04 - PROGRAMMING IN ANSI C
Credits – 2
Scope: This course provides a knowledge about C Programming
Prerequisites: Basic mathematics, basic computer knowledge.
Module I
Overview of C (3 hours)
Introduction, Simple C Program, Basic Structure of C program, Programming style,
executing a C program.
Constants, Variables, and Data Types. (3 hours)
Character set, C tokens, keywords and identifiers, Constants, Variables, Data type,
Declaration of variables, Assigning values to variables, Definingsymbolic constants.
Operators and Expressions. (6 hours)
Arithmetic, Relational, Logical, Assignment, Increment, Decrement, Conditional, Bit wise
and Special Operators.Arithmetic expressions.Evaluation of expressions, Precedence of
arithmetic operators.Type conversions in expressions. Operator precedence and associatively,
Mathematical functions.
Module II
Managing Input and Output Operators. (4 hours)
Reading a character, Writing a Character, Formatted input, and formatted output.
Decision making and branching. (4 hours)
Decision making with IF statement.Simple IF statement, The IF ELSE statement. Nesting of
IF ELSE statement, The ELSE IF ladder, and The Switch statement. The ?: operator, The
GOTO statement.
Decision making and looping. (4 hours)
The While statement, The DO statement, The FOR statement.Jumps in loops.
Module III
Arrays. (6 hours)
Introduction, One and two dimensional arrays, Initializingtwo-dimensional arrays,
Multidimensional arrays.
109
User-Defined Functions. (6 hours)
Need for user-defined functions. A multi-function program, the form of C function. Return
values and their types, Calling a function, Category of functions, No arguments and no return
values, Arguments but no return values, Arguments with return values, Handling of noninteger functions, Nesting of function, Recursion, Function with arrays, The scope and
lifetime of variables in functions
References:
1. Programming in ANCI C, by Balaguruswamy
2. Let Us C by Yashavant Kanetkar
3. Programming in ANSI C by Stephen G. KochanSams; Rev Sub edition (April 1994)
4. A First Book of ANSI C, Gary J. Bronson Course Technology
110
Semester III
Vocational Paper V: CA3VOT05 - CONCEPTS OF OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING
Credits – 3
No. of contact hours – 54
Scope: This course is expected to provide basic ideas of OOP and preliminary steps in C++
programming
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge, computer fundamentals and basic Mathematics.
Module I
Basic concepts in Object Oriented Methodology (8 hours)
Benefits; Finding Class & Objects, Characteristics of OOLanguages
C++ Programming Basics (9 hours)
Program construction, Input Output with cin&cout, Variables, Arithmetic Operators,
Assignment & Increment Operators, Relational Operators
Decisions &Loops (9hours)
if and if else statements for, while & do Loops, switch statement Conditional Operator,
Logical Operators Precedents of Operators Nested ifs
Module II
Structures (9 hours)
Structure specifiers & Definitions Accessing Structure Members Nested Structures,
Structures as Objects and Data Types, Enumerated Data Types,
Functions (9 hours)
Function Definitions and Declarations, Arguments and Return Values, Reference
Arguments, Overload Functions, Default Arguments, Storage Classes.
Module III
Objects & Classes (10 hours)
Member Functions And Data, Private and Public, Constructors and Distracters, Objects in the
real World, When to Use Objects.
Reference Books:
1. Object-Oriented Programming in Turbo C++, Robert Lafore, Galgotia.
2. Object-Oriented Programming with C++, E Balagurusamy, Tata McGraw-Hill.
3. The Essence Of Programming Using C++, Douglas Bell, Prentice-Hall.
4. Teach Yourself C++, Herbert Schildt, Tata McGraw-Hill.
5. Object-Oriented Programming with C++, by Yashavant Kanetkar
111
Vocational Paper VI: CA3VOT06 - C++ PROGRAMMING
Credits – 3
Scope: This course is expected to provide sound knowledge in C++ programming
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of computer fundamentals and basic mathematics
Module I
Arrays (9 hours)
Array Definitions, Accessing array Elements, Arrays as Class Members, Arrays of Objects,
Strings, String INPUT/OUTPUT.
The Operator Keyword (9 hours)
Overloading UNARY Operators, Overloading Binary Operators, Constructors as Conversion
Routines, Converting between Basic to User Defined Types, Converting between User
Defined Types to Basic Types
Module II
Inheritance (9 hours)
Reasons for Inheritance, Base and Derived Classes, Access Control, Class Hierarchies,
Multiple Inheritance, Inheritance and Program Development.
C++ Graphics (9 hours)
Text Mode Graphics, Setting up for Graphics Mode, Shapes, Lines, Color and Pattern,
Graphics Shapes as C++ Objects, Text in Graphics Mode
Module III
Pointers (9 hours)
Address Constants and Variables, Pointers and Arrays, Pointers and Function Arguments,
Pointers and Strings, Memory Management with new and delete, Pointers and Objects
Virtual Functions (9 hours)
Friend Functions, Static Functions, Overloaded assignment Operator, Overload copy
Constructor, The this Pointer.
Reference Books:
5. Object-Oriented Programming with C++, by Yashavant Kanetkar
112
Semester IV
Vocational Paper VII: CA4VOT07 - VISUAL BASIC PROGRAMMING
Credits – 3
Scope: This course is designed to provide basic ideas of VB programming
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of computer fundamentals and computer programming.
Module I
Introduction (12 hours)
VB Introduction-VB Developing Environment – VB Menu Bar –Toolbars –Project ExplorerTool Box-Form Designer-Form Layout.
Visual Basic Program Elements: Variables, Data Types, Scope and Lifetime of Variables,
Declaring and using Constants; Operators – Arithmetic Operators, Relational or Comparison
Operators, Logical operators; User Defined DataType, Arrays, Multidimentional Arrays,
Dynamic Arrays, Comments in VB.
Control Flow Statements- if ....then, if...then...else, select case ; Loop Statements- do loop,
for next, for each next; Input Box and Message Box functions
Using intrinsic controls (12 hours)
Pointer – Label – Frame – Check box – Combo box – Scroll Bar – Timer – Dir list box –
Shapes – Image – OLE – Picture box – Text box – Command button – Option button – List
box – Drive List Box-Directory List Box-File List Box-Shape Control & Line ControlHorizontal Scroll bar – Vertical Scroll Bar-Adding check box controls – Adding combo box–
Standard MDI form features – Building the MDI form.
Module II
Methods, Properties, and Events (12 hours)
Learn about properties and how to manage them – Discover how to call methods –Learn how
Visual Basic enables program to respond to events, System Events and User Events.
Debugging Window- Immediate Window, Locals Window, Watch Window, Quick Watch
Window, Call Stack Window, creating a toolbar in VB
113
Module III
Function and File Handling (12 hours)
Control Arrays, Procedures, Event Procedure, General Procedures-Sub Procedures,
Functions; Arguments to functions or sub procedures, Passing arguments by reference and
value, Optional arguments , Using named Arguments, Exiting Procedures, Event-Driven
Programming, String Functions
File Handling-File, Fileld, Records, Sequential Access Files, Opening and closing of
Sequential Access Files, Editing (Reading & Writing) Files opened for Sequential Access,
Random Access Files, Opening and closing of Random Access Files, Editing (Reading &
Writing) Files opened for Random Access, Deleting records in Random Access- Binary
Access Files, Opening and closing of Binary Access Files, Editing (Reading & Writing)
Files opened for Binary Access, Deleting records in Binary Access
Reference Books:
1. Visual Basic 6 - Clayton Walnum, Prentice- Hall of India, New Delhi.
2. Microsoft Visual Basic 6.0 Professional: Step by Step by by Halvorson
3. Visual Basic 6.0, N Krishnan and N Saravanan, Scitech Publications, Pvt Ltd,
Chennai.
4. Programming With Visual Basic 6.0 by M. Azam
114
Vocational Paper VIII: CA4VOT08 - COMPUTER WEB APPLICATIONS AND GRAPHICS
Credits – 3
Scope: This course is expected provide training in packages and its applications in web page
designing
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of computer fundamentals, basic mathematics and HTML
tags.
Module I
HTML & CSS (18 hours)
Basics of HTML:- Html tags, HTML Editors, HTML Documents, Heading Tags, Paragraph
Tags, Centring Contents, HTML Elements, frames element, marquee text
HTML Attributes:- lang, href, size, align, valign, bgcolor, background, width, height, title
HTML Text formatting elements, HTML comments, HTML Links, Anchor, HTML
elements, HTML Tables, HTML List, HTML Block elements, HTML head, HTML forms,
GET & POST Methods, Form Attributes, Organisation of HTML Document, Creating a
webpage using html, HTML editors (Microsoft Front page, dream weaver),Introduction to
HTML Web server (IIS - Internet Information Server, PWS - Personal Web Server).
CSS:- Basics, Syntax, CSS Comments, CSS Selectors, External style sheet, Internal style
sheet, Inline style, CSS Text
Module II
JavaScript (12 hours)
Basics, Static webpage, Dynamic webpage, Advantages & Limitations of JavaScript,
JavaScript Development Tools, External JavaScript, JavaScript Output, JavaScript
DataTypes, Variables and its scope,
JavaScript Reserved Words. JavaScript Operators,
Conditional Statements-if statement, if...else statement, if...else if... statement, Switch
statement, JavaScript Loops:- while loop, for loop, do-while loop, for-in loop, break &
continue statements- AJAX and its advantages
115
MODULE III
PHP& MYSQL (15 hours)
PHP:- Basics, include and require statements, syntax, variables, input, output, data types,
strings, constants, operators, Conditional Statements-if statement, if...else statement,
if...elseif...else statement, Switch statement, PHP Loops:- while loop, for loop, do-while loop,
foreach loop, break statement, functions, arrays, super globals, PHP sessions and cookies,
PHP file handling.
Implementing MYSQL using PHP:- Introduction, Database, opening a connection, closing a
connection, Create Database, drop database, select database, MYSQL Data types, tables,
Drop tables, insert, select tables, Where clause, update, delete records, Like clause, Order By,
Joins, alter, dropping adding or repositioning a column,
Web site development (Project) (9 hours)
Create a web site on a selected topic, with the help of the teachers and if possible host in on
any of the free web hosting services available
References
1. Learning Web Design 2nd Edition by Jennifer Niederst
2. DHTML and JavaScript by Gilorien
3. PHP and MySQL for Dynamic Web Sites: Visual QuickPro Guide by Larry Ullman
4. HTML & CSS: The Complete Reference, Fifth Edition by Thomas Powell
5. HTML and CSS: Design and Build Websites by Jon Duckett
6. PHP: The Complete Reference by Steven Holzner
7. Learning PHP, MySQL & JavaScript with j Query, CSS & HTML by Robin Nixon
116
VOCATIONAL SUBJECT COMPUTER APPLICATIONS PRACTICAL SYLLABUS
SEMESTER I& II
Vocational Practical 1
CA2VOP01: INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS & ANSI C PROGRAMMING
1. Introduction to various hardware components of a computer.
2. Preparation and printing of a simple document using DOS TEXT Editor.
3. Development of a batch file to copy all files from a source drive to a target drive.
4. Development of a batch file to copy all the files, directories and all hidden files (if any)
from one disk to another identical disk.
5. Development of a batch files to rename any existing directory by giving a new name with
all possible error messages.
6. Development of a batch file to create a directory named “Computer” and any two
subdirectories inside “Computer”
7. Windows Explorer is used to see all files, folders, create new folder, rename, copy, paste
and delete.
8. Working with system tools containing Compression agent, Diskdefragmenter,
DriveSpace and Scandisk.
9. Composing and sending an E-Mail message.
10. Find the sum and average of n numbers.
11. Obtain roots of a quadratic equation in all possible cases.
12. Program that reads a number from keyboard and then prints it in reverse case.
13. Program to compute x to the power n.
14. Program to find the largest and smallest element in an array.
15. Program to calculate the standard deviation of an array of values. The array elements are
read from terminal. Use function to calculate standard deviation and mean
16. Program to read the elements of two matrices of order n x n and to perform the matrix
multiplication.
17. Program to print the first n Fibonacci numbers using function.
18. Program to find the sum of the following seriesSum = x – x3/3! + x5/5! – x7/7! + . . . xn/n!. Where n and x are entered from the key
board.
19. Program that uses a function to sort an array of integers.
20. Program to check the given number is even or odd.
21. Program to find greatest of 3 number using if-else-if statement
117
SEMESTER III& IV
Vocational Practical II
CA4VOT01 - WORD AND DATA PROCESSING PACKAGES& VISUAL BASIC PROGRAMMING
1. Create a worksheet which contain Employee no, Emp. name, Salary, department,
Designation. Calculate the gross salary. Gross Salary = (Salary+HRA+DA) - PF. HRA =
50% of salary, DA = 30% of salary, PF = 10% of salary. Extract all employees who are
managers. Extract all the employees whose salary is between 2000 and 4000. List the
total salary and gross salary in each department.
2. Create the following work sheet. Marks of 4 subjects of 5 students and calculate the total
mark,Average mark,Result and Grade. Sort the total marks in the descending order. All
the numeric fields in the left alignment. Centralize the name of the Institute that you are
studying.
3. Create a work sheet for preparing merit list for B Sc admission in your college.
4. A company has types of employees. Create a work sheet and draw a pie chart using the
data's. Operator 60, Programmers 80, Analysts 20, Contractors 35, Company name is
HELLO.
5. Create two documents using MS WORD exactly the way they are seen.
6. Create a document and type 30 lines in it. Spell-check the document and create five
AutoCorrect entries on your own. Then create five Auto text entries. Print only the
current page of the document.
7. Create a file, inviting your friends to a dinner. Use the Mail Merge facility so that you do
not have to re-type the letter with their names and addresses.
8. Create two documents using PageMaker exactly the way they are seen.
9. Create two documents using PageMaker. Change its character width, indents, space
around paragraphs; add special characters, figures, tables etc.
10. Design a text book cover page with title and pictures using page maker.
11. Using a text box and a command button in the form, enter a number in the text box and
on clicking on command button display whether the number a single, two or three-digit
number in a message box.
12. Create a project to change the shape of a shape control at the interval of one second using
Timer control.
13. Create an event procedure to convert a text from lowercase to uppercase.
14. Create a function procedure to find simple interest.
15. Create a program to accept a number and print it in the reverse order.
16. Create a program to accept a set of numbers and find the largest and smallest number.
17. Create a program to count the number of vowels in a string and replace with ‘*’ symbol.
18. Create a program to check whether a given string is palindrome or not.
19. Create a function procedure to find Fibonacci series
20. Implement traffic system demonstration
118
Vocational Practical III
CA4VOP03: PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT AND TESTING USING OF C++
1. A program to find the sum and average of a given numbers.
2. Program to check the given number is prime or not
3. Obtain roots of a quadratic equation in all possible cases.
read from terminal. Use function to calculate standard deviation and mean.
5. A program to find sum of the following series using a function declaration. Sum x-(x3)/3!
+(x5)/5! - (xn)/n! where x and n are entered from the keyboard.
6. Program to find the sum of an integer array
7. Program to print the following pattern by using any loop. Range of star(*) must be
entered from keyboard.
*
**
***
8. A program to read a set of numbers from the keyboard and to find out the largest number
in the given array (the numbers are stored in a random order).
9. A class of n students takes an examination in m subjects, A program to read the marks
obtained by each student in various subjects and compute and print the total mark and
grade.
10. Program to find prime number between a range.
11. Program to print multiplication table of a given number
12. Program to read the elements of the given two matrices of order n x n and to perform the
matrix multiplication.
13. A program to perform simple arithmetic operations of two complex numbers using
operator overloading.
14. Create a class called employee that contains a name and an employee no: Create another
class called scientist that inherits the properties of employee and it contains the function
for entering the name of the award he gets and display it. Create objects for class scientist
that contain their name, no and the award they get. Implement single inheritance.
15. Declare a class to represent bank account of 10 customers and the following data
members: Name of the depositor, Account Number, Type of Account (S for Saving and C
119
for current Account), Balance Amount. The class also contains the following member
functions.
a) To initialize data members
b) To deposit money.
c) For withdrawal of money after checking the minimum balance (minimum balance is
Rs1000) d) To display the data members.
16. A program to concatenate using two strings into one string using a pointer method.
17. Stokes’ experiment for measurement of terminal velocity of an object falling freely in a
highly viscous medium.
18. Projectile motion: Assuming initial velocity and angle of projection, find out time of
flight, horizontal range, maximum height.
19. Convex lens: Assuming the values of ‘u’ and ‘v’, find out the focal length.
20. Conversion of Decimal to Binary and Binary to Decimal
21. Conversion of Decimal to Hexadecimal and Hexadecimal to Decimal.
22. Program to find given number is palindrome or not
120
17.3
B. Sc. Physics - Model III
1. ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
SEMESTER – I
EM1CRT01 - PRINCIPLES OF ELECTRONICS
Credits: 2
No. of contact hours: 54
MODULE – I
Switches, Cables and Connectors (Qualitative study only)
SPDT, DPDT, Band switches, Touch switches, Thumb Wheel switches, Micro switches –
specifications and application areas.
Batteries and Fuses
Dry cells, Lead acid accumulators, Nickel – Cadmium cells – Principles and specifications.
Fast and Slow fuses
Semiconductors
Intrinsic and Extrinsic, P-type and N-type, PN junction Diode and its characteristics Zener
diode, Photodiode, LED
LCR and Wave Shaping Circuits
Serial and Parallel response, Integrator and Differentiator using RC circuits, Clipper and
Clamper circuits, Rectifiers – Half and Full wave Filter circuits – Capacitor input, L - section
and π filter
MODULE – II
Transistors
PNP and NPN- Configurations, characteristics and constants, Phototransistors Transistor
Amplifiers – Biasing and stabilization, frequency response, Voltage regulators – Series,
Shunt and IC regulators
Oscillators
Feedback- Positive and Negative, LC and RC oscillators
MODULE – III
Power Amplifiers
Class A, Class B, Class AB, Class C transformer coupled
121
Push – pull amplifiers – Phase splitter circuit, complementary symmetry, thermal run away,
heat sink, power ratings of transistors, thermal resistance.
References:
1. Electronic Devices and Circuits – Allen Mottershed
2. Principles of Electronics – V K Mehta
3. Applied Electronics - R S Sedha
4. Linear Integrated Circuits – Roy Choudhury
5. Principles of Electronics and Linear circuits – N.N. Bhargava, D. C. Kulshreshtha,
S.C. Gupta, T.M.H. Publications.
122
EM1CRT02 - COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING (2 Credits)
MODULE – I
Modulation – Need of modulation, AM and FM modulation and demodulation principles,
DSB, SSB, DSBSC and Vestigial sideband transmission systems
Super Heterodyne Radio Receiver
Principles, advantages, block diagram, RF tuner, IF amplifier, detector, audio amplifiers, loud
speaker, power supply and voltage regulators, alignment of RF and IF sections, Waveforms
and voltages at different check point.
MODULE – II
Sampling reconstruction Aliasing PAM, PDM, PPM, Time Division Multiplexing, Noise in
Pulse Modulation, Base Band Digital Transmission, Digital Signals, Pulse Code Modulation,
Generation and Reconstruction, Quantization noise, Companding Law, Band Pass Digital
Transmission, Digital CW Modulation, ASK, FSK, PSK, DPSK.
MODULE – III
Monochrome Television System
Elements of television system – Picture and sound transmission and reception, Composite
Video Signal, Scanning process adopted in TV system, Sync details, channel bandwidth,
vestigial side band transmission.
Television Receiver
Receiving Antenna, RF tuner, VIF amplifiers, video amplifier, Video detector, SIF amplifier,
FM detector, Sweep section, keyed AGC, Delayed AGC, AFC, sync separator, SMPS
References:
1. Modern Electronic Communicating Theory and System – Ashok Raj
2. Video Demystified - Keith Jack, LLHT Technology Publishing
3. Electronic Communication - Dennis Roody and Coolen
4. Principles of Electronic Communication systems – Kennedy
5. Monochrome and colour television – R R Gulati
123
SEMESTER – II
EM2CRT03 - POWER ELECTRONICS
Credits: 2
MODULE I
Introduction – Concept of power electronics, Applications of power electronics, Advantages and
disadvantages of power electronic converters, power electronic systems, power semiconductor
devices, types of power electronic converters, power electronic modules.
MODULE II
Power transistors, Power MOSFETS, Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT), Power
semiconductor Diodes – Characteristics of power diodes, types of power diodes,
MODULE III
Thyristors; Terminal characteristics of thyristors, thyristor turn on methods, thyristor Gate
characteristics, Two – transistor model of a thyristor, thyristor ratings, other members of thyristor
family, Gate turn off (G.T.O) Thyristor, MOS controlled Thyristor (MCT)
References:
1. Modern Power Electronics – Dr. P.S. Bimbhara
2. Power Electronics Circuits Devices Application – M.H. Rashid
EM2CRT04 - ANALOGUE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
Credits: 2
MODULE I
Operational Amplifiers: Basic Differential Amplifier Analysis, Block Diagram Representation
of Typical OP-Amp., OP-Amp. Parameters, Inverting and non-inverting amplifier, Voltage
follower. OP-Amp. Circuits, , Differential Amplifier, Instrumentational Amplifier, Integrator,
Differentiator
MODULE II
Active Filters:Introduction:Simple circuits and Explanation of Lowpass, Highpass, Bandpass,
band reject and Allpass filters.
Waveform Generators: Sine wave generators, triangular wave generators.
MODULE III
555 timer – Astable, Monostable, VCO, - Basic comparators, Characteristic, Typical comparator
circuit using OP-Amp.
References:
1. OP-Amp and Linear IC’s – Gayakward
2. Integrated Circuits – Botkar
124
SEMESTER III
EM3CRT05 – MICROPROCESSORS AND ITS APPLICATIONS
Credits: 3
MODULE I
The 8085 Microprocessor
Block Diagram and functions, architecture of microprocessor, machine and assembly
languages, Instruction cycle, timing diagram, Memory Organization, Mapping and Types,
Types of Input Output (I/O), Addressing Memory Mapped I/O
MODULE II
Instruction set of 8085 μP
Arithmetic instructions, Logical instructions, data transfer instructions, branch instructions,
call and return instructions, stack, I/O and machine control instructions, Addressing modes
Straight line programmes, Mathematical programmes, branching programmes, looping
programmes, programmes using subroutine and time delay.
MODULE III
Programming Concept of 8085 μP
Introduction to Programmable Peripheral Devices (8255A, 8251A, 8253A, 8279A) function
of each chip.
Applications
Traffic control, Temperature control, Digital clock, stepper motor control, washing machine
control
References:
1. 0000 to 8085 – Gosh and Sridhar
2. Fundamentals of microprocessors and microcomputers – B Ram
3. Microprocessor architecture, programming and applications with the 8085 –
Gaonkar
4. Microprocessor and its applications – Nagurkani
125
EM3CRT06 - TROUBLE SHOOTING OF AUDIO EQUIPMENTS
Credits: 3
MODULE – I
Characteristic of Sound
Nature of sound, pressure and intensity of sound waves, sensitivity of human ear for sound,
frequency, overtone, harmonics, resonance of sound waves. Reflection and diffraction of
sound waves.
Audio Devices and Their Applications
Microphones – Different types, Loud Speakers – Characteristics, Different types, Basic
knowledge about speaker, enclosures, cross over network, multi way speaker system, woofer
and tweeter, consequence of mismatch between amplifier output and loudspeaker impedance,
Audio Amplifiers and Hifi systems, equalizers and tone controlled circuits.
MODULE – II
Digital Audio Fundamentals – Principle of ADC and DAC, optical recording of digital
audio on disc conversion technologies, EFM, error correction method, playback process of
digital audio from CD, comparison of CD and conventional (Gramophone) disc, audio as
data, compression and expansion of digital audio, channel coding, disc based recording,
digital audio broadcasting and networks, introduction Home Theatre systems such as 2.1, 4.1
and 5.1.
MODULE – III
Introduction to audio cd players, block diagram, transport mechanism, MP3 player, block
diagram assembling of MP3 player, different types of cables in audio industry, introduction
to remote controllers, troubleshooting of audio, cd , DVD player, MP3 player power supply
modules used in ACD/MP3/amplifiers. Troubleshooting of remote controllers, amplifiers and
Home Theatre systems.
References
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Modern Television Parctice with 4th Edition – RR Gulathi
Audio and Video systems 2nd edition – R.G. Gupta
Video de-mystified – Keith Jack
Audio Engineering know it all series – Newnes Press
Essential guide to digital video – John Watkinson Snell and Wilcox Inc Publications.
Guide to compression - Wilcox Inc Publications.
Audio Video Systems Principles practices and Troubleshooting – Bali and Bali,
Khanna publishing company.
126
SEMESTER – IV
EM4CRT07 - NETWORK THEORY
Credits: 3
MODULE – I
Signals, Periodic Wave Forms, Types of Signals, Fourier representation of Signals, Laplace
Transformation Properties, Inverse Transform. Voltage and Current – Sources – Dependent
Sources, Kirchhoff’s Law – Node and Mesh analysis, Superposition Theorem, Reciprocity
theorem.
MODULE – II
Thevenin’s, Norton, Power Transfer Theorems, Transient and Steady State Analysis –
Transient analysis of RC and RL circuits, Time Constant, Sinusoidal Study State Analysis,
Resistance, Impedance, Admittance, Millor Theorem, Analysis of RC and LC circuit.
MODULE – III
Two port networks, Short circuited admittance parameters, Open circuited impedance
parameters, hybrid parameters, Transmission parameters, Relationship between parameter
sets, Attenuator, Lattice type, Insertion loss, Network function – Poles and Zeros, Time
domain behavior from Pole Zero Plot.
References:
1. Networks and Systems - D. Roy Choudhury
2. Basic Circuit Theory - Desor
3. Network Analysis – Van Valkenberg
4. Network Lines and Fields – Ryder
5. Principles of Network Synthesis – Van Vakenberg
127
EM4CRT08 - TROUBLE SHOOTING OF VIDEO EQUIPMENTS
MODULE – I
Digital Video Compression Techniques and Standards, Digital Video, The RGB and YVB
representation of video signals, need for compression, how compression works, compression
format for video, MPEG – XH.26 format, DVD players and standards.
MODULE – II
DVD/ VCD player block diagram, transport mechanism, power supply and assembling of
VCD/DVD player with kit. Troubleshooting of DVD players, Introduction to Digital TV
transmission and Reception, Signal Quantizing encoding techniques
MODULE – III
Introduction to DTH, Video on demand, CCTV, LCD/LED TV, LCD technology, LCD
matrix type operation, Introduction to plasma TV, Comparison between LCD and Plasma
TV, Introduction to LED TV. Difference between LED backlit and backlit LCD displays.
References:
1. Modern Television Parctice with 4th Edition – RR Gulathi
2. Audio and Video systems 2nd edition – R.G. Gupta
3. Video de-mystified – Keith Jack
4. Audio Engineering know it all series – Newnes Press
5. Essential guide to digital video – John Watkinson Snell and Wilcox Inc
Publications.
6. Guide to compression - Wilcox Inc Publications.
7. Audio Video Systems Principles practices and Troubleshooting – Bali and Bali,
Khanna publishing company.
128
SEMESTER – V
EM5GET01 - IC TECHNOLOGY (Generic Elective - I)
Credits: 3 (Theory: 3)
MODULE – I
General Classification integrator circuits – Scale of integration of IC chips advantages. Thick
Film Technology – Features of hybrid IC technology – Thick film conductors, Dielectric and
Resistors – Thick Film Processing, Thick Film Substrates, Design Ideas, Advantages and
Applications. Thin Film Technology – Thin Film Conductor Material, Resistor Material,
Dielectric Material, Substrate Material, Thin Film Processing, Advantages and Applications.
MODULE – II
Monolithic Technology – Growth and Refining – Substrates slicing and polishing, epitaxial
growth, Oxidation Photo Lithography – Types - Diffusion Profiles, Ion Implantation,
Metallization, packaging, Bonding, Encapsulation,
MODULE – III
Planar Process- Bipolar, MOS and Bi-MOS Technologies, Fabrication of Transistor, Diodes,
Junction FET, MOS Transistor, PMOS, NMOS, structures, silicon gate MOS structure,
Monolithic resistors and capacitors.
References:
1. Integrated Circuits – K.R. Botkar.
2. Device Electronics for Integrated Circuits – Richard Muller.
3. Integrated Electronics – Milman and Halkias.
4. Microelectronics – Milman and Grabel.
129
EM5GET02: DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING (Generic Elective -II)
Credits: 3
Module I
Introduction
8 Hours
Discrete Time signals: Energy and Power signals, Exponential and sinusoidal
signals, periodicity, Impulse and step signals. Discrete Time systems: Properties: Linearity,
stability, causality, memory, invertibility time invariance. Representation of systems- impulse
response- convolution - Difference equation representation
Text book: Signals and Systems, Oppenheim and Wilsky, PHI
Transforms
12 Hours
. Frequency analysis of DT systems: Discrete Time Fourier Series Discrete Time Fourier
Transforms, Z-Transforms: Properties. Inverse Z- transform.
Text Book: Digital signal processing –Ramesh Babu
Module II
Analysis of Discrete Time System:
16 Hours
Discrete FIR and IIR Systems - Frequency response. Analysis of LTI systems System function. Recursive and non recursive systems - Block diagrams and signal flow
graphs - Realization of IIR filters - Direct from realization - cascade and parallel form
realization - realization of FIR filters- Transversal structure, Cascade form.
Text Book: Digital signal processing - Nagoorkani
Module III
Discrete Fourier Transform
8 Hours
Discrete Fourier series, Discrete Fourier Transform, computation of DFT. Propertieslinearity, periodicity, Time reversal, Complex conjugation, Convolution, circular
Convolution. Linear Convolution from Circular Convolution.
Text Book: 1.Digital signal processing –Nagoorkani
2. Digital signal processing- Suresh Babu
Module IV
10 Hours
Fast Fourier Transform:
FFT algorithms - General computational considerations - Decimation in Time and
Decimation in Frequency algorithms - Radix -2, FFT algorithms. Differences and similarities
between DIT and DIF Algorithms
Text books:
1. Digital signal processing - Nagoorkani
2. Digital signal processing - Ramesh Babu. Scietech publications
130
Text Books:
1.
Signals & systems, - Openheim & Wilsky, PHI/Pearson Education
2.
Digital signal processing - Ramesh Babu. Scietech publications
References
1. Discrete time signal processing- Oppenheim and Schafer- PHI
2. Digital signal processing: Principles, algorithms and application – John C, Proakis - PHI.
3. Signals and systems - Sanjay Sharma - Khotoria sons.
4. Digital signal processing - System Analysis and Design by Paulo SR Diniz, Eduardo AB,
Dasilva and Seigo L Netto by Ane Books.
5. Digital signal processing – V K Khanna, S.CHAND
131
EM5GET03: MICROCONTROLLERS AND EMBEDDED SYSTEMS (Generic Elective -III)
Credits: 3 (Theory: 3)
Module I (12 Hrs)
Introduction to Microcontrollers and Embedded Processors – Microcontrollers survey-four bit, eight
bit, sixteen bit, thirty two bit Microcontrollers --Comparing Microprocessors and MicrocontrollersOverview of the 8051 family
Module II (15 Hrs)
The 8051 Architecture- Hardware- Oscillator and clock-program counter –data pointer-registersstack and stack pointer-special function registers- -memory organization-program memory-data
memory -Input / Output Ports –External memorycounter and timer-serial data Input / outputInterrupts
Module III ( 27 Hrs)
8051 Assembly Language Programming-Structure of Assembly languageAssembling and running an
8051 program- Addressing modes-Accessing memory using various addressing modes- Instruction
set- Arithmetic operations and Programs-Logical operations and Programs -Jump and Call
instructions and Programs -I /O Pot Programs - Single bit instructions and Programs –Timer and
counter - and Programs
8051 Serial Communication -Connection to RS-232- Serial Communication Programming- Interrupts
Programming Module V 15 Hrs Microcontroller Interfacing -Key Board - Displays- Pulse
Measurement - D / A and A/D conversion- Stepper Motor- Module VI 5 Hrs Basic concept of PIC
microcontroller –Microcontroller Architecture – PIC16F Family
Text Books
1. The 8051 Microcontrollers and Embedded Systems : Muhammed Ali Mazidi
2. The 8051 Microcontrollers Architecture, Programming & Applications Kenneth J. Ayala
Reference
1. Design with PIC Microcontroller: John Petman
132
SEMESTER – VI
EM6CBT01 - COMPUTER HARDWARE AND NETWORKING (Choice Based Course -I)
Credits: 3 (3 hours)
MODULE I
Microprocessors – Basic concepts of Intel 80186, 80286, 80386, 80486 and Pentium
processors. Motherboard, Expansion buses, Memory, upgrading / adding memory, BIOS
Motherboard – removing, installing / configuring motherboards, BIOS set up,
troubleshooting memory.
MODULE II
Data storage devices, IDE and SCSI controllers, hard disk, installing / upgrading CD ROM
drives, DVD, Optical storage, Tape back – ups. Printers, Keyboards, pointing and positioning
devices, digital camera, Scanners, Monitors, Hard disks- installing / upgrading,
troubleshooting, formatting, Error codes, BIOS disk routines
MODULE III
Multimedia, Graphical accelerators, audio, modems, I/E add on, Networks, Power supplies,
UPS
Printer installation, Software installation – DOS, windows 95, 98, Linux, windows NT –
installation,
Administration, Installing PASCAL, C, ORACLE, VISUAL BASIC, Software diagnostics –
PC tools, Norton utilities, XT/AT diagnostics, Viruses and anti-viruses.
References:
1. IBM PC and CLONES- Hardware, troubleshooting and maintenance – B
Govindarajalu
2. PC Hardware, a beginners guide – Ron Gilster
3. All about Motherboard: - Manahar Lotia, Pradeep Nair
133
EM6CBT02: MODERN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS (Choice Based Course -II)
Credits: 3
Module 1.
Digital Communication Digital Modulation Techniques—Introduction—Pulse Code Modulation—
Sampling Theorem—Quantization—Quantization Noise—Encoding—Generation and Reception—
Noise in PCM Systems—Companding—DPCM—ADPCM--Delta Modulation—Digital Transmission
Techniques—ASK—FSK—PSK—QPSK— DPSK—MSK—Time Division Multiplexing and Digital
T1Carrier Systems.
Module 2.
Fiber Optics Communication Introduction--Total Internal Reflection-- Critical Angle and Acceptance
Angle-- Fiber Classification:- Step Index, Graded Index; Modes, Cutoff wave length—Absorption-Scattering Losses--Core and Cladding Losses--Signal Distortion in Optical Wave guides:- Information
capacity determination, Group delay, Material dispersion, Wave guide dispersion, Intermodal
distortion--Lencing schemes for coupling improvements- -Fiber endface preparation--Fiber Splicing-Optical fiber connectors.
Module 3.
Mobile Communication Evolution of Mobile Communication—Mobile Radio System Around the
World— Cordless Telephone System—Cellular Telephone System—How a Cellular Telephone Call is
Made—Trends in Cellular Radio Communications—2G,2.5G and 3G Cellular Networks—WLL and
WLAN—The Cellular Concept—Frequency Reuse—Channel Assignment Strategies—Handoff
Strategies—Interference and System Capacity— Improving Coverage and Capacity in Cellular
Systems—Propagation Problems:-Path Losses, Multipath Fading—Multiple Access Techniques:FDMA,TDMA,CDMA,SDMA.
Text Books
1. Electronics Communication Systems by Wayne Thomasi, Pearson Publication, 5 th Edition,
(Module-1).
2. Optical Fibre Communications by Gerd Keiser(Module-2).
3. Wireless Communication Principles and Practice by Theodore S Rappaport, Person Publication,
2nd Edition, (Module-3).
Reference Text Books
1. Electronic Communications by Roody/Coolen, ,Pearson Publication,4th edition.
2. Satellite Communications by Dennis Roddy,Mc Graw Hill Publication,3rd edition.
3. Introductions to RADAR Systems by Skolnik, McGraw Hill, 3rd edition
134
EM6CBT03: ADVANCED NETWORKS AND SYSTEMS (Choice Based Course -III)
Credits: 3
Module I
‘e ie of asi ir uit o epts Cir uit ele e ts a d Kir hoff s la s, ‘e ie of et ork theore s“uperpositio Theore , “u stitutio Theore , Co pe satio Theore , The e i s, Norto s,
Mill a s, Ma i u Po er Tra sfer theore , ‘e ipro it Theore .
Module II
Properties of Signals and Systems. Characteristics of signals- Unit step function, Impulse and Ramp
functions. Linearity-Time invariance, Stability and Causality- Special properties of Linear Time
Invariant systems- Relation between Transfer function and impulse response- Network functionsPoles and Zeros- Pole-zero plot. Electrical systems- Mechanical systems- D ALEMBE‘T “ Pri ipleAnalogy systems- Force voltage analogy- Force current analogy.
Module III
Laplace and Fourier Transform Analysis Network Analysis using Laplace Transform- Laplace
transformation- Inverse Laplace Transformation- Important theorems regarding Laplace
Transformation- Applications of Laplace Transformation in analyzing simple series and parallel
networks (RL, RC and RLC circuits)- Laplace and Fourier Transforms of different signal waveforms.
Passive network synthesis Hurwitz polynomials- Positive real functions- Synthesis of RL, LC and RC
networks by Ist and IInd Foster and Couer methods.
Text Books
1. Network and systems, ROY CHOUDHARY
2. Network Analysis, G.K MITHAL
3. Circuits and Networks, A. Sudhakar,SHYAM MOHAN
4. Basic Circuit Theory, DESOR,KUO
5. Network Analysis, VAN VALKENBERG
6. Network Lines and Fields, RYDER
7. Principle of Network Synthesis, , VAN VALKENBERG
135
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE – SYLLABUS FOR PRACTICALS
SEMESTER 1 & 2
Core 2 Practical 1: EM2CEP01
(Credit 2)
(Minimum 16 Experiments)
1. Diode characteristics – PN junction diode & Zener diode.
2. Integrator and differentiator using RC circuit.
3. Clipper and clamper circuits.
4. Single stage & two stage RC coupled amplifier – comparison of gain and bandwidth
5. Oscillators – RC phase shift, Wein bridge, Hartley & Colpitts
6. Multivibrators – Astable & Monostable
7. Rectifiers – half wave & full wave (ripple factors with and without filters)
8. Transistor characteristics – CB & CE
9. Power amplifier
10. JFET Characteristics
11. UJT Characteristics
12. MOSFET characteristics
13. SCR characteristics
14. Triac characteristics
15. AM generation and detection
16. Frequency modulation and demodulation using 565 PLL
17. AGC generation using IC
18. IF tuned amplifier
136
SEMESTER 3&4
Core 2 Practical 2: EM4CRP02
(Credit 2)
1. Block transfer of data bytes
2. Largest among a set of numbers
3. Smallest among a set of numbers
4. Addition with carry
5. BCD addition and subtraction
6. Binary multiplication
7. Counting the number of occurrence
8. Sorting in ascending / descending order
9. Decimal counter to count 00 to 99
10. Study of Multimeter (Analog and Digital)
11. Study and familiarization of passive components
• General purpose resistor
• Precision resistor
• Wire wound resistor
• Ceramic encased resistors
• Capacitors (non electrolyte, electrolyte, colour coded)
• Inductors (general purpose, colour coded)
• Surface Mount Devices (SMD)
12. Study of electrical components
• Transformers (low power and power)
• Basics of house wiring
• Electrical relays
• Mechanical switches
• Familiarization of electrical home appliances
13. Study of semiconductor devices - Diodes, Transistors, FETs
14. Practicing different types of soldering works
15. Familiarization of tools in lab and workshops
16. How to draw schematic diagrams
17. Assembling practice on various media
• On bread board
• On PC type bread board
• On Printed circuit board
18. Fabrication of PCB
19. Power supply – assembling and fault finding
• Unregulated
• Regulated (Shunt)
• Series regulated (transistorized)
• Series regulator (IC version)
20. Assembling of regulated variable power pack
21. Assembling and fault finding of SMPS
137
SEMESTER 3 &4
Core 2 Practical 3: EM4CRP03
(Credit 2)
1. Operational amplifier and its characteristics
2. OP-Amp Inverter, Non - Inverter
3. OP-Amp Buffer or Voltage Follower
4. OP-Amp Adder & Subtractor
5. Integrator & Differentiator
6. Astable Multi Vibrator – 555
7. Monostable Multi Vibrator – 555
8. Schmitt Trigger
9. Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO)using 555
10. High pass Filter & Low pass Filter
11. Assembling and fault finding of tape recorders
12. Assembling and fault finding of power amplifiers
13. Assembling and fault finding of home theatre system
14. Fault finding of TV power supply (SMPS)
15. Assembling and fault finding of VCD
16. Assembling and fault finding of DVD
17. Assembling and fault finding of LCD TV
18. Assembling and fault finding of MP3 player
19. Fault finding of IR remote controller in VCD, DVD or Home Theaters
20. Fault finding of SMPS in VCD, DVD, Home Theatres
138
COMPUTER APPLICATION (Complimentary courses for B. Sc. Physics EEM)
Semester 1
CA1CMT01: Computer Fundamentals
Credit: 2
Module: 1
Basic concepts – characteristics and evolution of computer- Computer generation- Basic
computer organization- I/O unit- storage unit- ALU, CU- CPU.
Module:2
Number Systems: Decimal Number System, Binary Number System, Octal Number
System,Hexadecimal Number System. Converting from one number system to another
number system
Computer arithmetic: Binary Addition, Subtraction, Division & Multiplication - Hexadecimal
Addition &Subtraction - Octal Addition & Subtraction - BCD Addition
Module: 3
Input devices: Different types of Keyboards, Mouse’s &it’s working, Joystick,
Trackball,Scanner: Flat bed, Sheet-fed and Hand-held scanners, Light Pen
Output devices: Monitor, Plotters, Audio output devices, Printers – Working of Dot Matrix,
Laser, Inkjet, Colour Thermal printer.
Storage units: Primary Memory-RAM, ROM, PROM, EPROM and EEPROM, Cache
Memory, Secondary Memory-Magnetic storage devices, Optical storage devices, Working of
Hard Disk & Floppy Disk
Reference
2. Computer and Commonsense, Roger Hunt & John Shelley, PHI
3. Computer Fundamentals, P K Sinha, BPB Publications, New Delhi.
4. Fundamentals of computers, E Balaguruswamy
139
Semester 2
CA2CMT02: Object Oriented Programming C++
Credit: 2
Module: 1
C++ programming basics- variables-Reference variables- Data Types-Built in dataypes, user
defined datatypes, derived datatypes. Operators-.
Module: 2
Function- Parameter passing and return values, function overloading, Friend function,
Storage classes.
Module: 3
Object and class, Members of a class, constructor- default, parameter, copy. Destructor.
Reference Books:
Semester 3
CA3CMT03: Java Programming Language
Credit: 3
Module: 1
Introduction to java- Features of java – Object oriented programming- Principles of OOPCreation of java programme.
Module: 2
Data types, variables and arrays – One dimensional, Multidimensional arrays.
Operators – Arithmetic, Bitwise, Relational, Boolean and assignment operators – Operator
precedence.
Module: 3
Control statements – if – switch – iteration statements – jump statements.
Introduction to class – class fundamentals – introducing methods – constructors – this
keyword – finalize () method. Overloading methods – Recursion – Introducing nested and
inner classes.
References:
1. The complete reference. – Naughton and Schildt.
2. JavaTM How to program, Seventh edition P.J Deitel – Deitel & Associates, Inc.;
H.M. Deitel – Deitel & Associates, Inc. Prentice Hall.
140
Semester 4
CA4CMT04: The Java Library
Credit: 3
No. of contacts hours: 54
Module: 1
Introduction to inheritance – Inheritance basics – Using Super Method overriding – Using
abstract class – Using final, Packages and interfaces – Defining packages – Access protection
– Importing packages – Interfaces.
Module: 2
Exception Handling – Fundamentals – Exception types – Using try and catch – throw –
throws – finally. Multithreaded programming, thread model – thread priorities –
synchronization.
Module: 1
Applet – Applet class – Architecture – Skeleton – Mothods – HTML tag – The audio clip
reference – applet stub interface – Introducing AWT – Working with windows.
References:
1. The complete reference. – Naughton and Schildt.
2. JavaTM How to program, Seventh edition P.J Deitel – Deitel & Associates, Inc.;
141
COMPUTER APPLICATIONS (For EEM)- PRACTICAL SYLLABUS
(Minimum 16 experiments in each course)
SEMESTER 1&2
Complementary Practical I: CA2CMP01
1. WAP to print ‘n’ Fibonacci series.
2. WAP to check whether the given number is Palindrome or not.
3. WAP to check whether the given number is prime or not.
4. WAP to find the greatest and smallest numbers.
5. WAP to accept a binary number and find its decimal.
6. WAP to accept a decimal number and find its binary.
7. A program to read the marks obtained in various subjects by each student in a class of n
students taking examination in m subjects, and to compute and print the total mark and
grade.
9. WAP to find the product of two numbers.
10. WAP to arrange the numbers is ascending order.
11. WAP to find the roots of a quadratic equation.
12. WAP for finding the area of different shapes (triangle, rectangle, circle) using function
overloading.
13. WAP to accept a particular student, Roll No., Name & 3 marks and find total and average
marks and print the details using class.
14. Write a program to accept data members, account number, name & balance and member
functions to input values and display information.
15. Stokes’ experiment for measurement of Terminal velocity of an object falling freely in a
highly viscous medium.
16. Projectile motion: Assuming initial velocity and angle of projection, find out time of
flight, horizontal range, Maximum height.
17. Convex lens: Assuming the values of ‘u’ and ‘v’, find out the focal length.
18. I-d curve: Assuming values of ‘I’ and ‘d’, find out the angle of minimum deviation and
hence the refractive index.
19. A program to concatenate using two strings into one string using a pointer method.
142
SEMESTER 3&4
Complementary Practical Ii: CA4CMP02
1. WAP to find the factorial of a number.
2. WAP to find the reverse of a given number.
3. WAP to find the multiples of 7 less than 100.
4. WAP to find the sum of digits of a number
5. WAP to Conversion of Decimal to Binary and Binary to Decimal
6. WAP to Conversion of Decimal to Hexadecimal and Hexadecimal to Decimal.
7. WAP to program to find the sum and average of a given numbers.
8. WAP to obtain roots of a quadratic equation in all possible cases.
9. WAP to read a set of numbers from the keyboard and to find out the largest number in the
given array (the numbers are stored in a random order).
10. WAP to read a string and print the reverse string.
11. WAP to check whether the given string is palindrome or not.
12. WAP to sort a list of numbers in descending order.
13. WAP to get the following output.
*
**
***
14. WAP to calculate the standard deviation of an array of values. The array elements are
15. WAP to read the elements of the given two matrices of order n x n and to perform the
matrix multiplication.
16. Program to print the first n Fibonacci numbers using function.
17. Program to find the sum of the following series using a function declaration. Sum = x1 –
x3/3! + x5/5! – x7/7! + . . . xn/n!. Where n and x are entered from the keyboard.
18. WAP that uses a function to sort an array of integers.
143
2. INSTRUMENTATION
Semester I
IN1CRT01-Basics of Mechanical Engineering
Credits – 2
Contact hours-54
Module I (10 hrs)
Familiarization with tools
Handheld tools- measuring tape, hammer, screw driver, pliers, chisels, hack saw, vice, centre
punch, mallet, try square, wrenches, scribers, spanners.
Automatic Power tools- power drill, power screw drivers. (brief explanation of each Tool
with figures and application.)
Primary shaping processes
Casting, forging, Rolling, bending, drawing, squeezing simple definition of, extruding,
shearing, forming, piercing, spinning, crushing (casting only in detail, only brief explanation
of each and their objectives)
Module II (14 hrs)
Machining Processes
Joining, shaping, slotting, planning, Drilling, Milling, Lathe operations (Brief explanation of
each. Lathe – its parts operations only in detail)
Surface finishing processes: Polishing, electro- plating, metal spraying, anodizing,
galvanizing, painting (simple definition and use and advantages)
Joining processes: Welding, soldering, brazing, riveting, sintering, adhesive joining,
screwing, pressing (simple description, uses and advantages)
Module III (20 hrs)
Power transmission: Introduction, belt drive, flat belt, V-belt, round belts, open belt drive,
cross belt drive, velocity ratio, slip, belt materials, length of belt, ratio of tensions, power
transmitted by a belt, ( basic description, use and advantage)
Rope drive: Application, fiber rope and wire ropes, materials (basic description, use and
advantages)
Chain drive: Application, driving or power transmission chain, crane chains, pulling chains,
roller chains, silent chain (basic description, use and advantages)
Gear drive: Introduction, gear terminology, spur gear, helical gear, bevel gear, worm gear,
rack and pinion, gear train, velocity ratio (basic description, use and advantages)
Shaft coupling: Introduction, rigid couplings, flexible couplings, disengaging couplings, non
aligned coupling (simple description and uses)
Bearings: Introduction, sliding contact bearing, rolling contact bearings, ball bearings, roller
bearings, contact bearings (simple description and uses)
144
Clutches: Introduction, mechanical clutch, electromagnetic fluid and power clutch, fluid
Clutch (simple description and uses)
Module IV (10 hrs)
Standard of measurements: Standard of length, end standards, vernier calipers, inside,
depth, and height gauges, fixed gauges- gauge block, end bars, slip gauges, surface plates,
micrometers. Angular measurements-sine bar, angle gauges, levels, clinometers, taper
gauges.
Reference:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Basic mechanical engineering – R.K. Rajput, Laxmi Publications
Basic mechanical engineering – J. Benjamin
Work shop technology - R.S.Khurmi,J.K.Gupta, S.Chand publishers
Machine design - P. C. Sharma, D.K.Aggarwal, Katson books
Elements of precision engineering --- R.Raman,Oxford & IBH Pubishing, New Delhi
Engineering Metrology- R.K.Jain, Khanna Publishers
145
IN1CRT02 - Basic Instrumentation
Credits 2
Contact hours - 54
Module I (15 hrs)
Basics of Instrumentation, static and dynamic characteristics, errors, measurement and units,
applications of measurement instrumentation (basic idea and definition of terms and
principle).
Functional elements of Instrument, Transducers (active and passive), Null and deflection
methods (basic idea and definition of terms and principle).
Classification of instruments (absolute, secondary) (basic idea and definition of terms and
principle).
Module II (15 hrs)
A.C. fundamentals- sinusoidal and non-sinusoidal waves, terminology, different parameters
(amplitude, rise time fall time etc..) (basic Idea and definition of terms and principle)
D.C. fundamentals (basic idea and definition of terms and principle)
A. C. circuits, A.C. through R, L, C , RL, RC, RLC , resonance , tuned Amplifiers (basic idea
and definition of terms and principle)
Module III (12 hrs)
Electromechanical indicating instruments, Galvanometers (D’Arsonaval), analog Ammeters
& voltmeters, moving iron instruments, watt meters, energy meter(principle, working and
construction)
Bridge circuits- D.C. bridges – Wheatstone’s bridge, Kelvin bridge, A.C. bridges- Wein
bridge, Maxwell bridge (principle, working and construction)
Module IV (12 hrs)
Network fundamentals, Kirchhoff’s voltage and current laws, thevenin’s voltage and current
laws (Basic concepts and simple problems).
Magnetism (Basic concepts and terms).
Reference Books:
A Course in Electrical and electronics Measurements and Instrumentation – A. K.
Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney, Dhanpat Rai & Co
2. Measurement Systems: Application and Designs – Ernest O Doebelin, Mc Graw Hill
3. Circuits and networks: Analysis and synthesis – A Sudhakar, Shyammohan S Palli, Mc
Graw Hill
4. Basic Electrical Engineering – For first year BTech Degree Course, MA College of
Engineering, Kothamangalam.
1.
146
Semester II
IN2CRT03 - Basic Measurements
Credits –2
Contact hours-54
Module I (16 hrs)
Displacement: Definition, measurements method- resistance strain gauge, LVDT, capacitive
(principle, construction and working, advantages and disadvantages)
Force: Definition, measurements method- hydraulic force meter, pneumatic force meter,
proving ring, strain gauge load cell (principle, construction and working, advantages and
disadvantages)
Torque: Definition, measurement methods- In-line rotating torque sensor, In-line stationary
torque sensor, proximity torque sensors (principle, construction and working, advantages and
disadvantages)
Module II (13 hrs)
Speed: Definition, measurement methods- revolution counter, stroboscope, resonance
tachometer, tachometer generators, photoelectric tachometer (principle, construction and
working, advantages and disadvantages)
Dimension: Thickness- Introduction, contact type thickness measurement- contact type
thickness gauge, ultrasonic vibration method, non-contact type- capacitance thickness gauge,
radiation thickness gauge (principle, construction and working, advantages and
disadvantages)
Industrial weighing: Introduction, pneumatic load cell, strain gage cell(principle,
construction and working, advantages and disadvantages
Module III (13 hrs)
Density: Introduction, definition, solid density measurement, liquid density measurement,
gas density measurement, hydrostatic weighing densitometer, vibrating tube densitometer
(principle, construction and working, advantages and disadvantages)
Viscosity: Introduction, capillary viscometers, industrial viscometers (principle, construction
and working, advantages and disadvantages)
Humidity: Introduction, principle, hygrometer (principle, construction and working,
advantages and disadvantages)
Module IV (12 hrs)
Acceleration: Introduction, accelerometers (principle, construction and working, advantages
and disadvantages)
Specific gravity: Introduction, hydrometer (principle, construction and working, advantages
and disadvantages)
Conductivity: Introduction, definition, measuring instruments (principle, construction and
147
Reference Books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Process/Industrial Instruments and Controls Handbook – Gregory K. McMillan,
Douglas M. Considine, Mc Graw Hill
A Course in Electrical and electronics Measurements and Instrumentation –
A.K.Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney, Dhanpat Rai & Co.
A Course in Mechanical Measurements and Instrumentation & Control – A.K.
Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney, Dhanpat Rai & Co.
Industrial Instrumentation and control – S.K.Singh, Mc Graw Hill
148
IN2CRT04 - Industrial Instrumentation 1
Credits: 2
Contact hours - 54
Module I (11 hrs)
Pressure: Definition, units, unit conversions, different types of pressure (basic idea only)
Pressure measurement- barometer, dead weight pressure gauge, bourden tube, manometers,
bellows, diaphragm, pressure switches (principle, construction and working, advantages and
disadvantages)
Module II (11 hrs)
Vacuum: Definition, different ranges of vacuum (basic idea)
Fundamentals, gas flow mechanisms, gas laws, conductance calculation, concept of
throughput and pumping speed (basic principle and definitions)
Module III (19 hrs)
Vacuum measurement and applications: Vacuum measuring instruments- thermal
conductivity gauges, ionization gauges, pirani gauge, Mc Leo gauge(principle,
construction and working, advantages and disadvantages)
Pumps- rotary pumps, root blowers (principle, construction and working, advantages and
disadvantages)
Application of vacuum –freeze drying, sputtering process, thin film deposition technique.
Module IV (13 hrs)
Temperature: Definition, units, unit conversions (basic idea only)
Temperature measurement-thermometer, filled system thermometers, bimetallic, RTD,
thermistor, thermocouple, pyrometer, temperature switches (principle, construction and
Reference Books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Process/Industrial Instruments and Controls Handbook – Gregory K. McMillan, Douglas
M. Considine, Mc Graw Hill
A Course in Electrical and electronics Measurements and Instrumentation – A.K.
A Course in Mechanical Measurements and Instrumentation & Control – A.K. Sawhney,
Puneet Sawhney, Dhanpat Rai & Co.
Measurement Systems: Application and Designs – Ernest O Doebelin, Mc Graw Hill
149
Semester III
IN3CRT05 - Industrial Instrumentation II
Credits- 3
Contact hours - 54
Module I: Level (9 hrs)
Definition, units, Sight glass method, pressure gauge, purge system, buoyancy method, float
and displacement, capacitive method, ultrasonic method (principle, construction and
working, advantages, disadvantages)
Module II: Flow (13 hrs)
Definition, units, Flow characteristics, flow measuring technique, flow measurement
methods, 150enture, flow nozzle, orifice, pitot tube, rotameters, electromagnetic flow meter
(principle, construction and working, advantages, disadvantages)
Module III (16 hrs)
pH: Definition, types of electrodes, glass electrode pH measurement, application in
Chemical industries (principle, construction and working, advantages, disadvantages)
Smart sensors: Block diagram- Smart transmitter, Recent trends in sensor technology,
Semiconductor sensors, Film sensors, MEMS, Nanosensors (principle, construction and
working, advantages, disadvantages)
Module IV (16 hrs)
Vibration: Nature of vibration, quantities involved in vibration measurements, seismic
transducers (principle, construction and working, advantages, disadvantages)
Detectors: Smoke detectors, LPG detectors, Chlorine detectors, SPM, Dissolved oxygen
meters, CO analyzers(principle, construction and working)
Reference Books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney,Dhanpat Rai & Co.
A Course in Mechanical Measurements and Instrumentation & Control – A.K. Sawhney,
Puneet Sawhney, Dhanpat Rai & Co.
150
IN3CRT06 - Transducers and Signal Conditioners
Credits-3
Contact hours - 54
Module I: Transducers (16 hrs)
Transducers and classification (only basic idea)
Transfer function, dynamic response- zero, first, second order, standard input signals (only
basic idea)
Module II: Signal conditioners (18 hrs)
Rectifiers, bridge circuits (A.C. and D.C. bridges),active and passive filters, instrumentation
amplifiers, ADC, DAC.
Inverting and non-inverting amplifiers, voltage follower, adder, subtractor, differentiator,
integrator, comparator, sample and hold circuits, voltage to current, current to voltage.
Modulation, need of modulation, types. (only basic idea)
Module III: Display devices (8 hrs)
Seven segment, dot matrix, CRT, LED, LCD (principle, construction and working,
advantages and disadvantages)
Module IV: Recording devices (12 hrs)
Strip chart recorders, LVDT recorders, circular chart recorders, XY recorders, Magnetic
recorders, recorder selection for particular application, objectives and requirements of
recording data.
Printers- dot matrix, inkjet printers, laser printers
Reference Books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A Course in Mechanical Measurements And Instrumentation & Control – A. K.
Op-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits – Ramakant A. Gayakwad , PHI
151
Semester IV
IN4CRT07 - Microprocessors and Microcontrollers
Credits-3
Contact hours - 54
Module I: Introduction to 8085 Architecture (17 hrs)
Block diagram, Address Bus, Control Bus, Data Bus, Need to multiplex address and data bus.
Memory organization, Control and timing unit. ALU details. Registers, Flags, memory
mapped I/O and I/O mapped I/O.
Instruction set of 8085- addressing modes, Intel 8085 instructions.
Module II: Microprocessor 8086 (14 hrs)
Register organization of 8086, architecture.
Signal description of 8086, physical memory organization, machine language instruction
formats.
Module III (12 hrs)
Addressing modes of 8086, instruction set of 8086, assembler directives and operators.
Basic programs (addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, perfect square root),
introduction top stack, interrupts and interrupt service routines, macros, timing and delays.
Module IV: Microcontrollers (11 hrs)
Microprocessors and microcontrollers, Basic functional blocks of a microcontroller, Intel
8051 microcontroller, pins and signals of 8051, architecture of 8051.
Programming mode of 8051, instruction set of 8051 – machine cycles and timing diagram,
addressing modes, classification of 8051 instructions, data transfer instructions, arithmetic
instructions, logical instructions, program branching instructions, Boolean variable
instructions
Reference Books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Microprocessors & Microcontrollers – A. Nagoor Kani, RBA publications
Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Applications – Gaonkar
Microprocessors’s and Applications – Mathur
Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals – A.K. Ray, K.M. Bhurchandi, Mc Graw Hill
152
IN4CRT08 - Industrial Automation
Credits-3
Contact hours - 54
Module I (15 hrs)
Introduction to computer control of process- need for computers in control system –block
diagram of a computer control system.
Introduction to Industrial Automation, Role of automation in industries, Introduction to the
types of manufacturing industries, Introduction to type of automation system, Benefits of
automation. Introduction to Automation pyramid, Introduction to automation tools like PAC,
PLC, SCADA, DCS.
Module II: Programmable logic controller basics (11 hrs)
Overview of PLC systems, parts of PLC, Input/Output modules, power supplies and isolators,
Fundamental PLC wiring diagram, relays, switches, transducers, sensors.
Fundamentals of logic – Program scan – Relay logic – PLC programming languages – timers
– counters – math instructions – data manipulation instructions – requirement of
communication networks for PLC – connecting PLC to computer.
Module III: SCADA (14 hrs)
Definition – elements of SCADA system – history of SCADA, architecture, basic
explanations.
Remote terminal unit (RTU), discrete control, analog control, master terminal unit (MTU),
operator interface.
Module IV: Distributed Control System Basics (14 hrs)
DCS introduction, Various function Blocks, DCS components/block diagram, DCS
Architecture of different makes, comparison of these architectures with automation pyramid.
DCS specification, latest trend and developments, DCS support to Enterprise Resources
Planning (ERP), performance criteria for DCS and other automation tools.
Reference Books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
The management of control system: Justification and Technical Auditing - N.E. Bhttiha,
ISA
Computer aided process control - S.K.Singh, PHI.
Understanding Distributed Process Systems for Control - Samuel Herb, ISA.
Programmable Logic Controllers: Principles and Applications - Webb &Reis, PHI.
Introduction to Programmable Logic Controllers - Garry Dunning, Thomson Learning.
Distributed computer control for industrial automation - Ppovik Bhatkar, Dekkar Pub.
Computer Based Process control - Krishna Kant, PHI
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition – Stuart Boyer A, Second Edition, ISA
153
Semester V
IN5GET01: DIGITAL ELECTRONICS (Generic Elective I)
Credit – 3
Contact Hours - 54
Module I
Number systems
(9 hours)
Different number systems- decimal, binary, octal and hexadecimal-conversion between
different systems. Binary arithmetic addition, subtraction and multiplication. 1’s and β’s
complement subtraction –signed binary numbers. Signed binary arithmetic. BCD code,
ASCII code.
Digital Gates
(5 hours)
AND, OR and NOT Gates. NAND and NOR Gates - Universal Gates. Implementation of
combinational logic. XOR and XNOR Gates
Text Book: Digital fundamentals, Thomas L. Floyed -Chapter 2, 3and 5
Module II
Boolean algebra and logic gates
(10 hours)
Rules and Laws of Boolean algebra. Duality theorem -De Morgan's Theorems. analysis and
simplification of logic circuits. Boolean equation and truth table - SOP and POS. Minterms
and Maxterms. Standard SOP and Standard POS- Conversion between Standard SOP &
Standard POS. Karnaugh Map.(up to four variable). K map SOP minimization.
Text Book: Digital fundamentals, Thomas L. Floyed - Chapter 4
Text Book: Digital electronics, S Salivahanan and S Arivazhagan -Chapter 2
Module III
Combinational logic
(10
hours)
Half Adder and Full Adder, Half and Full subtractor, 4-bit parallel Adder/Subtractor.
Shift method multiplier, binary divder, Multiplexer, De-multiplexer, Encoder & Decoder.
Text Book: Digital electronics, S Salivahanan and S Arivazhagan - Chapter 4 and 5
Module IV
Sequential logic
(20 hours)
Flip-flops, RS, Clocked RS, Master Slave JK FF, DFF JK, T Flip-flop, Buffer registers- Shift
register- Counters- Binary ripple counter- BCD ripple counter- synchronous binary counterDecade counter.
Text Book:Digital design, M Morris Mano- Chapter 6
D/A converters (Ladder type), A/D Converter (Counter type).
Text Book: Digital principles and applications- Malvino, Leach and Saha-Chapter 13.
154
References:
5. Digital logic and computer design - M Morris Mano, PHI
6. Digital Electronics- William H Gothmann, PHI
7. Digital circuits and design- S Salivahanan and S Arivazhakan, PHI
8. Digital Electronics- Sedha, S Chand
8. Digital computer electronics- Malvino, Brown, TMH
9. Microprocrssor architecher, programming and applications R S Gaonkar, Wiely
Eastern Ltd.
10. Introduction to microprocessors- A P Mathur, TMH
155
IN5GET02 - Process Control Instrumentation (Generic Elective II)
Credits-3
Contact hours - 54
Module I (12 hrs)
Introduction: Process control principle, block diagram, identification of elements, control
system evaluation, Units, standards and definitions, p&I diagram (basic idea and
description).
Final control: Final control operation, signal conversions, analog and digital electrical
signals, pneumatic signals, actuators, electrical, pneumatic and hydraulic actuators,
control elements, mechanical, electrical and fluid valves, control valves (basic idea and
principle only).
Module II: Controller principles (17 hrs)
Process characteristics, control system parameters, controller modes, discontinuous controller
modes- two position mode.
Continuous controller modes- proportional control mode, integral control mode, derivative
control mode.
Composite control modes- PI, PD and PID control modes. Design guidelines (basic idea and
principle only).
Module III (11 hrs)
Analog controllers: General features, electronic and pneumatic controllers, mode
implementation, design consideration (explanation only about electronic controllers)
Digital controllers: Digital electronic methods, simple alarms, multivariable alarms,
computer in process control, programmable controllers, data logging, supervisory control
(basic idea and principle)
Module IV (14 hrs)
Discrete state process control, relay controllers, introduction to PLC (basic idea and
principle).
Process Control types- open loop, closed loop, feed forward, cascade, ratio control (basic
principle).
Control loop tuning (only basic idea).
Reference Books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Process Control Instrumentation – Curtis D. Johnson
Chemical Process Control - George Stephenopoulos
Automatic Process Control - Donald P. Eckman
Process Control- Peter Harriot, TMH
Process Systems Analysis and Control - D R Coughanowr, McGraw Hill.
Instrumentation handbook-process control - B.G. Liptak, Chilton
156
IN5GET03 - Bio Medical Instrumentation (Generic Elective III)
Credits-3
Contact hours - 54
Module I (18 hrs)
Introduction: General perspective including objectives– an overview of safety
requirements, biometrics, biomedical instruments, parameters, man-machine interface and
components.
Introduction to biology basics, objectives, Generalized system, Electrical activity of excitable
cells, SD curve, introduction to transducers and its applications, safety in bio-instrumentation.
Electrodes: Recording electrodes, surface electrodes, needle electrodes, micro electrodes,
metal plate electrode, floating electrode, disposable electrode, polarisable and nonpolarisable electrodes.
Module II (14 hrs)
Electrical activity of heart, ECG, typical ECG and characteristics, ECG as a diagnostic tool,
monitoring scheme, lead system.
EEG- typical EEG and characteristics- significance- lead system, clinical applications.
Electromyogram, Electro-neurogram, measurement techniques.
Module III: Blood pressure measurement (12 hrs)
Direct measurements - harmonic analysis of blood pressure waveform, system for measuring
venous pressure, heart sounds, phonocardiography, cardiac catheterization.
Indirect blood pressure measurement- electromagnetic blood flow meters, ultrasonic blood
flow meters, plethysmography, sphygmomanometer.
Module IV (10 hrs)
Hemodialysis, lithotripsy, ventilators, infant incubators, cardiac pacemakers, defibrillators,
lasers in bio-medicine.
Electrical safety
Physiological effects of electricity, micro and macro shock hazards, electrical safety codes
and standards, patient safety considerations in power distribution and equipment design.
Reference Books:
1. Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation - R.S Khandpur, Tata Mc-Graw Hill
2. Medical instrumentation- application and design - Webster J.G, John Wiley
3. Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements - Leslie Cromwell, Fred J. Weibell and
Erich A Pferffer ,Prentice Hall of India, 1990
157
Semester VI
IN6CBT01 - Analytical Instrumentation (Choice Based Course I)
Credits – 3
Contact Hours - 54
Module I (14 hrs)
Elements of an analytical instrument, electromagnetic radiation, electromagnetic spectrum,
interaction of radiation with matter.
Laws relating to absorption of radiation, absorption instruments- source, filter, optical
system, detecting system, display. Slit width, Sample holders (basic explanation)
Module II (15 hrs)
UV and Visible spectroscopy, Single beam filter Photometers, double beam filter
Photometers (principle, construction and working of basic parts).
IR Spectroscopy- radiation source, monochromators, detectors (principle, construction and
working of basic parts ).
Module III (15 hrs)
Raman spectrometer – source, sample holder, spectrometer, detector, display (principle,
construction and working of basic parts).
Mass spectrometer, NMR spectrometer, ESR Spectrometers (principle, construction and
working of basic parts).
Module IV (10 hrs)
Chromatography- basic definitions, gas chromatography (principle, construction and working
of basic parts). Liquid chromatography (principle, construction and working of basic parts).
Reference Books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Hand book of analytical instruments - Khanpur R.S., TMH
Instrumental method of analysis - Williard, Merrit, Dean & Settle, CBS
Principles of Instrumental Analysis, Skoog, Holler, Nieman, Thomson books-cole
publications, 5th edition.
Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis, Galen W. Ewing, McGraw-Hill Book
Company, Fifth edition.
Introduction to Instrumental Analysis, Robert D. Braun, McGraw-Hill Book Company
158
IN6CBT02 - Ultrasonic and Optoelectronic Instrumentation (CBC II)
Credits – 3
Contact Hours - 54
Module I (17 hrs)
Introduction
Ultrasonic waves, principle and propagation of various waves, Characterization Ultrasonic
transmission, reflection and transmission coefficients, intensity and attenuation of sound
beam, power level, Generation of ultrasonic waves.
Module II (17 hrs)
Ultrasonic Test methods: Echo, Transit time, Resonance, Direct contact and immersion types.
Ultrasonic methods of measuring thickness, depth, flow, level etc.
Various parameters affecting ultrasonic testing and measurements, their remedy.
Ultrasonic in medical diagnosis and therapy, Acoustical holography.
Module III (20 hrs)
Opto-electronic components
Laser fundamental, Laser configuration - Q-Switching - Mode locking - Different types of
Lasers - Ruby, Nd-Yag, He-Ne, CO2, Orgon ion. Industrial applications of lasers, Biomedical application, Laser heating - Holography and applications- Medical application,
Lasers and tissue interaction, Laser instruments for surgery, removal tumors of vocal cords,
plastic surgery, dermatology.
LED, LD, PIN & APD, Electro-optic, Magneto optic and Acousto-optic Modulators Fiber
optic sensors
IR sources and detectors - Interferometer method of measurement of length, Moire fringes,
Measurement of pressure, Temperature, Current, Voltage, Liquid level and strain, fiber optic
Gyroscope, Polarization maintaining fibbers, Applications.
Reference Books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Ultrasonic Testing of materials - Krantkramer,Springer 2005
Handbook of Nondestructive Testing - Mc Graw Hill, 1998
Biomedical Ultrasonic - Wells N T, Academic Press, London.
Optics - A.K. Ghatak, Second edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
Optoelectronics-an introduction, Wilson and Hawkes, 3rd edition, PHI.
Lasers: Theory and Applications, K. Thyagarajan and A.K. Ghatak, Plenum Press, New
York.
Lasers and Optical Engineering, P. Das, Springers International Students Edition, 1991.
Laser and Applications, W.O.N. Guimarass andA. Mooradian, Springer Verlag, 1981
159
IN6CBT03 - Power Plant Instrumentation (Choice Based Course III)
Credits – 3
Contact Hours – 54
Module I (16 hrs)
Introduction to power plant process, types of fuel, rankine and brayton cycles, boilers, water
tube and fire tube boilers, once through, types of condensers.
Combined cycle power plant, power generating and distribution system, introduction to
nuclear reactor, PWR, BWR, FBR, GCR, pollution from power plants.
Module II (16 hrs)
Measurement and analysis in power plant- electrical measurement, current, voltage, power
and frequency.
Flow measurements-feed water, fuel flow, and air flow correction temperature and pressure
measurements.
Level measurements, smoke density measurements.
Module III (10 hrs)
Reading and drawing of Instrumentation diagrams- flow sheet symbols-ANSCI symbols for
1. Lines, 2. Valves, 3. Heat transfer, 4. Material handling equipment, 5.dryer, 6. Storage
vessel, 7. Turbine compressor, 8. Flow sheet codes and lines, 9. Graphical symbols for pipe
fittings, valves and piping – instrumentation symbols.
One-line diagram of typical measurements and control schemes – for flow, temperature,
pressure and other process variables – one-line diagram of typical pneumatic hydraulic and
electrical instrumentation system.
Module IV (12 hrs)
Combustion control main pressure air/fuel ratio, furnace draft and excess air control, drum
level control, two elements and three elements control, main and reheat stem temperature
control, burner tilting and bypass damper, super heater- spray and gas recirculation control,
hot well and de-aerator level control.
Interlocks, MFT turbine trip control, turbine monitoring and control, automatic turbine runs
off systems, condenser vacuum control, gland steam exhaust pressure control speed vibration,
shell temperature monitoring, lubricant oil temperature control, H2 generator cooling system,
h2 purity monitoring, nuclear reactor control loops description and functions.
Reference Books:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Modern Power Station Practice – volume 6 Pergamon, CEGB Engineers
Power plant instrumentation – Kallen
Applied instrumentation in process industries – Andrews and Williams
Safety aspects of nuclear reactors – Mc Culough C.R, Van
Power plant engineering –G.R. Nagpal
160
SYLLABUS FOR PRACTICAL – 2nd CORE COURSES(Instrumentation)
(A minimum of 50% experiments in the syllabus should be done and recorded in each
practical course component to appear for the examination)
Semesters I & II
Core 2 Practical 1: IN2CRP01-Instrumentation
1. Familiarization with tools- measuring tape, hammer, screw driver, pliers, etc.
2. Calibration of given Vernier calipers
3. Calibration of given Screw gauge
4. A.C fundamentals-sinusoidal and non sinusoidal waves – finding amplitude, time period,
etc.
5. AC through RLC (series)
6. AC through RLC (parallel)
7. DC circuit analysis – finding values of voltage across resistance
8. Thevenin’s theorem
9. Kirchoff’s Laws
10. Wheatstone’s bridge
11. Familiarization of pressure and temperature gauges
12. Pressure gauge calibration (dead weight tester)
13. Pressure switches
14. Temperature gauge calibration
15. Temperature switches
16. Measurement of strain using strain gauge
17. Determination of kinematic viscosity
18. Temperature measurement using thermistor
19. Temperature measurement using thermocouple
20. U tube manometer
161
Semesters III & IV
Core 2 Practical 2: IN4CRP02- Signal Conditioners, Measurement & Control
1. Rectifiers
2. Filters
3. OP-AMP Inverting amplifier
4. OP-AMP Non- inverting amplifier
5. Adder using OP-AMP
6. Subtractor using OP-AMP
7. Differentiator using OP-AMP
8. Integrator using OP-AMP
9. OP-AMP Comparator
10. Instrumentation amplifier
11. Design of proportional controller
12. Design of proportional integral controller
13. Temperature process station
14. Process level control
15. pH measurement
16. Process pressure control
17. Measurement of temperature using RTD
18. Measurement of pressure using strain gauge
19. Measurement of displacement using LDR
20. Measurement of displacement using LVDT
162
Core 2 Practical 3: IN4CRP03-Microprocessor & Industrial Automation
1.
Microprocessor Programming - Addition of numbers
2.
Microprocessor Programming - Subtraction of numbers
3.
Microprocessor Programming - Multiplication of numbers
4.
Microprocessor Programming - Division of numbers
5.
Microprocessor Programming - Equal nibbles in series
6.
Microprocessor Programming - Square root of a number
7.
Microprocessor Programming - Factorial of a number
8.
Microprocessor Programming - Even and odd numbers in a series
9.
Microprocessor Programming - GCD of two numbers
10.
Microprocessor Programming - LCM of two numbers
11. Study of PLC
12. Implementation of logic gates PLC
13. Implementation of DOL starter using PLC
14. Switch and lamp problems
15. ON/OFF of motor using two push buttons
16. Two-way traffic control system
17. Operation of different conveyors on timely basis
18. Mixing of reagents in a simple plant
19. Automation a car parking system
20. Fire alarm system
163
Complementary Electronics for B. Sc. (Model III) Physics – Instrumentation
Semester I
EL1CMT01: Basic Electronics
Credits – 2
Contact hours- 36
Module I: Introduction to circuit components (6 hrs)
Resistor - General information such as symbols, colour codes, types, variable resistors,
potentiometers, thermistors, LDRs, VDRs, technical specifications like voltage rating;
Capacitors - General information such as symbols, colour codes, types, fixed and variable
Capacitors, Specifications, Voltage Rating; Inductors - symbols, types, such as air core, iron
core, chocking core, frequency response; Relays – symbols, types, Application area;
Microphone & Speaker; Transducers
Text Book: Basic Electronics, Theraja
Module II: Network analysis (12 hrs)
Circuit elements - Power Sources, Nodes, Mesh; Equivalent resistance, Delta Wye
conversions; Network Theorems - Kirchoff's laws, Thevenin's Theorem, Norton's Theorem,
Superposition Theorem, Maximum Power Transfer Theorem.
Text Book: Basic Electronics, Theraja
Module III: Semiconductor Diode Devices and their applications (12 hrs)
Semiconductors- Energy bands in semiconductors, Intrinsic and Extrinsic semiconductors- P
type and N type semiconductors, Majority and minority carriers- PN junction, Properties of
PN Junction, Biasing- V-I Characteristics of PN Junction-Semiconductor Diode-Zener Diode,
Zener diode as voltage regulator. Half Wave Rectifier- Full Wave Rectifier, Bridge Rectifier
(Efficiency and Ripple Factor with derivation) -Filter Circuits- Advantages and use of filtersShunt capacitor filter, LC filter, RC filter Clipper, Clamper. LEDs- Multi color LED,
Applications of LED, Schottky diode, Tunnel diode-Photo Diode, Solar cell, Varactor Diode,
Principle of operation and Characteristics.
Text Book: Electronic Principles, Malvino
Module IV: Transistors (8 hrs)
Transistor - PNP and NPN transistors; Transistor characteristics in the three configurations
CE, CB, CC; Current gain α, and their relation; Amplifying action; Faithful amplification
criteria; BJT factors contributing to Thermal Stability, Stability factor, Operating Point;
Biasing and its need; Biasing types - Voltage Divider Bias, Base resistor feedback, Potential
divider Bias.
Text Book: Principles of Electronics. V. K Mehta & Rohit Mehtha.
Reference Book:
1.
Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory, Robert Boylestad, Louis Nashelsky
164
Semester II
EL2CMT02: Amplifiers and Oscillators
Credits – 2
Contact hours – 36
Module I: Transistor Amplifier (8 hrs)
Amplifier classification based on operating point, frequency of operation, coupling element;
Single stage CE amplifier with voltage divider bias, ac and dc analysis; voltage gain, current
gain, power gain, input impedance, output impedance.
Module II: Feedback Amplifiers (10 hrs)
Principles of feedback circuit; Advantages of negative feedback - Stabilization of gain,
Reduction of non linear distortion- Effect of feedback on input and output resistances; Four
feedback topologies - voltage amplifier, current amplifier, transconductance amplifier,
transresistance amplifier, with examples.
Module III: Oscillators (10 hrs)
Feedback requirements of Oscillators, Barkhausen criteria for Oscillations and basic
oscillator analysis, Phase Shift Oscillator, Hartley Oscillator, Collpitt’s Oscillator,
Piezoelectric Crystal Oscillator.
Module IV: Field effect transistor (8 hrs)
FET – Principle, types; JFET – Construction, working principle, Characteristics; FET vs BJT;
JFET as Amplifier - operating point; JFET biasing - fixed bias, Self-bias, voltage divider
bias; MOSFET – Construction and working principle, MOSFET types – D and E,
Characteristics.
Reference:
1.
2.
3.
Principles of Electronics, V. K. Mehta, Rohith Mehta
A Textbook of Applied Electronics, R. S. Sedha
Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory, Robert Boylestad, Louis Nashelsky
165
Semester III
EL3CRT03 - Communication Electronics
Credits – 3
Contact Hours- 54
Module I: Introduction to Communication (12 hrs)
Basic communication system – information source, coding, channel (bound and unbound),
noise, decoding, information destination; EM spectrum – bands, properties and typical uses in
each band.
Module II: Analog Modulation (15 hrs)
Modulation and its needs; Types of sinusoidal modulations – Amplitude modulation and
Angle modulation; AM – Principle, mathematical expression, sidebands, bandwidth,
modulation index, AM modulator, AM demodulator; FM – Principle, mathematical
expression, sidebands, bandwidth, modulation index, FM modulator, FM demodulator.
Module III: Digital Modulation (12 hrs)
Number system and conversion– binary, octal, decimal, hexadecimal; Advantages of digital
systems; AD conversion – sampling, quantization and encoding; Digital modulation– ASK,
FSK, PSK, QAM; Pulse modulation – PAM, PTM, PCM
Module IV: Modern communication standards (15 hrs)
Communication Networks – Nodes, Endpoints, Topology; OSI model; Channel sharing –
FDM, TDM, WDM, CDM; Familiarization of wired (FireWire, USB, I2C, CAN, HDMI, 1Wire) and wireless standards (WiFi, Bluetooth, UWB, ZigBee, TransferJet, DVB-S); Mobile
generations – 0G, 1G, 2G, 3G, 4G, 5G.
Reference:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Electronic Communication Systems, George Kennedy, Bernard Davis
Electronic Communications Systems, Wayne Tomasi
Telecommunication Transmission Systems, Robert G. Winch
Digital Communications, John G. Proakis
Mobile Communications, Jochan Schiller
Mobile Cellular Communications, William C. Y. Lee
166
Semester IV
EL4CMT04 -Operating System and Python Programming
Credits – 3
Contact Hours- 54
Module I: Operating system concepts (12 hrs)
Computer organization – Input devices, output devices, CPU, Bus; Storage – registers, cache,
primary memory, secondary memory; Operating systems – Objectives and Functions;
Generations of Operating systems; Types of Operating Systems – Mainframe, Desktop,
Multiprocessor, Distributed, Clustered, Batch processing, Multiprogramming, Multiuser,
Real time, Embedded and Time sharing; OS components – Process management, Memory
management, I/O management, File management, Protection system, Network management,
Command interpreter; OS services – Process Execution, I/O operations, File manipulations,
Communications, Error detection and recovery, Resource allocation, Accounting, System
Protection, System Calls, System call Execution.
Module II: Linux and bash programming (15 hrs)
History of Linux; Features of Linux; Differences between UNIX and Linux; Linux
Architecture; Popular Flavors of Linux; Linux runlevels; Linux filesystem; Mounting and
unmounting; Processes – parent, child, zombie, orphan; Bash scripting – common bash
commands used in filesystem handling, text file handling, process handling, job handling,
piping and redirecting output, bash startup files.
Module III: Python preliminary (12 hrs)
Python and its advantages; Python interpreter – IDLE; Basic python syntax – comments,
string operations, variable types, type casting, operators; Simple IO – print, input, loadtxt;
Program control flow – conditional statements, loops.
Module IV: Python for physics (15 hours)
Functions; Packages and modules – math, numpy, scipy; Lists – append, pop, map, sort;
Arrays – Slicing, range function, linspace function; Tuples; Dictionary; Generating graphs –
matplotlib, figure, plot, title, xlabel, ylabel, xlim, ylim, legend; Visual python – coordinates,
objects, controls and parameters.
Reference:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Operating System Concepts, Abraham Silberschatz, Greg Gagne, and Peter BaerGalvin
UNIX Systems for Modern Architectures, Curt Schimmel
Mastering UNIX shell scripting: Bash, Bourne, and Korn shell scripting for
programmers, system administrators and linux gurus, Randal K. Michael
UNIX shell programming, Stephan G.Kochan, Patrick Wood
Beginning Linux Programming, Neil Matthew, Richard Stones
Python in a nutshell, Alex Martelli
Computational Physics with Python, Dr. Eric Ayars
A Primer on Scientific Programming with Python, Hans PetterLangtangen
167
SYLLABUS FOR PRACTICAL
Complementary Electronics for Physics- Instrumentation
(A minimum of 50% experiments given in syllabus should be done and recorded in each
practical course component to appear for the examination)
Semesters I & II
Complementary Practical 1: EL2CMP01
1.
CRO familiarization- measurement of ac voltage, dc voltage- measurement of
frequency.
2.
PN junction diode characteristics.
3.
Zener diode characteristics.
4.
Half wave rectifier
5.
Full wave rectifier with and without filter.
6.
Voltage regulator using Zener.
7.
Regulated Power Supply using IC.
8.
Clippers - positive, negative, biased.
9.
Clampers- positive, negative
10.
RC integrator.
11.
RC differentiator.
12.
Common Base characteristics.
13.
Single stage CE amplifier.
14.
Hartley oscillator.
15.
Colpitts oscillator.
16.
JFET characteristics.
17.
Emitter follower
18.
Photodiode characteristics
19.
MOSFET characteristics
168
Semesters III & IV
Complementary Practical 2: EL4CMP02
1.
Amplitude Modulation
2.
Frequency Modulation
3.
Amplitude shift keying
4.
Pulse amplitude modulation
5.
Pulse width modulation
6.
Amplitude demodulation
7.
F to V converter
8.
FSK modulation
9.
Binary to decimal converter
10.
PWM demodulation
11.
Print a set of numbers in Fibonacci series using bash script.
12.
Bash script to check prime numbers.
13.
Bash script to check for palindrome numbers.
14.
Bash script to accept a number and print it in the reverse order.
15.
Bash script to print factorial of a number.
16.
Solving a system of linear equations in python.
17.
Program to plot standing waves in a cavity using python.
18.
Program to plot path of a projectile at different angles using python.
19.
Program to convert between temperature scales using python.
20.
Stokes’ experiment – python program to calculate terminal velocity of freely falling
object in a highly viscous medium.
169
18. Model Question Papers
FIRST SEMESTER B Sc. DEGREE (CBCS) EXAMINATION MODELQUESTION PAPER
PH1CRT01: MECHANICS I (For Physics Main)
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
PART A
Answer any NINE questions. Each question carries 2 marks.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
What is meant by isothermal and adiabatic elasticity?
Explain I – section of girders.
Give two examples of harmonic oscillations.
Draw a neat curve showing all three damping cases of a damped harmonic oscillator.
Explain quality factor of a harmonic oscillator.
Explain superposition of waves.
Write “a i e s for ula a d e plai the ter s.
Give two properties of ultrasonic waves.
Does sound waves need medium for propagation? Why?
Obtain the differential equation for simple harmonic motion.
Find the di e sio of You g s odulus.
Does an oscillator in vacuum is an example of a damped harmonic oscillator? Why?
9 x 2 = 18
PART B
Answer any SIX questions. Each question carries 4 marks.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Describe all three modulus of elasticity.
Deri e the for ulae for You g s odulus he a ea is su je ted to u ifor
e di g.
Derive the expression for torsional potential energy.
Explain the acoustics of construction of auditorium.
Distinguish between the intensity and loudness of sound.
Explain the composition of two rectangular simple harmonic motions of equal periods.
What are beats? Derive an equation for beat frequency? How are they produced?
How ultrasonic waves are produced?
What is resonance? Explain sharpness of resonance?
6 x 4 = 24
PART C
Answer any THRE questions. Each question carries 4 marks.
22. A compound pendulum is formed by suspending a heavy ring from a point on its circumference.
Calculate the period of oscillation if its radius is 3 m.
170
23. A turning fork of unknown frequency gives 4 beats per second, when sounded with a fork of
frequency 320 Hz. When loaded with a little wax it gives 3 beats per second. Find the unknown
frequency?
24. Draw the velocity time graph of a simple harmonic oscillator.
25. Calculate the work done in twisting a steel wire of radius 0.001m and length 0.25 m through an
angle of 45 degree. Given rigidity modulus = 8 x 1010 Nm-2
26. Find the work done in stretching a wire of 1sq mm cross section and 2 m long through 0.1 mm
11
You g s odulus, Y =
N/m2)
3 x 6 = 18
PART D
Answer any TWO questions. Each question carries 10 marks
27. Describe a method to determine the velocity of ultrasonic waves.
28. Ho to fi d the You g s odulus of the gi e
aterial usi g it a s a a tile er? E plai
help of a neat diagram.
29. Explain the origin of different types of Lissajous figures.
30. Explain Fourier series. Expand a square wave as a Fourier series.
ith the
2x10 = 20
171
MAHATMA GANDHI UNIVERSITY KOTTAYAM
II SEMESTER B. Sc. DEGREE (CBCS) EXAMINATION MODEL QUESTION PAPER
PH2CRT02: OPTICS (For Physics Main)
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
Part A (Very Short Answer Questions)
Answer any Nine questions. Each question carrier 2 marks.
1. Distinguish between geometrical path and optical path of a beam of light.
2. State the quantum theory of light.
3. What is coherence?
4. What are Haidinger fringes?
5. How shall you get a system of Newton’s rings with bright centre?
6. Distinguish between interference and diffraction.
7. State Fresnel’s assumptions on diffraction.
8. Explain the missing orders of fringes in the diffraction pattern of a double slit.
9. Define grating element.
10. State Brewster’s law.
11. Distinguish between plane of polarization and plane of vibration.
12. What is optical activity?
×
Part B (Short Answer Questions)
=
Answer any six questions. Each question carriers 4 marks.
13. How will you test the optical flatness of a glass plate?
14. Describe light as an electromagnetic wave.
15. How can you determine the difference in wavelengths of two monochromatic sources
using Michelson interferometer?
16. Distinguish between interference and diffraction.
17. Distinguish between Fresnel and Fraunhoffer diffraction.
18. Distinguish between prism spectra and grating spectra.
19. Describe the polarization of light by refraction using pile of plates
20. What are polaroids? Mention any two applications.
21. What is double refraction? Explain Huygen’s theory of double refraction.
6×
172
=
Part C: (Short Essays or Problems)
Answer any Three questions. Each question carries 6 marks.
22.
(i) Light of wavelength 600 nm falls normally on a wedge shaped film of refractive
index 1.4 forming fringes that are 2 mm apart. Find the angle of the wedge.
(ii) When the movable mirror of Michelson interferometer is moved through 0.0295
mm, 100 fringes are observed to cross the field of view. Calculate the wavelength of
light.
23. In a Newton’s rings experiment with air film, the diameter of mth dark ring is 0.293 cm.
With a liquid film, the same arrangement gives similar rings but the diameter of mth dark
ring becomes 0. 254 cm. Find the refractive index of the liquid?
24. Light of wavelength 500 nm is incident normally on a diffraction grating of width 3 cm
and 1500 lines. Find the angle of diffraction in the first order?
25. Calculate the thickness of a calcite plate which could convert plane polarized light into
circularly polarized light. Wavelength of light used is 589 nm. nE=1.486 and n0=1.658.
26. Critical angle for water is 48o. Calculate the polarizing angle and the angle of refraction
for light incident on water at an angle which produces maximum polarization of the
reflected light.
Part D (Essays Questions)
×6 =
Answer any two questions. Each question carrier 10 marks.
27. (i). Discuss Fermat’s principles of least time and extremum path.
(ii). State and prove the laws of reflection using Fermat’s principle.
28. (i). What is meant by phase change on reflection from a denser medium?
(ii). Discuss how dark and bright bands are formed by reflection at a thin film?
(iii). What is the effect of thickness of the film?
29. (i) What is a zone plate? Give its construction and theory.
(ii) Show that a zone plate has multiple foci.
(iii) Compare the zone plate with a convex lens.
30. Give the mathematical analysis of elliptically and circularly polarized light. How will
you produce and detect them?
(2 x 10 = 20)
173
III SEMESTER B. Sc. DEGREE (CBCS) EXAMINATION MODEL QUESTION PAPER
PH3CRT03: MECHANICS II (For Physics Main)
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
Part A
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Explain the idea of inertial frame of reference.
What is Coriolis force?
Explain the significance of conservation laws.
Write two examples of non conservative forces.
Can the center of mass of a two body system be outside the two bodies? Explain.
Distinguish between calibration error and random error.
What is meant by escape velocity? Does the escape velocity from moon is greater than that from
earth? Why?
Explain cyclic coordinates.
State Bernoulli’s theorem.
Give two examples of central force.
Does earth forms a perfectly inertial frame? Explain your answer.
Give the meaning of standard deviation.
(9 x 2 = 18)
Part B
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Explain work-energy theorem.
Explain the working of a venturimeter. .
What is Foucault’s pendulum? Mention one of its uses.
Explain the principle of virtual work.
What are the factors affecting the precision and accuracy of a physical experiment?
Distinguish between centrifugal force and coriolis force.
State and explain three conservation laws.
Does generalised momentum and generalised coordinate have the dimensions of momentum and
length? Why?
21. Where the earth feels more velocity, nearer or away, while rotating around the sun?
(6 x 4 = 24)
Part C
Answer any THREE questions. Each question carriers 6 marks.
22. Write the connection between conservation laws and symmetry properties.
23. Calculate the mean and standard deviation from the following data.
Value
f
90-99
2
80-89
12
70-79
22
174
60-69
20
50-59
14
40-19
4
30-39
1
24. Explain different types of constraints with examples.
25. Use the Lagrange method to obtain the equation of motion for one dimensional harmonic
oscillator.
26. A body having 10kg mass and a velocity of 25 m/s collides elastically with another body of mass
50 kg and comes to rest. Find the velocity of the second body.
(3 x 6 = 18)
Part D
Answer any TWO questions. Each question carries 10 marks.
27.
28.
29.
30.
Derive Lagrange’s equations from De Alembert’s principle.
Explain with necessary equations Kepler’s laws and their impacts.
Explain different types of errors? What are the precautions taken to avoid them?
Derive an expression for energy possessed by a liquid? Explain Torricelli’s theorem.
(2 x10 = 20)
175
IV SEMESTER B. Sc. DEGREE (CBCS) EXAMINATION MODEL QUESTION PAPER
PH4CRT04: BASIC ELECTRONICS (For Physics Main)
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
Part A
1. Define the Knee voltage of a PN junction diode.
2. Why are filter circuits used in power supplies?
3. What is meant by PIV of a diode?
4. What is the advantage of a bridge rectifier over a full wave rectifier?
5. What are the essentials of a feedback LC oscillator?
6. What do you mean by CMRR?
7. Distinguish between oscillators and amplifiers.
8. What is regulated power supply?
9. What is meant by avalanche breakdown?
10. Give the schematic symbol of N-channel and P-channel FET?
11. What happens to the input and output resistances of an amplifier when a negative voltage series
feedback is used?
12. Define the unit decibel for expressing: (i) voltage (ii) current and (iii) power. Why is it preferred
to express gain in dB?
(9 x 2 = 18)
Part B
13. What are clamping circuits?
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Explain the term frequency response of an amplifier. What are half-power frequencies?
What is meant by carrier swing in FM?
Draw the circuit diagram of a voltage tripler.
Describe DC and AC operating point.
Dra the ir uit diagra of a Colpitt s os illator ith la els o the o po e ts. Gi e the
expression for its frequency.
19. Describe the input characteristics of a CE configuration.
20. Give the relation between current amplification factor in CB and CC configurations.
21. Describe the need of biasing in transistors.
(6x4 = 24)
Part C
Answer any 3 questions. Each question carries 6 marks.
22. Find the operating frequency of a Hartley oscillator if L1 =
et ee the oils M = μH a d C = pF.
176
μH, L2 = 1 mH, mutual inductance
23. Find the values of VCE and Av for the transistor amplifier circuit shown below.
24. An FM transistor sends out a 100 MHz carrier wave frequency modulated by a 15 KHz sinusoidal
audio signal. The maximum frequency deviation is 30 KHz. Find (i) the modulation index (ii) the
three significant pairs of side frequencies and (iii) channel width required for these three side
frequency pairs.
25. For a Zener regulator circuit, Vz = 12V, RS = 4KΩ, ‘L = KΩ a d the i put oltage aries fro
V
to 50V. Find the maximum and minimum values of the Zener current.
26. An amplifier has a voltage gain of -100. The feedback ratio is -0.05. Find (i) the voltage gain with
feedback, (ii) the amount of feedback in dB. (iii) the output voltage of the feedback amplifier for
an input voltage of 30mV, (iv) the feedback factor and (v) the feedback voltage.
(3 x 6 = 18)
Part D
Answer any TWO questions. Each question carries 10 marks.
27. Draw the experimental set up to obtain the forward and reverse characteristics of a PN junction
diode. Discuss the shape of the characteristics.
28. What are clipping circuits? What are their applications? Discuss the working of positive, negative
and biased clippers with proper circuit diagrams, input and output waveforms.
29. What is amplitude modulation? Describe the mathematical analysis of AM wave. Explain upper
and lower side frequencies.
30. What is an OpAmp? State the characteristics of an ideal OpAmp. Describe the use of OpAmp as
an adder.
(2 x 10 = 20)
177
V SEMESTER B. Sc. DEGREE (CBCS) EXAMINATION MODEL QUESTION PAPER
PH5CRT05: QUANTUM MECHANICS (For Physics Main)
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
Part A (Short answer type questions)
Answer any nine questions. Each question carries 2 marks.
1. How particle nature of radiation was confirmed by the photoelectric and Compton
Effects?
2. How classical physics failed to account for the spectral distribution of energy density in a
black body?
3. What is the importance of Stern-Gerlach experiment?
4. Can we measure the kinetic energy and potential energy of a particle simultaneously with
arbitrary precision? Explain.
5. Distinguish between group and phase velocity.
6. What is a wave packet? How it is represented analytically and diagrammatically?
7. Obtain Bohr’s quantisation rule.
8. What is de Broglie hypothesis?
9. What is a linear operator?
10. What is the condition for an operator to be Hermitian?
11. What is linear vector space?
12. Plot the eigen functions of a particle moving in a finite square well potential.
(9 x 2 = 18)
Part B (Paragraph type questions)
Answer any six questions. Each question carries 4 marks.
13. What are the basic postulates of quantum mechanics
14. Explain the general uncertainty relation apply it to position and momentum
15. Applying the rule of quantization by Wilson and Somerfield show that the energy of
particle in a box is quantised.
16. How we can explain the expectation value in quantum mechanics
17. What is time independent Schrödinger equation
18. What is Schmidt’s orthogonalisation?
19. What are the basic angular momentum operators?
20. Explain orthogonality of linear vector space.
21. State and explain the admissibility conditions of wave functions.
(6x4 = 24)
178
Part C (Short Essay / Problems)
Answer any three questions. Each question carries 6 marks.
22. Calculate the de Broglie wavelength of an electron having a K E of 1000 eV. Compare
the result with the wave length of x rays having the same energy.
23. Show that the commutation relation of [ x ,Px ]= iℏ
24. Show that [ Lx ,Ly]] =iℏLz
25. An electron has a speed of 500 m/s with an accuracy of 0.004 %. Calculate the
uncertainty with which we can locate the position of the electron
26. Show that the probability density of the linear harmonic oscillator in an arbitrary super
position state is periodic equal to the period of the oscillator.
(3 x 6 = 18)
Part D (Essay questions)
Answer any two questions. Each question carries 10 marks.
27. Solve the problem of linear harmonic oscillator and show that the energy levels are
quantized.
28. State and prove the Ehrenfest theorem in quantum mechanics.
29. Discuss the phenomenon of quantum tunnelling. Explain alpha decay using tunnelling.
30. Explain the Davisson and Germer Experiment.
(2 x 10 = 20)
179
PH5CRT06: ELECTRICITY AND ELECTRODYNAMICS (For Physics Main)
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Define form factor. What is its value in the case of a sinusoidal voltage?
What is meant by wattles current?
Mention the different energy losses in a transformer.
Why a choke coil is preferred over Ohmic resistance for diminishing current in a circuit?
What is an ideal current source?
State the laws of thermo emf.
Electric lines of forces will not cross each other. Why?
Show that time varying electric field is not conservative.
Using Maxwell’s equations, show that the velocity of electromagnetic waves through
vacuum is 3 x 108 m/s.
10. State Biot- Savart’s law.
11. What is motional emf?
12. Write down Maxwell’s equations for static fields.
� =
13. Distinguish between mean value and rms value of an alternating current.
14. Compare a series resonant circuit with a parallel resonant circuit.
15. What is skin effect? Describe the construction of a tesla coil?
16. State and prove the Reciprocity theorem.
17. Distinguish between Peltier effect and Joule heating effect.
18. What is a thermo electric diagram? How is it used for the determination of total emf?
19. What is displacement current? Explain its significance.
20. Using Gauss theorem, find out the electric flux density of a uniformly charged sphere.
21. Discuss the propagation of electromagnetic waves in free space.
��
=
22. A coil of self inductance 2 milli Henri and resistance 15 ohm is connected in parallel with
a capacitance of 0.001µF. Find
i. the frequency at which the current from an ac source to this circuit is minimum.
180
ii.
the peak value of this make up current if the peak value of the supply voltage is
2V.
23. Find the current through γΩ resistor using superposition theorem.
24. Find the current through 1.5Ω resistor using Thevenin’s theorem.
25. Show that the standing wave f(x,t)= A sin(kx) cos(kvt) satisfies the wave equation and
express it as the sum of a wave traveling to the left and a wave traveling to the right.
26. The point charges -1 nC, 4 nC and 3 nC are located at (0,0,0), (0,0,1) and (1,0,0)
respectively. Find the energy of the system.
��=
Part D:(Essays): Answer any two
27. Discuss the decay of charge in an LCR circuit and analyze different cases.
28. (i) What is Thomson effect? Define Thomson co-efficient.
(ii) Describe the thermodynamics of thermocouple and obtain the relation connecting
___ Peltier and Thomson co-efficients.
29. (i) State Ampere’s circuit law and obtain the magnetic field due to an infinitely long co
___ axial line.
(ii) Define magnetic scalar and vector potential. Mention their significances.
30. (i). Derive Poynting’s theorem. What is the significance of Poynting vector?
(ii). In a non magnetic medium � = sin � ×
�− .
(a). �� , �
(b). Time averaged power carried by the wave.
(c). Total power crossing 100 cm2 of plane 2x + y = 5
� �/ . Find out
�
181
=
PH5CRT07: RELATIVITY AND SPECTROSCOPY (For Physics Main)
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. What are the postulates of Bohr atom model?
2. Define Bohr magneton? What is its SI unit?
3. State Moseley’s law.
4. Define Lande g factor.
5. What is Lamb shift?
6. There is no spin orbit splitting of the Hydrogen atom ground level. Why?
7. Write a note on isotope effect in rotational spectra.
8. Homo nuclear diatomic molecules do not show vibrational spectra. Why?
9. What are hot bands? Why are they called so?
10. State mutual exclusion principle
11. What is twin paradox in relativity?
12. State the postulates of special theory of relativity.
(9 x 2 = 18)
Part B (Short Questions)
13. Distinguish between LS coupling and jj coupling.
14. Explain the effect of nuclear spin on the electronic spectrum of an atom.
15. Describe vector atom model.
16. What is nuclear quadrupole moment?
How does it differ from nuclar quadrupole
coupling constant?
17. Mention the applications of NMR.
18. Describe the quantum theory of Raman effect.
19. In linear molecules, the Raman shift of the first Stokes line from the exciting one is 6B,
whereas it is 4B in symmetric top molecules. Why?
20. A moving clock ticks more slowly than a clock at rest. Why?
21. Write a note on general theory of relativity.
182
(6 x 4 = 24)
Part C (Short Essays or Problems)
22. Consider two electrons, one in the 4p and other in the 4f subshell. Obtain the possible
L,S and J values and term symbols for this two electron system.
23. Illustrate with an energy level diagram, Paschen Bach effect for the D2 line of sodium.
24. The first line in the rotation spectrum of CO has a frequency of 3.8424 cm-1. Calculate
the rotational constant and hence the bond length in CO.
25. The Raman line associated with a vibrational mode which is both Raman and IR active is
found at 460 nm when excited with wavelength 435.8 nm. Calculate the wavelength of
the corresponding infrared band.
26. Find the total energy of a neutron (m=0.940 GeV/c2) whose momentum is 1.2 GeV/c.
��=
27. (i). Discuss the theory of Normal Zeeman effect.
(ii). Distinguish between normal Zeeman effect and anomalous Zeeman effect
(iii). Distinguish between linear and quadratic Stark effect.
28. Discuss the rotational spectra of a rigid diatonic molecule and a non rigid rotator. What is
the effect of vibrational excitation?
29. What is electron spin resonance?
Describe the principle and working of an ESR
spectrometer.
30. Derive the basic equations of Lorentz transformation.
�
183
=
PH5CRT08: THERMAL AND STSTISTICAL PHYSICS (For Physics Main)
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. What are the limitations of Van der Waals equation?
2. Distinguish between reversible and irreversible processes.
3. State first law of thermodynamics? Give its mathematical form.
4. State Carnot’s theorem.
5. State Boltzman’s formula. Mention its significance.
6. Obtain Clausius Clapeyron equation from first TdS equation.
7. Show that internal energy of an ideal gas depends only on temperature.
8. What are the properties of thermal radiations?
9. State the principle of equal a priori probability.
10. Express entropy in terms of partition function.
11. What is meant by density of states?
12. What is meant by statistical equilibrium?
�
=
13. Write a note on expansivity and compressibility of a substance.
14. Write a note on van der Waals isotherms.
15. Distinguish between intensive and extensive variables. Give examples to both.
16. What is the basic principle of absolute scale of temperature?
17. Prove Claussius theorem and hence define entropy.
18. Show that in the free expansion of an ideal gas, entropy of the gas increases.
19. Deduce Stefan’s law from Planck’s law.
20. State and explain equipartition theorem.
21. What are the characteristics of microcanonical ensemble?
��
184
=
22. At 300K, one mol of Hydrogen occupies a volume of 10-3 m3 and at 35 K, a volume of
10-4 m3. Find the pressure of the gas at 300K.
23. A Carnot engine with efficiency 0.6 drives a Carnot refrigerator with co-efficient of
performance 5. Determine the energy absorbed from the cold body by the refrigerator
for each kilo joule of energy absorbed from the source by the engine.
24. The efficiency of a Carnot engine can be increased in two ways, by increasing the
source temperature or by decreasing the sink temperature. Which one is more
effective? Why?
25. The temperature of 10 kg of water is raised from 0oC to 100oC at constant pressure.
The heat capacity of water at constant pressure is 4.18 x 103 J/kg K. Calculate increase
in entropy of water.
26. For water vapour near critical point, the van der Waals constants and gas constant are:
a = 0.199 Pa m6/mol2. b= 1.83 x 10-5m3/mol. R= 5.008 J/mol K. Find the parameters
of critical state.
��=
27. Describe Andrew’s experiment on CO2. What are the inferences drawn from it?
28. Describe the working of a Carnot’s ideal heat engine and obtain an expression for its
efficiency. What is meant by reversibility of a Carnot engine?
29. Using the laws of thermodynamics, derive Maxwell’s thermodynamic relations.
30. What are fermions? Discuss their statistical distribution.
�
185
=
VI SEMESTER B. Sc. DEGREE (CBCS) EXAMINATION MODEL QUESTION PAPER
PH6CRT09: NUCLEAR & PARTICLE PHYSICS AND ASTROPHYSICS (For Physics Main)
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Distinguish between isobar and isotone.
2. What are the properties of Gamma radiations?
3. List the characteristics of nuclear forces.
4. What are magic numbers?
5.
6.
7.
8.
What is a breeder reactor?
State Geiger- Nuttal law.
State Soddy Fajan’s displacement law.
What are transuranic elements? Give examples.
9. What is latitude effect of cosmic rays?
10. Give the quark composition of a proton.
11. Write a note on HR diagram.
12. What is meant by a black hole?
�
=
13. Why electrons cannot be present in the nucleus?
14. Write a note on collective model of the nucleus.
15. State the basic principle of an ionization chamber.
16. What is carbon dating?
17. Write a note on artificial radioactivity.
18. What are cosmic ray showers?
19. What are the different methods for plasma confinement?
20. Explain the production of energy in stars by nuclear fusion.
21. Which are the different quantum numbers associated with elementary particles?
��
186
=
22. Calculate the total binding energy and binding energy per nucleon for
mass of neutron= 1.008665 amu and mass of proton=1.007825 amu.
56
26Fe .
Given
23. How long does it take for 60% of a sample of Radon to decay? Half life of Radon is
3.8 days.
24. The isotope 92U238 successively undergoes alpha and beta emission to form 82Pb206.
How many alpha and beta particles are emitted from it?
25. A nuclear reactor is developing energy at a rate of 3000kW. How many atoms of U235
undergo fission per second? How many kilograms of U235 would be used in 1000
hours of operation assuming that on an average energy of 200 MeV is released per
fission.
26. Using the baryon number and strangeness number conservation laws, state whether the
following reactions are allowed.
(i). � − + � → Λ + K
(ii). � − + � → Λ + �
��=
27. Describe liquid drop model of nucleus. How can the semi-empirical mass formula be
derived from it? Mention the uses of this model.
28. Describe the principle and operation of a GM counter as a particle detector.
29. How Gamow’s theory accounts for the decay of alpha particles from the nuclei of a
radioactive substance?
30. (i). Which are the different fundamental interactions between elementary particles?
(ii). Explain the birth and life of a star.
�
187
=
PC6CRT10: SOLID STATE PHYSICS (For Physics Main)
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Define a unit cell?
2. What is Bragg’s law?
3. Write a short note on ionic crystals?
4. What is a phonon?
5. What do you understand by free electron gas?
6. What is the Bloch function?.
7. Explain the concept of hole.
8. What is piezoelectricity?
9. Write a short note on paramagnetism.
10. What is superconductivity?
11. What is Josephson effect?
12. Define mobility of a charge carrier.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. How does hcp structure differ from bcc structure?
14. What is Debye temperature? What is its significance?
15. Discuss qualitatively why electronic specific heat is temperature dependent?
16. Distinguish between a metal, a semiconductor and insulator on the basics of their energy
band structure.
17. Explain the conduction mechanism for n-type and p-type semiconductors. .
18. Explain the concept of BCS theory.
19. Draw the IV characteristics of solar cell and explain.
20. What is an acousto optic modulator?
21. Explain the working of three-level laser system.
(6 x 4 = 24)
188
22. A plane makes intercepts of 1,2 and 0.5 Ao on the crystallographic axes of an
orthorhombic crytal with a:b:c= 3:2:1. Determine the Miller indices of this plane.
23. What is the conductivity of n-type Si that has been doped with 1016cm-3 phosphorus atoms,
if the drift mobility is about 1350cm2 V-1s-1?
24. The Bragg’s angle for (ββ0) reflection from nickel (fcc) is γ8.βo when x-ray of wavelength
1.54Ao are employed in a diffraction experiment. Determine the lattice parameter of
nickel.
25. The Debye temperature for diamond is 2230K, Calculate the highest possible vibrational
frequency and molar heat capacity of diamond at 10K..
26. Find the lowest energy of an electron confined to move in a three dimensional potential
box of length 0.5Ao.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Describe the powder method for X-ray diffraction. Discuss the formation of x-ray
diffraction pattern.
28. Derive the expression for the Fermi energy and density of states for free electron gas in
one dimension.
29. Derive the expression for density of electrons in the conduction band of an n-type
semiconductor.
30. Explain the difference between type I and type II superconductors using Meissner effect.
(2 x 10 = 20)
189
PH6CRT11: OPTOELECTRONICS (For Physics Main)
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Define the acceptance angle of an optical fiber.
2. Write a short note on any one application of optical fiber.
3. What is metastable state?
4. Draw the energy band diagram of n-type and p-type semiconductor.
5. What is injection electroluminescence ?
6. Write the expression for intensity of light at distance x in an absorbing medium.
7. Define the quantum efficiency of a photodetector.
8. Write a short note on photo transistor..
9. What is solar constant?
10. What is retardation plates?
11. Write a short note on magneto optic effect.
12. Write a short note on Holography.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Explain intermodal dispersion of an optical fiber.
14. Write a short note on optical resonant cavity.
15. Explain LED characteristics.
16. What are the advantages of hetero junction laser diode?
17. Write a short note on Ramo’s theorem. .
18. Explain the advantage of PIN photodiode.
19. Draw the IV characteristics of solar cell and explain.
20. What is an acousto optic modulator?
21. Explain the working of three level laser system..
(6 x 4 = 24)
190
22. An optical fiber has an acceptance angle of 30o and a core of refractive index 1.4.
Calculate the refractive index of cladding.
23. What is the conductivity of n-type Si that has been doped with 1016cm-3 phosphorus atoms,
if the drift mobility is about 1350cm2 V-1s-1?
24. A Si APD has quantum efficiency of 70% at 830nm in the absence of multiplication. The
APD is biased to operate with a multiplication of 100. If the incident optical power is
10nW what is the photocurrent?
25. A step index fiber has a core of refractive index 1.52, diameter of 29µm and fractional
index difference of 0.0007. Operating wavelength is 1.3µm. Find the number of modes
that fiber can support.
26. The wavelength of emission is 600nm and coefficient of spontaneous emission is 106/s.
Determine the coefficient for the stimulated emission.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Derive an expression for diode laser output optical power.
28. Obtain the current voltage relation of a forward biased pn junction.
29. What is Pockels effect? Explain the working of Pockels phase modulator.
30. What is Einstein’s coefficient? Obtain the relation between Einstein’s coefficients.
(2 x 10 = 20)
191
PH6CRT12: DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AND MICROPROCESSOR (For Physics Main)
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks:80
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Convert the decimal number 146.8 in to octal number.
Find the results using β’s complement technique. -55 +26
Write the truth table of XOR gate..
Draw the diagram 4 bit adder/subtractor.
Why ASCII code is required in a digital computer system?
Write a short note on minterms.
What is an encoder?
Sketch the logic system for a clocked SR flip flop.
Describe an application of decade counter.
What is an instruction cycle?
Write an example for register indirect addressing mode.
State De Morgan’s theorem.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Write the details of flag register of 8085.
Draw a neat diagram of the internal architecher of 8085
Simplify the expression F=(A’BC’)’
Write down the rules for grouping 1s in K map.
What is a multiplexer? Draw the logic diagram of 4 to 1 multiplexer.
Draw the logic diagram of 4 bit ladder D/A converter and explain.
Write the logical expression of sum and carry output of full adder in terms of its input.
Draw the block diagram of a negative edge triggered T flip flop.
What is the difference between synchronous and asynchronous counter.
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. Write a pragramme to add two eight bit numbers and result exceed 8 bit.
23. Draw the logic circuit for the logic expression F= BC(A+B+C’)’ , also simplify the expression
and draw the new logic circuit.
192
24. What is a decoder? Draw the logic diagram of 3 to 8 decoder and explain its working. Also draw
its truth table.
25. With help of diagram explain the working of positive edge triggered RS Flip Flop.
26. Draw the logic diagram and truth table for a three flip-flop ripple counter operating in countdown
mode.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Simplify the Boolean expression f(a,b,c) = Σ(0,β,γ,4,6) and f(a,b,c) = Σ(0,1,β,4,5,6,8,9,1β,1γ,14)
using K-map.
28. Explain the block diagram and working of a β’s complement adder/subtractor circuit.
29. With the aid of diagrams explain the working of binary ladder type D/A converters.
30. Describe the different types of instruction set of 8085.
(2 x 10 = 20)
193
Generic Elective Course: PH5GET01 - MATERIAL SCIENCE
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Describe the classification of engineering materials according to the mode of occurrence.
2. What is meant by dielectric strength?
3. What is plastic strain?
4. Define thermal diffusivity. What is its unit?
5. Distinguish between active and passive display devices.
6. What are the different types of metallic glasses?
7. What are shape memory alloys? Give examples.
8. Mention any two applications of shape memory alloys.
9. What are magic numbers?
10. Write a note on fullerenes.
11. Describe the principle of operation of an Atomic Force Microscope.
12. What are the drawbacks of X ray diffraction method of characterization of nanomaterials?
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. What is the relationship between structure and properties in metals, ceramics and
polymers?
14. Distinguish between microstructure and macrostructure.
15. What is impact strength? Which are the factors affecting impact strength?
16. What is ‘quench cracking’?
17. What are the merits and demerits of LCD?
18. Describe the thermo mechanical behavior of shape memory alloys.
19. Write a note on ‘quantum confinement’.
20. What are the applications of Carbon nanotubes?
21. What information can Raman spectroscopy reveal about different types of nanomaterials?
(6 x 4 = 24)
Answer any three questions. Each question carries 6 marks
22. Describe the principle of numeric display using LCD
194
23. What are the applications of metallic glasses?
24. What is ‘creep’? Draw creep curve and describe various periods of a creep.
25. What are colour centers? How are they generated?
26. Describe the characterization mechanism of a Transmission Electron Microscope. What
is selected area diffraction (SAD)?
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Describe spark test and bend test for the identification of metals and alloys.
28. Discuss different types of liquid crystals and their properties.
29. Outline the different types of optical absorption processes of materials.
30. (i). Describe the principle, construction and working of a Scanning Tunneling
Microscope
(ii). Which are the different operational modes of STM?
(iii). Mention the advantages and disadvantages of an STM.
(2 x 10 = 20)
195
Generic Elective Course: PH5GET02 - COMPUTATIONAL PHYSICS
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. State the General Newton Raphson Method
2. State fixed point theorem and the fixed point iteration formula.
3. What are the advantages of iterative methods over direct method of solving a system of linear
algebraic equations?
4. Can we apply iteration method to find the root of the equation 2x- cos x= 5 in {0, pi/2}?
5. State the condition for the convergence of Gauss Seidel iteration method for solving a system of
linear equation
6. What do you mean by numerical differentiation?
7. Why is Trapezoidal rule so called?
8. Write Simpson’s γ /8 rule , assuming γn intervals
9. State Simpson’s one third rule.
10. Write down the order of the errors of trapezoidal rule.
11. State the formula for 2 – point Gaussian quadrature.
12. State Euler’s iteration formula for ordinary differential equation.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. State the condition & order for convergence of Newton – Raphson method
14. Compare Simpson’s γ /8 rule and Simpson’s one third rule.
15. Find the positive root of x + 5x -3 = 0 using fixed point iteration method starting with 0.6 as first
2
approximation
16. In numerical integration , what should be the number of intervals to apply Simpson’s one
– third rule and Simpson’s three – eighths rule.
17. State Romberg’s integration formula to find the value of I =∫
18. Evaluate ∫
�
19. Given � =
+
−
2
using h & h / 2.
using trapezoidal rule and Simpson’s 3 / 8th rules.
, where y(0)=2 find y(0.1) for 4 decimals.
20. Derive the Newton–Raphson method for finding the roots of the equation.
21. What is the Criterion for the convergence of Newton’s – Raphson method
(6 x 4 = 24)
196
22. Find the root of the equation f(x)=x3-x-1 using the bisection method?..
23. By Gauss Elimination method solve (i)x + y =2 and 2x + 3y = 5 (ii) 2x – y =1 , x – 3y +2 = 0
(iii) x – 2y = 0 , 2x + y = 5
24. Find the first iteration values of x, y, z by Gauss seidel method
28x 4y z 32; x 3y 10z 24; 2x 17y 4z 35
25. Use the method of false position find the root of x3-2x-5 = 0.
26. Use R-K method of second order to find y (0.4) given y’=xy, y(0) = 1
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. i) Find the positive real root of 3x – cos x – 1 = 0 using Newton – Raphson method. (ii) Find the
dominant eigen value and vector of A =(
6
) using Power method
28. (i) Find the iterative formula to find √� where N is positive integer using Newton’s method and
hence find√
3x+y+4z =17
29. Evaluate ∫
. (ii) Solve by Gauss Elimination method x + 5y +z =14 ; 2x + y + 3z = 13 ;
�
+
in the interval [0,1] using trapezoidal rule with 2, 4 subintervals.
30. Write down Algorithm and MATLAB or Octave program to solve non linear equation
f(x)=x2-x-3 by using Newton Raphson method.
197
Generic Elective Course: PH5GET03 - INSTRUMENTATION
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
What is a transducer?
Explain primary transducer and secondary transducer with an example.
Define resolution.
What is a rosette?
Explain the working principle of constant-current hot-wire anemometer.
What are the requirements of a conducting material to be used as a RTD?
Explain the working of a variable reluctance transducer.
Draw the equivalent circuit of piezo-electric transducers.
A platinum thermometer has a resistance of 100 at 25 OC. Find its resistance at 65 OC if the
platinum has a resistance-temperature coefficient of 0.00392/OC.
10. What is meant by RVDT?
11. Draw resistance-temperature characteristics for a thermistor.
12. What is a load cell?
(9 x 2 = 18)
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Define selectivity and specificity. How are they related?
Explain the working and V-I characteristics of a photodiode.
Describe the dynamic charecteristics of a sensor.
How a bath tub curve associated with failure of transducers?
What do you mean by minimum detectable signal? If the input noise of a sensor is sinusoidal in
nature with a peak to peak value of 0.1 mV, what would be the MDS?
What are thermistors? Explain their different forms of construction.
Describe the foil type strain gauges and explain their advantages over wire wound strain gauges.
Draw the equivalent circuit of piezo-electric transducers.
Write a brief note on capacitor microphone.
(6 x 4 = 24)
22.
23.
24.
25.
How synchros are used as torque transmitters?
What are the applications of Hall Effect transducers?
Describe with neat sketch the bellows type primary detecting elements.
Describe the different classifications of instruments.
198
26. Explain how a Pitot tube can be used for measurement of flow. Describe how the velocity profile
of a liquid flowing in a pipe is taken care of in the measurements when using Pitot tubes.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27.
28.
29.
30.
Explain the various elements of a generalized measurement system.
Describe the various sensor characterization methods.
Discuss the various types of capacitive transducers. What are their advantages and disadvantages?
Describe the different criteria for selection of transducers for a particular application.
(2 x 10 = 20)
199
Choice Based Course: PH6CBT01 - NANOSCIENCE AND NANOTECHNOLOGY
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. What are metallic glasses? How are they formed?
2. Describe laser pyrolysis technique for the synthesis of thin films.
3. What is the mechanism of heating in a microwave apparatus? Mention its advantages.
4. What are colloids? Give examples.
5. Define Atomic scattering factor?
6. What is meant by an Auger electron?
7. Mention some peculiar properties of aerogels.
8. Which are the different generations of solar cells?
9. Write a note on injection luminescence.
10. What are super paramagnetic particles? Explain their magnetization behavior.
11. Distinguish between giant magneto resistance and Colossal magneto resistance
12. Mention some applications of nanotechnology in textile industry.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Describe molecular beam epitaxy.
14. What is stearic hindrance?
15. What are surfactants? Describe different types of surfactants?
16. Give the principle of FTIR spectrometer. What is its advantage?
17. Which are the different types of clusters?
18. What is Coulomb blockade?
19. What are zeolites? How are they synthesized?
20. Write a note on Graphene and its properties.
21. Write a note on metamaterials
(6 x 4 = 24)
200
22. With a schematic, describe the basic concept of Chemical vapour deposition process.
23. Explain how semiconductor nanoparticles are synthesized by colloidal route.
24. Describe the three different modes of operation of an AFM.
25. What are the factors affecting the porous structure of porous silicon?
26. What are the applications of nanomaterials in space and defense?
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. What is sputter deposition? Describe the basic principles and advantages of various types
of sputtering.
28. Discuss (i) Sol-Gel method (ii) Hydrothermal synthesis (iii) sonochemical synthesis of
nanomaterials.
29. Discuss the principle and operation of Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM) and
Transmission Electron Microscope (TEM).
30. What are carbon nanotubes? Describe their structure and different methods of synthesis.
(2 x 10 = 20)
201
Choice Based Course: PH6CBT02 - RENEWABLE ENERGY
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
State the significance of renewable energy sources.
What is biomass? Explain.
What is a solar panel?
What are the advantages of wind energy?
What is meant by geothermal energy?
What is a solar pond?
What is ocean thermal energy?
Explain the principle of biogas plant.
How tidal energy can be used to generate electricity?
What is diffused radiation?
Give the advantages of Hydrogen cells.
Define solar insolation.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Write a note on solar radiation spectrum.
Name and explain various sources of energy.
What are the basic components of wind energy conversion system?
What are the constituents of biogas? Explain.
Distinguish between flat plate collector and concentrating collector.
How community biogas plant works?
Write a note on solar space heating.
What are advantages of using Hydrogen cells?
Write a note on the environmental aspects of wind energy.
(6 x 4 = 24)
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
With the help of a neat diagram explain the working of a solar water heater.
Explain different methods to produce Hydrogen.
What are the advantages and disadvantages of wind energy?
Describe the working of a fixed dome type biogas plant with the help of a diagram.
Give an account of different type of concentrating type solar energy collectors.
(3 x 6 = 18)
202
27. Explain different methods to generate electricity using Ocean Thermal Energy.
28. Name two basic types of instruments used for measuring intensity of solar radiation. What is
meant by total solar radiation?
29. With a neat sketch explain the basic working principle of a tidal power plant.
30. Give a detailed account of the utilization of geothermal energy.
(2 x 10 = 20)
203
Choice Based Course: PH6CBT03: ASTRONOMY AND ASTROPHYSICS
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. (a) Define light year. (b) Define A.U.
2. What is Sidereal period?
3. Why do we have different seasons on earth?
4. What is International date line?
5. Define the magnifying power of a telescope.
6. What is meant by inflation in Cosmology?
7. What is Chandrasekhar limit?
8. Define luminosity of a star.
9. What is CMBR?
10. Define diurnal motion.
11. What are variable stars?
12. Even light can not come out of a Black Hole. Why?
(9 x 2 = 18)
1. What is meant by Big Bang nucleosynthesis?
2. Distinguish between Solar flare and prominence.
3. What are the properties of photosphere?
4. Describe the Stellar classification.
5. Explain the main features of H-R diagram.
6. Distinguish between absolute and apparent magnitude.
7. Discuss about the equatorial mounts of telescopes.
8. Write down the nuclear chain reactions involved in CNO cycle.
9. Describe the nature and importance of Sunspots.
(6 x 4 = 24)
204
22. Calculate the age of the universe if the Hubble's constant is 68km/sec/Mpc.
23. Explain how parallax method can be used to determine stellar distances.
24. Discuss the classification of galaxies.
25. Venus is about 104 times brighter than the dimmest visible star. If the magnitude of the
dimmest visible star is +6, what is the magnitude of Venus?
26. What is Schwarzchild radius? Determine the Schwarzchild radius of a black hole with 6 solar
mass.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Define Celestial sphere. Briefly discuss about the celestial coordinate systems.
28. Briefly explain the evolution of stars.
29. “tate a d e plai Hu
le s la of e pa sio of the u i erse a d the o ept of os ologi al
redshift.
30. What are the uses of optical telescopes? Describe Refracting and Reflecting telescopes.
(2 x 10 = 20)
205
APPLIED ELECTRONICS (MODEL 2)
I SEMESTER B. Sc. DEGREE (CBCS) EXAMINATION MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Vocational Course: AE1VOT01 - PRINCIPLES OF ELECTRONICS
(For B. Sc. Physics Model II Applied Electronics Programme)
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Explain the tolerance in resistors. Write the colour code of a resistor of 910 Ω with 5%
tolerance.
2. Explain the working of an LED.
3. What are the differences between AF and RF transformers?
4. What is a transducer? How they are broadly classified into two groups?
5. What is the need of impedance matching between two circuits? What do you mean by
coefficient of coupling?
6. Explain how wattless current is obtained.
7. Differentiate between potentiometer and rheostat.
8. Why is an electrolytic capacitor polarized? Name the dielectric in electrolytic capacitor.
Give the merits and demerits of that dielectric.
9. Describe the important specifications of resistor.
10. Distinguish between ordinary transformer and power transformer.
11. Explain why a capacitor blocks direct current and voltage.
12. What is a fuse? Draw the fusing characteristic.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Derive an expression for effective capacitance when two capacitors are connected in
series and parallel.
14. Explain and differentiate between momentary contact action and maintained contact
action switch.
15. Explain the working principle of a circuit breaker.
16. Write a short note on losses associated with transformers.
17. What is the principle and applications of reed relay?
18. Explain the working of piezoelectric transducer.
19. Explain the operation of moving coil microphone.
20. Describe how capacitance is measured using Universal Bridge.
21. Explain the construction of a paper capacitor.
(6 x 4 = 24)
206
22. A ceramic has a plate area of 0.2m2. Determine the thickness of the dielectric, if the
capacitance value is 0.47 μF. Take dielectric constant of ceramic as 1β00.
23. A step down transformer has turns ratio 15 and has 6 Volt across 0.γ Ω secondary.
Calculate the primary and secondary currents.
24. Explain the constructional details of an electrolytic capacitor. Explain its specialities.
25. A choke coil consists of 150 turns wound on a high permeability core. If μr= γ000, μo = 4
x 10-7 H/m, coil length is 6 cm, and cross sectional area is 5 x 10-4m2, find the value of
coil inductance.
26. Calculate the impedance and phase angle of a coil connected across 200 V, 50 Hz ac
supply, if the resistance of the coil is 50Ω and its inductance is β50 mH.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. With neat diagrams, describe the method of manufacture of different types of resistors.
Discuss the important feature of each type.
28. With neat constructional diagrams, discuss the working principle of two different types of
LCDs. Show how the seven segment display is realized.
29. Define inductance of an inductor. Describe how energy is stored in inductors. Explain the
inductance measurement by universal bridge method.
30. Give an account of different types of switches.
(2 x 10 = 20)
207
Vocational Course: AE1VOT02 - ELECTRONIC APPLICATIONS
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. What is a tuning circuit? Explain its operating characteristics.
2. Explain the use of a thermister type transducer for the measurement of temperature.
3. Sketch the ideal characteristics of LPF, HPF,BPFand BSF.
4. How is recording on compact discs done?
5. Describe the following terms with reference to a time base signal:
a) Sweep Time b) Flyback Time c) Slope Error d) Sweep speed
6. What is a phototransistor? How it differs from an ordinary transistor.
7. Explain the different types of PCBs.
8. What is a father disc? How it is different from a mother disc.
9. Explain why a delay line is used in the vertical section of an oscilloscope?
10. List the advantages and disadvantages of LVDT.
11. Explain the basic principle of a PMMC meter.
12. What is recurrent sweep in CRO.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Explain why you need a saw tooth voltage to display a sine wave on a CRO screen. Explain how
the display takes place.
14. Explain one method of generating a time base waveform.
15. Describe the variable density method of optical recording of sound of films.
16. Discuss the construction and working of a thermocouple.
17. Briefly describe the construction of PCB.
18. Explain the series and parallel LCR resonance with necessary graphs.
19. With neat diagram, explain the working of Digital Multi Meter.
20. With neat sketches explain the working of moving coil microphone.
21. Describe the variable density method of optical recording of sound of films.
(6 x 4 = 24)
208
22. Calculate the frequency at which maximum current flows through a series RLC circuit containing
a resistance of 4Ω, an inductance of ββ0mH, and a capacitance of 470PF?
23. The resistance of a 10mH coil is 10 Ω. Calculate the Q factor of the coil at 5 KHz.
24. A 41/2 digit voltmeter is used for voltage measurements:
a) Calculate its resolution.
b) How the voltage value of 11.11V will be displayed on a 10V range.
c) How 0.1234V would be displayed on 1V and 10V ranges.
25. An RLC series circuit is connected to a 240V r.m.s power supply at a frequency of
2.5KHz.The elements in the circuit have the following values:
R= 12 Ω, C= 0.β5µF, and L= 15.βmH.
a) What is the impedance of the circuit?
b) What is the r.m.s current and phase angle
26. A CRO with a sensitivity of 5V/cm is used. An a.c voltage is applied to the Y-input .A 10cm long
straight line is observed. Determine the a.c voltage.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Describe the principle of recording and reproduction of sound on a disc by a laser beam.
28. With a neat circuit diagram and necessary wave forms, describe the working of a Bootstrap Sweep
circuit.
29. Explain in detail the different parts of the cathode Ray Oscilloscope.
30. What is a transducer? Explain LVDT and Microphones with necessary diagrams.
(2 x 10 = 20)
209
Vocational Course: AE2VOT03 - BASICS OF POWER ELECTRONICS
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Draw the transconductance characteristics and account for the shape of the curves.
2. What are the differences between a JFET and a bipolar transistor?
3. How do you set a Q-point in a self biased JFET.
4. Give a comparison between JFET and MOSFET.
5. Why FET is called a voltage controlled device.
6. Why MOSFET is sometimes a IGFET.
7. Why a MOSFET can be operated with positive and negative gate voltage, but not a JFET?
8. Write the definitions of four JFET parameters.
9. Why is the input impedance of a MOSFET much higher than a JFET?
10. Sketch the circuit symbols of enhancement and depletion type MOSFET.
11. Explain gate biasing for JFET.
12. Give comparison between N-channel MOSFETs over P-channel.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Draw the experimental setup to plot the drain characteristics for JFET.Explain the shape of the
characteristics
14. Explain the following terms for a JFET:
a) IDSS b) Drain Resistance c) Transconductance d) Pinch off voltage
15. Explain the biasing of enhancement and depletion type MOSFET.
16. Briefly explain common drain JFET amplifier with circuit diagram.
17. Draw and explain the drain and transfer characteristics of Enhancement type MOSFET.
18. With the help of connection diagrams explain how (i)E- MOSFET and (ii)D-MOSFET can be
used as resistor.
19. What is transconductance of a JFET? Derive the mathematical expression.
20. Explain the effect of external source resistance on the voltage gain of a common source amplifier?
21.Compare between JFET and BJT ,giving reasons.
210
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. For an N-channel JFET IDSS = 8.7mA; Vp= -3V; VGS= -1V. Find the values of (i) ID (ii)gmo (iii)gm .
23. A gate biased JFET amplifier has RD = β.βKΩ , Ra = 1MΩ , VDD = 15V, VGG = -2V,IDSS = 8mA,
Vp= -8V.Calculate: (i) ID (ii) VDS (iii) VGS.
24. Sketch the transfer characteristics for an N- channel Depletion type MOSFET with IDSS = 10mA
and Vp = -4V.
25. In a JFET amplifier gm = 4000µ mho , RL = β0 KΩ RD = 5MΩ.Calculate the voltage gain.
26. A common drain JFET amplifier circuit has R1= γMΩ, R2 = 1.βMΩ, Rs = βKΩ, R4= β0KΩ,
gm = 2.5m mho. Calculate its input resistance and output resistance.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. With neat cross-sectional diagram, explain the working of a JFET? Sketch its drain and
transconductance characteristics and explain their shapes.
28. Discuss the construction and working of the depletion type and enhancement type MOSFETs.
29. Explain with circuit diagram and small signal model common source JFET amplifier and derive
expression for voltage gain.
30. Explain the need for biasing JFET. Draw and explain voltage divider bias and source bias of
JFET.
(2 x 10 = 20)
211
Vocational Course: AE2VOT04 - POWER ELECTRONICS
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Distinguish between holding current and latching current.
2. Why SCR can be fabricated of using only Silicon, but not Germanium?
3. Draw the diode model of a thyristor and mention what is the necessity of gate.
4. List the various applications of SCR.
5. Distinguish between SCR and TRIAC.
6. What is intrinsic stand off ratio?
7. What is SBS? Why it is preferred over DIAC for triggering SCR?
8. What is SCS? How it is different from SCR?
9. What is firing angle?
10. What is false triggering?
11. What is meant by forward current rating of an SCR?
12. How power control is achieved by SCR?
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Explain the different methods to turn-ON an SCR.
14. Draw the two transistor model of an SCR. Derive an equation for anode current.
15. Discuss the operation and characteristics of a DIAC.
16. What is negative resistance of UJT? How it occurs?
17. Explain the working of Silicon Asymmetrical Switch.
18. How SCR is used as a half-wave rectifier?
19. Explain the working of a push – pull inverter.
20. Explain the working of a 180° variable half wave rectifier.
21. Draw the equivalent circuit, and circuit symbol of SAS. List its applications.
(6 x 4 = 24)
212
22. A d.c. power supply of 110V feeds an inductance of 10H through a thyristor. Calculate the
minimum width of the gate pulse so that the thyristor is triggered. The latching current of the
thyristor is 70mA.
23. The intrinsic stand –off ratio for an UJT is 0.65. Its interbase resistance is 10KΩ. Calculate the
values of the interbase resistances.
β4. A UJT relaxation oscillator has R=60KΩ and C= 0.β5µF. Determine the pulse repetition
frequency. Take intrinsic stand-off ration to be 0.65.
25. A single-phase half wave rectifier circuit using a thyristor is fed by a transformer whose
secondary voltage is γ00sinωt. Calculate the average load current if the load resistance is 50Ω.
26. The forward break down voltage of an SCR is 150V when a gate current of 1mA flows in the gate
circuit. Calculate the firing angle, average output voltage and current for a load resistor of 200
ohms when a sinusoidal voltage of 400V peak is applied to it.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. With a neat constructional cross- sectional diagram, describe the working of a TRIAC. Sketch
and explain its V-I characteristics.
28. With neat constructional details, explain the working of UJT. Explain the V-I characteristics.
29. Explain the forward and reverse characteristics of an SCR. How the forward break over voltage
changes with gate current? What are the methods to turn off an SCR?
30. With necessary circuit diagram and waveforms, explain the operation of a single –phase fully
controlled bridge rectifier using SCR. Derive an expression for the average output voltage
assuming continuous conduction mode.
(2 x 10 = 20)
213
Vocational Course: PH3VOT05 - LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Explain the function a comparator?
2. Give the benefits of negative feedback.
3. Explain the voltage follower circuit.
4. What are different terminals of op-amp? Explain the polarity conventions used.
5. What is CMRR for an op-amp? Explain slew rate.
6. Why open loop op-amp circuits are not used in linear applications?
7. Draw the circuit diagram of a voltage follower. In what way is the voltage follower a special
case of the non-inverting amplifier.
8. Explain band pass and notch filter.Sketch its gain versus frequency curves.
9. Why quartz crystal commonly used in crystal oscillator.
10. Briefly explain the rolls of a low pass filter and VCO in PLLs.
11. Draw the circuit diagram of an integrator using op-amp. Label it neatly.
12. What are the two basic modes in which the 555 timer operates? Why normally the control
terminal of 555 is connected to ground through a 0.01μF capacitor.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Explain the following terms of an op amp.,(a) Bandwidth (b) Input offset voltage (c) Input
offset current (d)Input bias current
14. (a)Give the characteristics of an ideal Op-amp.(b) Draw the block diagram of Op-amp
15. Why are active filters preferred? Differentiate low pass and high pass filters.
16. Explain the basic timing concept of timer IC.
17. Explain how IC555monostable multi-vibrator works as a frequency divider.
18. Define lock range and capture range of PLL. Give its applications.
19. Briefly explain the operation of differential amplifier.
20. Draw op-amp based circuits of: a) Wein Bridge Oscillator b) Colpitt’s Oscillator
214
21. Explain the characteristics of audio amplifier. Give its circuit diagram.
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. It is decided to get a divide by 2 operations from a 555 timer circuit. If the trigger signal
frequency is 4 KHz and C=0.01μF what should be the value of RA.
23. An op-amp has a CMRR of 90dB. If its differential voltage gain is 30,000 calculate it
common-mode gain.
24. For the non-inverting amplifier shown, find the values of closed loop gain (ACL), Common
Mode Rejection Ratio (CMRR) and the maximum operating frequency.
25. With a circuit diagram show how 555 can be used as a VCO.
26. Note on (a) Differentiator
(b) The input to the differentiator circuit is a sinusoidal voltage of peak value 5mV
and frequency 1KHz. Find the output voltage. Where R=100KΩ and C=1μF.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Explain differential amplifier. Obtain its voltage gain and output voltage.
28. What is meant by an op-amp? How can it used as inverting and non-inverting amplifier.
Obtain the expression for their voltage gain.
29. Describe the operating principle of Phase Locked Loops. What the main components which
combined in a PLL. Explain its working.
30. (a) Draw the circuit diagram of triangular wave generator using op-amp and explain its
working with appropriate waveforms.
(b)Draw the circuit diagram of square wave relaxation oscillator using op-amp and
appropriate waveforms.
(2 x 10 = 20)
215
Vocational Course: PH3VOT06 - COMMUNICATION ELECTRONICS
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Why modulation is necessary for communication
2. Explain the basic elements of communication system?
3. Give the relevance of skip distance and MUF
4. Define frequency modulation and its modulation index
5. What are the common antenna parameters?
6. Differentiate step index and graded index optical fiber.
7. What is fading? What are the major causes for fading?
8. Explain super heterodyning.
9. Explain the principle of Radar.
10. List four polar uses for microwaves in communication.
11. Explain the effects of an AM, whose percentage modulation is greater than 100%.
12. Define noise. List any four types.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Compare AM and FM in all aspects.
14. With the help of sketches explain the operations of a Yagi-Uda antenna.
15. Draw the block diagram of a basic radar set and explain its operations.
16. Prove that the phase discriminator is an FM demodulator.
17. With the help of a neat diagram explain the super heterodyne AM radio receiver.
18. Describe the operation of picture scanning in a color TV system.
19. Compare PPM and PWM.
20. Explain the interlaced scanning in color TV system.
21. Bring out the basic functions of a radio transmitter and the corresponding functions of the
receiver.
(6 x 4 = 24)
216
22. A I kW carrier is modulated to a depth of 80% to create an amplitude modulated wave. Calculate:
(i) Total power in the modulated wave (ii) power in sidebands.
23. Find the carrier and modulating frequencies, the modulation index and the maximum deviation of
the FM wave represented by the voltage equation V= 12sin (6x10
8
t + 5sin 1250t). What is the
power dissipated by this FM wave through a 15ohm resistance.
24. Two points on earth 1500km apart and are to communicate by means of HF. Given that
this is a single-hop transmission, the critical frequency at that time is 7MHz.Calculate the
maximum usable frequency for those two points if the height of the ionosphere layer is
300km.
25. Determine the length of an antenna operating at a frequency of 500kHz.
26. The tuned circuit of the oscillator in a simple AM transmitter employs a 50µH coil and a
1nF capacitor. If the oscillator output is modulated by audio frequencies upto 10kHz,
What is the frequency range occupied by the side bands.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Discuss the propagation of radio waves as ground waves , skywaves and space waves with
necessary diagrams.
28. Explain amplitude modulation and modulation index. Discuss the AM waveform and side bands
in it.
29. With a neat block diagram Explain the working of PAL colour TV receiver system.
30. Draw the circuit diagrams of slope detector and phase discriminator and compare their
performances.
(2 x 10 = 20)
217
Vocational Course: AE4VOT07 - MICROPROCESSOR AND INTERFACING DEVICES
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Explain the function of the program counter?
2. Assume (3000) = 05H and (3001) = 03 H. What are the contents of H and L registers after the
execution of LHLD 3000 H? Explain.
3. Explain the control word format of 8255.
4. Explain the flag register in 8085.
5. Explain the BSR mode of 8255.
6. Explain stack. What happens to the value of stack pointer of 8085 when POP instruction is
executed?
7. What is an interrupt? Differentiate between mask able and non- mask able interrupts.
8. What are various registers of 8085 microprocessor?
9. Explain the use of cascading pins of 8259.
10. What is the function of stack pointer? How it works?
11. Explain I/O ports and the interfacing of I/O device through I/O port.
12. Explain instruction cycle , machine cycle and timing diagram.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Explain various data transfer schemes in 8085.
14. Describe the immediate addressing procedure for 8085 with necessary examples.
15. Explain the following
(a) sub routine
(b) Memory mapped I/O scheme and I/O mapped I/O scheme
16. Distinguish between PUSH and POP instruction. Show the stack position before and after
PUSH and POP operation.
17. Briefly explain various addressing modes of 8085 with example.
18. Explain various methods used for debugging of microprocessor programs.
19. If 8085 adds 87H and 79 H, specify the contents of accumulator and the status of S, Z and CY
flags.
218
20. Explain the functions of the following pins of 8085 :
(b) ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
INTA
(a) SOD
(c) HLDA
̅
(d) IO/M
21. Explain the various techniques used to specify data for instructions.
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. Explain the complete action when the following instructions are executed.
(a) DAD H.
(b) MOV A, M
(c) PUSH D.
(d) SUB M
23. Draw and explain the waveforms of the write operations in 8085. How many machine cycle
and T states are needed?
24. With the help of schematic diagram explain the Programmable Interrupt Controller.
25. Make the control word for the following configuration of ports of 8255 for mode 1 operation.
Port A – input, Mode of Port A – Mode 1, Port B – output, Mode of Port B – Mode 1, Port
Cupper – input.
26. Calculate the time needed to execute the program given below:
Instruction
States
MVI
7
DCR
4
JNZ
10/7
RET
10
Time period for one clock cycle is 320 ns.
(3 x 6 = 18)
Answer any two questions. Each question carries 10 marks
27. Explain with necessary examples how the various instructions in 8085 are classified. Clearly
explain the functions of each group.
28. With neat block diagram explain the architecture of 8085.
29. Draw the block diagram of PPI 8255 and explain the function of each block. Explain its
various operating modes.
30. Draw the functional block diagram of 8257 and explain each block. Illustrate the mode set
register and status word register formats of 8257.
(2 x 10 = 20)
219
Vocational Course: AE4VOT08 - APPLICATIONS OF MICROPROCESSORS
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. What are the functions of the Accumulator and B-register in 8051?
2. Explain the structure of PSW of 8051.
3. How is register bank selected in 8051?
4. Describe a temperature control scheme using microprocessor.
5. Explain different flags of 8051.
6. Explain the memory system of 8051.
7. Explain the function of the following pins of 8085(a) TXD (b) T1 (c) EA (d) ALE
8. Compare Z80 and 8051.
9. Describe the oscillator circuit and timing of the 8051 microcontroller.
10. Explain IO ports in 8051.
11. With the help of block diagram compare microprocessor and microcontroller.
12. List the bit addressable registers in 8051.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Explain how stack is implemented in the 8051 microcontroller.
14. How internal RAM is organized in 8051.
15. Describe special function registers.
16. Note on (a) Programme counter (b) Data Pointer
17. Explain the specific features of 8051 architecture.
18. Explain Timer 0 and Timer 1 operation modes.
19. Discuss the serial data transmission modes of 8051.
20. Note on the interrupts of 8051 microcontroller.
21. Draw the timer/ counter control logic.
(6 x 4 = 24)
220
22. Show how 8051 and an external memory of16K EPROM and 8K of static RAM is interfaced.
23. Explain TCON and TMOD function registers.
24. Explain IE and IP function registers
25. Name the following (a) Registers that can do division (b) Address of the stack when the 8051
is reset. (c) The 16- bit data addressing registers. (d) The register that holds the serial data
interrupt bits (e) Flags that stored in the PSW (f) Internal Rom size
26. Explain the alternate function of Port 3.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. With a neatblock diagram explain various units and their functions, in 8051.
28. Explain the programming model and Pin diagram of 8051 with necessary diagrams.
29. Design a traffic control system for a junction of4 roads.Also writes the assembly language
programme for the same.
30. What is interfacing? Explain the process of interfacing of 8085 microprocessor and stepper
motor with neat diagram.
(2 x 10 = 20)
221
COMPUTER APPLICATIONS (MODEL 2)
Vocational Course: CA1VOT01 - COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS
(For B. Sc. Physics Model II Computer Applications Programme)
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. What are the fundamental difference between Analog and Digital Computers?
2. What is the decimal equivalent of CAC ₁₆?
3. Convert (11001)2 into hexadecimal.
4. What are the things that should be taken care of before closing window?
5. What is EEPROM?
6. What is abacus?
7. What is information?
8. What is the use of light pen?
9. Define RAM.
10. What is the hexadecimal equivalent of 567 8?
11. What is the capacity of a floppy disk?
12. Na e t o utilit soft are s.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Discuss the ai features of s ste soft are s.
14. Differentiate between Software and Hardware.
15. Explain Cache memory.
16. What are the things that should be taken care of before closing window?
17. What is a mainframe computer?
18. Explain Holierith s Ma hi e.
19. Explain the working of sheet fed scanner.
20. What is expansion bus?
21. Explain the working of dot matrix printer.
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. How do you add two decimal numbers in the BCD form, if it is greater than 9? Explain
with suitable examples.
222
23. Encode the following numbers in BCD:(a)
(567)10
(b) (11001)2
(c) (2176)8
(d) (ABC)16
24. Explain the important features of Supercomputer and Mainframe
25. Perform the following arithmetic operation without changing the number system:(a)
(4565.22)8 + (213.22)8
(b)
(AB1F.DB)16 + (38AC.72)16
(c)
(111011)2 – (100111)2
26. a Add the follo i g de i al u ers usi g s o ple e t ethod : a d
( “u tra t the follo i g de i al u ers usi g s o ple e t ethod: +
– (+6)
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. What are the different generations of computers? Explain.
28. Draw the functional Block diagram and explain working of Digital Computer.
29. (a) Convert the following octal numbers into hexadecimal numbers:(i)
0.235 (ii) 125.601 (iii) 53.0032 (iv) 210.101
(b) Convert the following hexadecimal numbers into binary numbers:(i)
3A102.D3
(ii) CDFF
(iii) 0.1DFC
(iv) 1234B.3D
(c) Convert the following decimal numbers into binary numbers:(i) 7762.11 (ii) 1234.123
(iii) 0.1254
(iv) 6655
30. What are the different classifications of software based on their license?
(2 x 10 = 20)
223
Vocational Course: CA1VOT02 - OPERATING SYSTEM AND COMPUTER NETWORKS
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. What is an operating system?
2. What is time sharing operating system?
3. Define LAN and PAN.
4. What is the use of gateways in networking?
5. What is the purpose of using command “type” ?
6. What is meant by client server architecture?
7. What is CPU bound process?
8. What is micro kernel?
9. Differentiate between Next fit and Worst fit algorithms.
10. Define the term LRU
11. What is the purpose of using repeaters in context of networking?
12. What is a process?
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Explain different types of schedulers?
14. What is context switching?
15. Explain round robin scheduling.
16. Explain process state diagram.
17. What is Ethernet?
18. What is meant by real time operating systems?
19. What are the different strategies using in fixed memory partition?
20. What is virtual memory?
21. Explain the word “protocol”.
(6 x 4 = 24)
224
22. Explain physical topology of networks.
23. Explain external fragmentation and internal fragmentation with an example.
24. List various functions performed by an operating system.
25. Memory partitions of 100KB, 500KB, 200KB, 300KB, 600KB (in order) are available.
How would best fit, worst fit, first fit and next fit algorithm place processes of 212KB,
417KB, 112KB and 426KB (in order)? Which algorithm makes the most efficient use of
memory?
26. Explain the external and internal commands of MS-DOS with five examples?
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. What do you mean by scheduling? What are the scheduling strategies commonly
adopted by operating systems?
28. List four distinct resources of computer system. What are the general functions that the
OS performs on these resources?
29. Consider the following page reference string:
2, 3, 4, 2, 1, 5, 6, 2, 1, 2, 3, 7, 6, 3, 2, 1,4,1,1
How many page faults would occur for LRU, FIFO and optimal replacement algorithms?
Assume one, two, three, and four frames? All frames are initially empty. Find the hit and miss
ratio for each algorithm for all the frame size
30. Consider the following set of six processes, with arrival time and burst time as given below
5
3
2
2
1
2
3
7
5
7
1
Priority(Consider only
for priority scheduling)
6
3
2
1
5
6
4
3
4
Process Name Arrival Time Burst Time
P
P
P
P
P
P
1
2
3
4
Draw Gantt charts illustrating the execution of these processes using FCFS, STRF
(preemptive SJF), Preemptive priority (a smaller priority number implies a higher
priority) and Round Robin (Time slice/time quantum=2) scheduling. Find the average
TAT and average waiting time for each algorithm?
(2 x 10 = 20)
225
Vocational Course: CA2VOT03 - WORD AND DATA PROCESSING PACKAGES
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Define record.
2. Define file.
3. What is the use of Print Preview option?
4. Define workbook and spreadsheet.
5. What is Control Palette?
6. What is a word processor?
7. What are the steps to print a document?
8. What are the different ways to select the entire document?
9. How to insert clip art in word?
10. What are the steps to add Header and Footer toolbar method?
11. Explain the process of finding a text in Excel?
12. What is the need of page break?
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. How do you create Pivot tables?
14. Describe Master pages in Page Maker?
15. What is the use of find and replace option?
16. What are the steps to create a chart?
17. Explain the use of computers for business applications.
18. What is the function of UNDO command? Give an example.
19. How will you insert a Word Art in Word?
20. How to roll back your document to the previous state?
21. How to insert commands in excel?
(6 x 4 = 24)
226
22. What is a spreadsheet? Give important features of the spreadsheet.
23. Write a note on fill and stroke options in Page Maker?
24. Explain the various methods of paragraph formatting in Page Maker.
25. Explain the various options available for bulleting in MS-Word.
26. Describe the various file formats supported by MS-Word.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. What is Control Palette? Explain its functions and applications with respect to
characters in Page Maker.
28. Explain Indenting text, Tab stops, Line spacing, Paragraph spacing, borders and
shading
29. Explain mail merge facility of MS-Word with example.
30. Describe the types of charts available in MS-Excel.
(2 x 10 = 20)
227
Vocational Course: CA2VOT04 - PROGRAMMING IN ANSI C
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. How to execute a C program?
2. What is an identifier?
3. What is the relationship between an assignment statement and an expression?
4. What are C tokens? Give examples.
5. From what parts of a program can a function be called?
6. When do you need a variable?
7. What is meant by recursion?
8. What is a unary operator?
9. What is the mini u
u
er of ti es that a do- hile loop a
e e e uted?
10. What is a pre-processor directive?
11. What is a global variable?
12. What is the range of integer data type in C?
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Describe the structure of a C program.
14. Describe the two different ways that floating point constants can be written, with the help
of examples.
15. Find any errors in the program and correct them:
#include(sdio.h)
{
Void main()
pri tf C Progra
i g
return 0
}
16. How can individual array elements be distinguished from one another?
228
17. What happens when the value of the e pressio i the s it h state e t
at hes the
value of one of the case labels? What happens when the value of this expression does not
match any of the case labels?
18. Write a program to find the solutions of a quadratic equation
19. What is the purpose of the o trol stri g i a s a f fu tio ?
20. Write a program to calculate the area of a rectangle.
21. Write a program to calculate the factorial of a given number.
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. How can we classify C functions?
23. Write a function in C to check whether a given integer is prime or not.
24. Gi e the ge eral for
of s it h a d e plai it usi g a e a ple.
25. Write a C program to find the sum of all even numbers between 1 and 100.
26. Show the storage of two dimensional array in memory with the help of a diagram.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Explain precedence and associativity with examples. What is their importance?
28. Discuss the scope and lifetime of variables in functions. Explain with examples.
29. E plai i detail eed a d ele e ts of user defi ed fu tio ? Also e plai
ultifu tio
program.
30. Given are two one dimensional arrays A and B which are sorted in ascending order. Write a
program to merge them into a single sorted array D that contains every item from arrays A
and B, in ascending order.
(2 x 10 = 20)
229
Vocational Course: CA3VOT05 - CONCEPTS OF OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. What is the “newline” operator in C++?
2. Which operator is used to send output data to the screen?
3. Why do we need the pre-processor directive #include<process.h>?
4. What is the use of dot operator in C++?
5. Define class. Give examples.
6. What are objects?
7. What is the use of “default” in “switch-case” statement?
8. What is a constructor?
9. What is the disadvantage of passing arguments by reference?
10. What is encapsulation?
11. What is polymorphism?
12. What are enumerated data types?
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. When will you make a function inline?
14. What are the major parts of a C++ programming?
15. Differentiate between while and do-while loop.
16. What is the advantages of using default arguments in functions?
17. Give the general form of a class declaration.
18. What is a nested structure? What are the restrictions in a nested structure?
19. How objects are created? Explain.
20. How are relational operators and logical operators related to one another?
21. Differentiate between unary and binary arithmetic operators. Give examples for each.
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. Write a program to implement standard deviation
230
23. Write a program to find sum of the following series using a function declaration.
Sum=x-(x3)/3! +(x5)/5! - (xn)/n!. where x and n are entered from the keyboard.
24. Write a program to accept an integer number of 6 digits and print the sum of its
individual digits.
25. What is meant by looping? Describe two different forms of looping.
26. Explain function overloading with an example.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. What are the disadvantages of using procedural oriented languages? How does OOP
overcome the shortcomings of traditional programming approaches?
28. Write a C++ program to sum the series:
1 + (1 + β) + (1 + β + γ ) + ……+ (1 + β + γ + ……. + N ) for a given integer N
29. Write a program to print every integer between 1 and “n” divisible by “m”. Also
report whether the number that is divisible by “m” is even or odd.
30. Explain the use of constructor with an example. Is it mandatory to use constructors in
a class? Explain how to overload a constructor with an example.
(2 x 10 = 20)
231
Vocational Course: CA3VOT06 - C++ PROGRAMMING
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
How array elements can be accessed?
What is an operator function?
Describe the syntax of multiple inheritance.
What is protected visibility mode in C++?
What is this poi ter
What is a static function?
Name two functions in text-mode graphics
How is derived class related to base class?
In the context of Pointers, what does the symbol * and & mean ?
What is dynamic binding?
What is a copy constructor?
Explain any two string functions.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
What is a virtual base class? When do we make a base class virtual?
What do you mean by new and delete operator?
Write a function to calculate the factorial of a number.
Write a sample C++ program to illustrate defining, initializing and accessing arrays.
How does friend function act as a bridge between two classes?
How will the graphics mode is set in computer?
Explain multilevel inheritance with an example.
Give the reasons for inheritance.
Give an illustration of array of objects.
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. Write a program to create a class called “employee” that contains a “name” and an
“employee no”. Create another class called “scientist” that inherits the properties of
employee and it contains the function for entering the name of the award he gets and
232
display it. Create objects for class scientist that contain their name, no and the award
they get. Implement single inheritance.
23. Write a function to find the sum of two matrix.
24. When do we use overloading an operator? Explain with an example.
25. Writeonhowinputs/outputsofstringobjects are handled in C ++.
26. Explain with an example, how you would create space for an array of objects using
pointers.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Write a program to read the elements of the given two matrices of order n x m and to
perform the matrix multiplication.
28. What is a copy constructor? What is its significance? Which situations is it invoked
in? Support your answer with examples.
29. Write a C++ program to find the largest and smallest element of a set of n elements,
using a function.
30. Write a program to perform simple arithmetic operations of two complex numbers
using operator overloading.
(2 x 10 = 20)
233
Vocational Course: CA4VOT07 - VISUAL BASIC PROGRAMMING
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
What is Menu bar?
Define fixed size arrays.
What is MDI?
What are the types of tool bars available in VB?
What is meant by loop? Write the syntax for “do” loop structure
What is variant data type?
What is the use of drive list box control?
Write the syntax for “mouse move” event.
How would you use a message box on the form?
What is the method for opening a file in binary access?
What is the use of call stack window?
Describe the method of adding a tool to the form.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
What is a control array? How a control array can be created at run time.
Give open and close file procedures.
Explain line control and shape control.
What is quick watch window? Explain.
What are the advantages of using named arguments in function call?
Explain the different states of a form.
How can you make different choices using option buttons? Why?
Explain the term debugging.
Explain any four string functions.
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. Explain the common methods using in Visual Basic
23. What are the difference between functions and procedures? Give example.
24. Create a VB project that accepts a three numbers through textboxes and display the
biggest number among them in a label whenever the user clicks “Pick Big” button and
the program should terminate whenever the user clicks “Exit” button.
234
25. Create a VB application to simulate a mini calculator, which performs all the basic
operations like addition, subtraction, multiplication and division.
26. Describe the various system events.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. What do you mean by “Event-Driven-Programming”? How visual basic supports
event driven programming?
28. Write note on
i)
Immediate Window
ii)
OLE
iii)
Locals window
29. Write a brief note on different file handling techniques.
30. Write a brief note on any “ten” standard controls
(2 x 10 = 20)
235
Vocational Course: CA4VOT08 - COMPUTER WEB APPLICATIONS AND GRAPHICS
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1.
What is the use of attributes in a tag?
2.
What is HTML
3.
Name any one tag that requires only a starting tag.
4.
What is the use of <strong> tag? Which tag performs the same function as that of
<strong> tag?
5.
What is the use of <address> tag?
6.
What are scripts? Name any two scripting languages.
7.
List different logical operators in JavaScript.
8.
What is the use of % operator in JavaScript?
9.
What is a primary key?
10. Name the three components of SQL.
11. Write the syntax of “create table” command.
12. Write the syntax of “switch” statement in PHP.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Write an HTML code segment to display x3+y3.
14. What are the main attributes of <marquee> tag?
15. What are the different types of lists in HTML?
16. Differentiate between <TD> and <TH>
17. What is the difference between for loop and while loop in JavaScript?
236
18. Predict the output of the following
<HTML>
<BODY>
<SCRIPT language=”JavaScript”>
var i;
for(i=10; i>=1; i--)
document.write(i + “<BR>”);
</SCRIPT>
</BODY>
</HTML>
19. What is the difference between “char” and “varchar” data types?
20. What are the features of “AUTO_INCREMENT” constraint?
21. What is meant by super global in PHP?
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. Write an HTML code for a web page for your college with the following details and
features:

A heading followed by a paragraph of 3 sentences about the district, using text
formatting tags and attributes.

Provide a colour to the background of the page.

Include an image of the college. Assume the image should be located in D drive.
23. What are the advantages and disadvantages of using CSS? What are the different
methods to insert CSS?
24. What is a database? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of using DBMS.
25. What are the differences between Get and Post methods in form submitting? Give the
case where we can use Get and we can use Post methods?
26. Describe sessions in PHP?
(3 x 6 = 18)
237
27. Write an HTML code to show the following table in a web page and also provide an
external link to the website of Kerala Police given below the table:
YEAR
2012
2013
2014
Road Accidents in Kerala during 2012-2014
Total Number of
Cases
Persons Killed
36174
4286
35215
4258
36282
4049
Persons Injured
41915
40346
41096
28. Explain the following in context of PHP file handling:
a) Opening a file
b) Closing a file
c) Reading a file line by line
d) Reading a file character by character
29. Explain how to read and write cookies in PHP.
30. The structure of a table is given to store the details of marks scored by students in an
examination.
Data
Register number
Name
Course
Marks of three subjects
Type
Numeric
String
String
Numeric each
Description
A unique and essential data to identify a student
A maximum of 30 characters
It can be Science, Commerce or Humanities
Three separate columns are required
Write SQL statements for the creation of the table and the following requirements:
a) Insert data into the fields (at least 5 records).
b) Display the details of all students.
c) List the details of science group students.
d) Add a new column named “Total” to store the total marks.
e) Fill the column Total with the sum of three marks of each student.
f) Display the highest total in each group.
(2 x 10 = 20)
238
COMPLEMENTARY PHYSICS COURSES
Compl. Course: PH1CMT01 - Properties of Matter & Special Theory of Relativity
(For B. Sc. Programmes in Mathematics and Statistics)
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Explain the modulus of elasticity. What is meant by elastic limit of a body?
2. Defi e You g s
odulus, Bulk
odulus, ‘igidit Modulus a d Poisso s ratio.
3. What is meant by a torsion pendulum? What is it used for?
4. What are torsional oscillations?
5. Give two examples to illustrate the tendency of a liquid to minimize its surface area.
6. What is meant by viscous drag ?
7. What is the dimension of Coefficient of viscosity?
8. Explain the terms Critical Velocity and terminal velocity
9. Mention the consequences of Lorenz Trans formations
10. What is the concept of space/time in the special theory of relativity theory?
11. What are the postulates of the special theory of relativity?
12. What you mean by Brownian motion?
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Explain the terms Neutral Surfs, Neutral Axis, Explain Vending moment
14. What is torsion pendulum, why is it so cold? Explain how torsional arise in wire.
15. Explain I Section girders.
16. Derive stokes formula. What is its dimension?
17. Explain the relativity of simultaneity.
18. What is the concept of space and time in special theory of relativity?
19. Derive an expression for the period of a Torsion pendulum.
239
20. What is the angle of contact of a liquid with a solid? Does it depend on the angle of
inclination of the solid? Why is it difficult to separate plates containing a thin layer of
water between them?
21. If the length of the apillar tu e i Poiseull s ethod is dou led a d the radius is
halved, what will be the quantity of liquid flowing per second in relation that of the
first tube?
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. What is the stress required to increase the length of a steel wire by 0.1%? (Given
You g s Modulus of steel is 210GPa)
23. Two cylinders A and B of the same material having radii in the ratio 1:2 and of lengths in
the ratio 1:2 are joined coaxially. The free end of A is clamped and the free end of B is
twisted through 45 degree. Calculate the twist at the junction.
24. A soap bubble of surface tension 25x10-3N/m has a radius of 5cm.If the bubble is blown
to a radius of 10cm, what is the amount of work done?
25. Calculate the force required to move a metal plate of area 100cm 2 over a layer of castor
oil of thickness 2mm with a velocity of 3cm/sec. Coefficient of viscosity of castor oil is
1.55pas.
26. Find the energy equitant of one mass unit. Avogadro number is 6.023x10 23
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Derive an expression for the depression at the free end of a cantilever. How will you
experimentally determine the You g s odulus
a tile er ethod
28. a) Derive an expression for the excess of pressure inside a spherical drop.
b) Derive an expression for the excess of pressure inside a cylindrical drop.
29. Derive Poiseuille s for ula for the flow of a liquid through a capillary. How will you
experimentally determine the coefficient of viscosity of a liquid by this method
30. Deri e Ei stei s ass energy relation. Give examples to prove the mass energy
equivalence.
(2 x 10 = 20)
240
Complementary Course: PH2CMT01 - Mechanics, Waves and Astrophysics
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Explain the terms Inertia and rotational inertia
2. Define moment of inertia. What are its dimensions?
3. Define moment of inertia of a body about an axis.What are the factors of which moment
of inertia of a body depends.
4. Moment of inertia is said to be analogue of mass in linear motion. Explain the statement
with examples.
5. Give two examples each of linear and angular simple harmonic motions.
6. Obtain an expression for the angular velocity of a particle executing simple harmonic
motion.
7. What is a white dwarf? What is a neutron star?
8. What do you mean by a black hole?
9. What do you mean by resonance? What is the condition for amplitude resonance?
10. Explain phase and initial phase of a simple harmonic motion.
11. Distinguish between forced oscillations and natural oscillations.
12. State perpendicular axis theorem and parallel axis theorem.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. What do ou ea t radius of g ratio .What is it s u it a d di e sio ?
14. Derive an expression for the moment of inertia of a rod about an axis passing through
one of its end.
15. Derive the moment of inertia of a thin annular ring through its centre and perpendicular
to its plane.
16. Discusss H-R Diagram.
17. Write a note on temperature and colour of a star.
18. A particle of mass m is executing simple harmonic motion of frequency n. Calculate its
kinetic energy, potential energy and Total energy.
19. What are the conditions for the oscillation of a harmonic oscillator to be
(a) over damped (b) critically damped
(c) under damped.
241
20. Discuss supernova explosion.
21. Derive an expression for Torque.
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. What must be the relation between length l and radius R of a cylinder if the moment of
inertia of the cylinder about its axis to be same as its MI about the equatorial axis.
23. A flywheel has a moment of inertia of 1 kg m2.If it is rotating at a speed of 2 rev/sec find
the constant torque required to stop the wheel in 5 rotations.
24. A flywheel rotating 2000 times per minute ,can just raise a weight 40kg through 3m
before coming to rest. Calculate the moment of inertia of the wheel.
25. A block of mass3kg is executing SHM of amplitude0.6mand period 4sec. Find
(a) maximum restoring force (b) the restoring force at a distance 0.2mfrom extreme
position.
26. Of the two copper spheres, one is of twice the diameter of the other. What is the ratio
of their moments of inertia about their diameters.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. What is conservation of angular momentum? What is a flywheel? Deduce an expression
for the moment of inertia of a flywheel.
28. (a)Derive an expression for the moment of inertia of a sphere about its diameter.
(b)Derive the moment of inertia of a cylinder about its axis
29. Derive an expression for torsional couple. How will you experimentally determine the
rigidity modulus of the material of a rod.
30. Discuss HR Diagram. Discuss the different stages of the evolution of a star.
(2 x 10 = 20)
242
Complementary Course: PH3CMT01 - Modern Physics, Electronics and Statistical Mechanics
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Give the postulates of Bohr atom model.
2. Explain the spin of electron.
3. Comment on Pauli’s exclusion principle.
4. What are isotopes? Give examples.
5. Briefly describe how the classical physics failed in explaining the stability of atom.
6. What is meant by a normalized wave function?
7. Comment on the evidences for quantum theory.
8. Draw the V-I characteristics of a p-n junction diode.
9. Define Zener voltage? On what factors does it depend?
10. Why CE configuration is preferred to other configurations?
11. Comment on statistical probability.
12. Explain the term phase space.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. State and explain radioactive decay law.
14. Which are the four radioactive series?
15. What are the basic concepts of vector atom model?
16. Explain the fundamental concepts of Plank’s quantum theory.
17. What is a wave function? Give its probabilistic interpretation
18. Obtain the relation between α and
for transistors
19. Define Q-point. What is its importance?
20. Comment on Ensembles.
21. Explain Bose-Einstein distribution law.
243
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. Calculate the time required for 10% of a sample of Thorium to disintegrate. Assume
the half life to be 1.4 x 1010 years.
23. An electron `is confined to move in a cubical box of side 1A0.Calculatge the
minimum uncertainty in its velocity. Given mass of electron = 9 x 10-31kg.
h=6.62 x
10-34Js.
24. Explain the ‘voltage divider’ biasing of transistor.
25. A transistor produces a zero signal collector current of 1mA through a collector load
of 4.7KΩ.What is its Q-point if Vcc is 9V.
26. Compare MB,FD & BE statistics.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. What is meant by binding energy of a nucleus? Explain the features of the binding
energy curve and explain the stability of the nucleus.
28. Obtain the wave function and energy values of a particle in a box.
29. With a neat diagram describe the action of a full wave bridge rectifier. Compare its
merits over that of centre tap full wave rectifier
30. Derive Maxwell-Boltzmann velocity distribution law.
(2 x 10 = 20)
244
Complementary Course: PH4CMT01 - Optics, Electricity and Elementary Particles
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. . Explain the principle of superposition of waves.
2. What are coherent sources? Two independent sources of light cannot be coherent,
why?
3. When interference of light occurs, what happens to the energy of the interfering
waves?
4. The centre of Newton’s rings systems seen in reflected light is dark. Why? Why
Newton’s rings are circular?
5. What is meant by dispersive power of a grating? Explain resolving power of a
Grating.
6. Give any two important differences between prism spectra and grating spectra.
7. Explain briefly any two applications of lasers.
8. The Ruby laser gives a pulsed output why?
9. Explain why spiking occurs in lasers?
10. What do you mean by a Dielectric? Distinguish between Non polar and polar
Dielectrics.
11. Explain what you mean by diffraction of light. Distinguish between Fresnel and
Fraunhofer diffraction
12. Distinguish between leptons and hadrons
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. In a Diffraction grating the number of lines per cm of the grating is doubled. For a
small change in wavelength what will be the changes in diffraction angle?
14. Why is the prism spectrum brighter than the Grating spectrum? What is a half period
zone? Why is it so called?
15. What is meant by optical pumping? Explain how is optical pumping done in Ruby
laser.
16. Name the main components of laser. What is the main difference between the
radiations given out in spontaneous and stimulated emission process?
17. Give the relation connecting Electric Displacement vector, Electric field and
polarization of a linear medium.
245
18. What do you mean by susceptibility of a dielectric medium? How is it related to the
Dielectric constant? Discuss the physical meaning.
19. Discuss the origin of ferroelectricity. Give examples. State Curie-Weiss law.
20. Distinguish between particle and antiparticle. List three generation of particles
21. What is meant by step index fibre? Explain the term pulse dispersion in step index
fibres.
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. In a set up of double slit experiment, the wavelength of light used is 555nm.The
screen is at a distance of 0.8m from the slits which are 0.2mm apart. Calculate the
fringe width
23. In the reflected system using sodium light incident normally on the Newton’s rings
arrangement, it is found that the 8th bright ring with air in the interspace coincides
with the 10th dark ring with a liquid in the interspace. Find the refractive index of the
liquid.
24. In a plane diffraction grating the number of lines per cm is 5000. Find the angular
separation between the wavelengths 5460A and 5480A in the second order
25. What is the longest wavelength that can be observed in third order spectrum with a
grating having 6000 lines /cm. Assume normal incidence.
26. Determine the value of electric field in a material for which the electric susceptibility
is 0.35 and polarization 2.3x10-7 coulomb/m2
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Is it possible to produce interference bands using the blue and green radiations
emitted by a mercury lamp? Discuss the formation of interference fringes on a screen
due to the monochromatic light passing through two parallel slits on an opaque
screen, Also arrive at the expression for fringe width.
28. What is meant by diffraction of light? Give the theory of diffraction at a straight edge
and discuss the pattern.
29. Derive Einstein’s coefficients. Show that population inversion is necessary condition
for light amplification.
4 .Give the theory of a plane transmission grating and describe how it is used to
determine the wavelength of light, using grating at normal incidence
(2 x10 = 20)
246
Complementary Course: PH1CMT02 - PROPERTIES OF MATTER AND THERMODYNAMICS
(For B. Sc. Programmes in Chemistry and Geology)
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Explain the modulus of elasticity
What is meant by elastic limit of a body?
2. Defi e You g s odulus, Bulk, ‘igidit , Modulus a d Poisso s ratio
3. What is meant by a torsion pendulum? What is it used for?
4. What are torsional oscillations?
5. Give two examples to illustrate the tendency of a liquid to minimize its surface area.
6. What is meant by viscous drag?
7. What is the dimension and unit of Coefficient of viscosity?
8. Explain the terms Critical Velocity and terminal velocity
9. What do you mean by superconductivity?
10. What is Meissner effect
11. Explain Josephson Effect.
12. State the Zeroth law of thermo dynamics?
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Explain the terms Neutral Surface, Neutral Axis, Explain Bending moment
14. What is torsion pendulum, why is it so cold? Explain how torsional arise in wire
15. Explain I Section girders.
16. Deri e “toke s for ula. What is its di e sio ?
17. Discuss the concept of refrigerator concept of entropy.
18. Explain the second and third law of thermodynamics.
19. Derive an expression for the period of a Torsion pendulum.
20. What is the angle of contact of a liquid with a solid? Does it depend on the angle of
inclination of the solid? Why is it difficult to separate plates containing a thin layer of
water between them?
247
21. If the le gth of the apillar tu e i Poiseull s method is doubled and the radius is
halved, what will be the quantity of liquid flowing per second in relation that of the
first tube?
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. What is the stress required to increase the length of a steel wire by 0.1%? (Given
You g s Modulus of steel is
Gpa)
23. Two cylinders A and B of the same material having radii in the ratio 1:2 and of
lengthS in the ratio 1:2 are joined coaxially .The free end of A is clamped and the free
end of B is twisted through 45 degree. Calculate the twist at the junction.
24. A soap bubble of surface tension 25x10-3N/m has a radius of 5cm. If the bubble is
blown to a radius of 10cm, what is the amount of work done?
25. Calculate the force required to move a metal plate of area 100cm 2 over a layer of
castor oil of thickness 2mm with a velocity of 3cm/sec. Coefficient of viscosity of
castor oil is 1.55pas.
26. Find the efficiency of Car ot s e gi e orki g et ee stea poi t a d ice point.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Derive an expression for the depression at the free end of a cantilever. How will you
e peri e tall deter i e the You g s odulus by cantilever method
28. (a) Derive an expression for the excess of pressure inside a spherical drop.
(b) Derive an expression for the excess of pressure inside a cylindrical drop.
29. Deri e Poiseuille s for ula for the flow of a liquid through a capillary. How will you
experimentally determine the coefficient of viscosity of a liquid by this method?
30. What do ou ea
a d ideal heat e gi e. Des ri e the orki g of Car ot s
engine? Derive an expression for efficiency.
(2 x 10 = 20)
248
Complementary Course: PH2CMT02 - MECHANICS, WAVE AND SUPERCONDUCTIVITY
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Explain the terms Inertia and rotational inertia.
2. Define moment of inertia. What are its dimensions?
3. Define moment of inertia of a body about an axis. What are the factors of which
moment of inertia of a body depends?
4. Moment of inertia is said to be analogue of mass in linear motion. Explain the statement
with examples.
5. Give two examples each of linear and angular simple harmonic motions.
6. Obtain an expression for the angular velocity of a particle executing simple harmonic
motion.
7. Explain super conducting phenomena.
8. What is Meissner effect?
9. What is Josephson effect?.
10. Explain phase and initial phase of a simple harmonic motion.
11. Distinguish between forced oscillations and natural oscillations.
12. State perpendicular axis theorem and parallel axis theorem.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. What do ou ea t radius of g ratio .What is it s u it a d di e sio ?
14. Derive an expression for the moment of inertia of a rod about an axis passing through
one of its end.
15. Derive the moment of inertia of a thin annular ring through its centre and perpendicular
to its plane.
16. Discuss H-R Diagram.
17. Write a note on temperature and colour of a star.
18. A particle of mass m is executing simple harmonic motion of frequency n. Calculate its
kinetic energy, potential energy and Total energy.
19. What are the conditions for the oscillation of a harmonic oscillator to be
(a) over damped
(b) critically damped (c) under damped.
20. Discuss Type1and Type2 super conductors. Discuss supernova explosion.
21. Derive an expression for Torque.
(6 x 4 = 24)
249
22. What must be the relation between length l and radius R of a cylinder if the moment of
inertia of the cylinder about its axis to be same as its MI about the equatorial axis.
23. A flywheel has a moment of inertia of 1 kg m2.If it is rotating at a speed of 2 rev/sec find
the constant torque required to stop the wheel in 5 rotations.
24. A flywheel rotating 2000times per minute, can just raise a weight 40kg through 3m
before coming to rest. Calculate the moment of inertia of the wheel.
25. A block of mass3kg is executing SHM of amplitude0.6mand period 4sec. Find
(a) maximum restoring force
(b) the restoring force at a distance 0.2m from extreme
position.
26. Of the two copper spheres, one is of twice the diameter of the other. What is the ratio
of their moments of inertia about their diameters.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. What is conservation of angular momentum? What is a flywheel? Deduce an expression
for the moment of inertia of a flywheel.
28. (a)Derive an expression for the moment of inertia of a sphere about its diameter.
(b)Derive the moment of inertia of a cylinder about its axis.
29. Explain how you deter i e the a eleratio due to gra it usi g Kater s pe dulu .
Explain the difference between symmetric and asymmetric compound pendulum.
30. Discuss the BCS theory.
(2 x 10 = 20)
250
Complementary Course: PH3CMT02 - MODERN PHYSICS, ELECTRONICS AND MAGNETISM
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Give the postulates of Bohr atom model.
2. Explain the spin of electron.
3. Comment on Pauli’s exclusion principle
4. What are isotopes? Give examples.
5. Briefly describe how the classical physics failed in explaining the stability of atom.
6. What is meant by a normalized wave function?
7. Comment on the evidences for quantum theory
8. Draw the V-I characteristics of a p-n junction diode
9. Define zener voltage? On what factors does it depend?
10. Why CE configuration is preferred to other configurations?
11. What is Curie temperature?
12. What is meant by magnetic susceptibility?
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. State and explain radioactive decay law.
14. Which are the four radioactive series?
15. What are the basic concepts of vector atom model?
16. Explain the fundamental concepts of Plank’s quantum theory.
17. What is a wave function? Give its probabilistic interpretation
18. Obtain the relation between α and for transistors
19. Define Q-point. What is its importance?
20. List the main classification of magnetism.
21. Comment on Earth’s magnetic field components.
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. Calculate the time required for 10% of a sample of Thorium to disintegrate. Assume
the half life to be 1.4 x 1010 years.
251
23. An electron `is confined to move in a cubical box of side 1A0.Calculatge the
minimum uncertainty in its velocity. Given mass of electron = 9 x 10-31kg. h=6.62 x
10-34Js.
24. Explain the ‘voltage divider’ biasing of transistor.
25. A transistor produces a zero signal collector current of 1mA through a collector load
of 4.7KΩ.What is its Q-point if Vcc is 9V.
26. A field of β000 ampere turns per metre produces a flux density of 8π Web/m2 in an
iron bar. Calculate the relative permeability and susceptibility.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. What is meant by binding energy of a nucleus? Explain the features of the binding
energy curve and explain the stability of the nucleus.
28. Obtain the wave function and energy values of a particle in a box.
29. With a neat diagram describe the action of a full wave bridge rectifier. Compare its
merits over that of centre tap full wave rectifier
30. What is magnetic hysteresis? Explain the hysteresis cycle for a ferromagnetic
material, taken through a complete cycle of magnetisation. Point out some uses of the
curve.
(2 x 10 = 20)
252
Complementary Course: PH4CMT02 - OPTICS, ELECTRICITY AND CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Explain the principle of superposition of waves.
2. What are coherent sources? Two independent sources of light cannot be coherent,
why?
3. When interference of light occurs, what happens to the energy of the interfering
waves?
4. The centre of Newton’s rings systems seen in reflected light is dark. Why? Why
Newton’s rings are circular?
5. What is meant by dispersive power of a grating? Explain resolving power of a
Grating.
6. Give any two important differences between prism spectra and grating spectra.
7. Explain briefly any two applications of lasers.
8. The Ruby laser gives a pulsed output why?
9. Explain why spiking occurs in lasers?
10. What do you mean by a Dielectric? Distinguish between Non polar and polar
Dielectrics.
11. Explain what do you mean by diffraction of light. Distinguish between Fresnel and
Fraunhofer diffraction
12. What is meant by material dispersion
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. In a Diffraction grating the number of lines per cm of the grating is doubled. For a
small change in wavelength what will be the changes in diffraction angle?
14. Why is the prism spectrum brighter than the Grating spectrum? What is a half period
zone? Why is it so called?
15. What is meant by optical pumping? Explain how is optical pumping done in Ruby
laser.
16. Name the main components of laser. What is the main difference between the
radiations given out in spontaneous and stimulated emission process?
17. Give the relation connecting Electric Displacement vector, Electric field and
polarization of a linear medium.
253
18. What do you mean by susceptibility of a dielectric medium? How is it related to the
Dielectric constant? Discuss the physical meaning.
19. Discuss the origin of ferroelectricity. Give examples. State Curie-Weiss law.
20. The cladding material is of slightly lower refractive index than the core material.
Why?
21. What is meant by step index fibre? Explain the term pulse dispersion in step index
fibres.
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. In a set up of double slit experiment, the wavelength of light used is 555nm.The
screen is at a distance of 0.8m from the slits which are 0.2mm apart. Calculate the
fringe width.
23. In the reflected system using sodium light incident normally on the Newton’s rings
arrangement, it is found that the 8th bright ring with air in the interspace coincides
with the 10th dark ring with a liquid in the interspace. Find the refractive index of the
liquid.
24. In a plane diffraction grating the number of lines per cm is 5000. Find the angular
separation between the wavelengths 5460 A and 5480 A in the second.
25. a)Find the interplanar spacing (321) planes of copper which has an fcc structure
atomic radius 0.1278nm
b) Calculate the ratio of intercepts of a (231) plane on the three axes of a simple cubic
crystal
26. Determine the value of electric field in a material for which the electric susceptibility
is 0.35 and polarization 2.3x10-7 coulomb/m2
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Is it possible to produce interference bands using the blue and green radiations
emitted by a mercury lamp? Discuss the formation of interference fringes on a screen
due to the monochromatic light passing through two parallel slits on an opaque
screen, Also arrive at the expression for fringe width.
28. What is meant by diffraction of light? Give the theory of diffraction at a straight edge
and discuss the pattern.
29. Derive Einstein’s coefficients. Show that population inversion is necessary condition
for light amplification.
30. Give the theory of a plane transmission grating and describe how it is used to
determine the wavelength of light ,using grating at normal incidence
(2 x 10 = 20)
254
Complementary Course: PHYSICS- PH1CMT03 - SOLID STATE PHYSICS
(For B. Sc. Electronics (Model III) Programme)
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
SECTION A
1.
What is Meissner effect?
2.
Define Hall coefficient.
3.
What is unit cell? Explain.
4.
What are De-Broglie waves?
5.
Explain the term mobility.
6.
What is Uncertainty Principle?
7.
What is forbidden energy gap? Mention its importance.
8.
Define magnetic susceptibility.
9.
Write Schrodinger equation in steady state form.
10. Define fermi level. What is its significance?
11. Name the different types of bonding in solids.
12 What is the significance of wave function?
SECTION B
13. State Bloch theorem and explain.
14. Differentiate between type I and type II superconductors.
15. Explain Weiss theory of ferromagnetism.
16. What is meant by law of mass action.
17. What are miller indices. Mention its importance.
18. What is meant by extrinsic semiconductor. How is it formed.
19. Discuss qualitatively about free electron theory.
20. Write Schrodinger time dependent equation and explain each term.
21. What happens when a superconductor is subjected to the critical field? Explain.
255
SECTION C
Answer any three questions .Each question carries 6 marks.
22. Describe seven crystal systems with suitable diagrams and give the relation of length of
axes and the relation of angles between the axes of a unit cell in each type.
23. Briefly explain Davisson and Germer experiment. Mention its purpose.
24. Differentiate metals, insulators and semiconductors according to energy band picture.
25. Derive expressions for drift velocity, mobility and conductivity of intrinsic
semiconductors.
26. Lead in the superconducting stage has critical temperature of 6.2K at zero magnetic field
of 0.064 MA/m at 0K.Determine the critical field at 4K.
SECTION D
27. What is super conductivity? Mention it’s properties and applications. Explain BCS
theory of superconductivity.
28. Explain Bragg’s law and powder diffraction method.
29. What is Hall Effect. Obtain an expression for hall voltage. What are the applications of
Hall Effect?
30. Write a short note on magnetic hysteresis. Differentiate among para ,anti-ferromagnetic
and ferrimagnetic materials.
256
Core Course: EM1CRT01 - PRINCIPLES OF ELECTRONICS
(For B. Sc. (Model III) – Electronic Equipment Maintenance)
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Distinguish between P type and N type semiconductors.
2. Define avalanche break down?
3. Write short notes on SPDT and DPDT.
4. Explain knee voltage
5. Draw the symbols of NPN and PNP transistor and mention their leads.
6. What are clamping circuits?
7. Discuss the importance of PIV in rectifier.
8. What is the need of biasing in transistor?
9. Explain the basic principles in LED.
10. Explain the need of using filter circuits.
11. What is the function of voltage regulators?
12. What are called intrinsic semiconductors?
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Explain about clamping circuits with wave forms.
14. Explain wave shaping circuit RC integrator with wave forms.
15. Explain bridge rectifier.
16. Explain different types of switches.
17. Write notes on phototransistors?
18. Explain the terms thermal run away and heat sink.
19. Explain extrinsic semiconductors.
20. Explain class A and class B amplifiers?
21. Derive the expression for ripple factor of half wave rectifier.
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. Explain the working of � filter. Derive the expression for the ripple factor.
23. Explain the characterestics of R C coupled amplifier.
24. With neat circuit explain centre tapped full wave rectifiers.
257
25. Explain the working principle of LED and photodiode.
26. Explain the construction and working principle of nickel cadmium cell.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Explain the process of zener break down occurs in PN junction diodes? How it differ in
avalanche break down?
28. Explain the working of shunt capacitor filter with neat sketch.
29. With neat circuit explain the working of different positive and negative clippers with and
without bias?
30. Draw and explain the working of phase shift oscillator. Describe how oscillations can be
made
(2 x 10 = 20)
258
Core Course: EM1CRT02 - COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Define aspect ratio.
What is the purpose of equalizing pulses?
Define modulation.
Define modulation index of AM.
What is the function of FM?
What is scanning?
What are the needs for modulation?
What is the function of acquadag coating on picture tube?
How does SSB differ from AM?
Differentiate between RF amplifier and IF amplifier.
How vertical sync pulses are separated?
Define the power relation in AM.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Explain the principles used in AM and FM?
What are 10 possible causes of AF distortion?
Describe the operation of picture scanning?
What is interlased scanning?
Describe the important features of antenna.
Write short note on video detector.
Explain the block diagram of sync separation.
Explain back porch and front porch.
Explain the importance of signal modulation in communication.
(6 x 4 = 24)
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
Explain video detctors with block diagram.
Sketch the details of composite video wave forms with different voltage levels.
Explain the block with SMPS.
Explain the frequency spectrum of video IF amplifier.
Explain different types of receiving antennas.
(3 x 6 = 18)
259
27. With block diagram explain super heterodyne radio receiver
28. Explain amplitude modulation and analyse the waveforms and derive the expression for
modulation factor
29. With block diagram explain monochrome TV receiver?
30. What is delayed AGC and how it is developed? Why is delayed AGC applied only to the RF
amplifier and sometimes to the first if amplifier of the receiver?
(2 x 10 = 20)
260
Core Course: EM2CRT03 - POWER ELECTRONICS
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. What is mean by triggering of an SCR?
2. What are the advantages of TRIAC over SCR?
3. Explain the natural commutation.
4. What is a controlled rectifier?
5. Explain current and voltage ratings of a Power Diode.
6. Explain the soft starting of Induction Motor.
7. Why is Diac preferred to trigger a Triac?
8. Why is power electronics so important?
9. What are the Merits and demerits of Buck Boost converters
10. What is a switched mode regulator?
11. List the methods of voltage control of inverters.
12. What are the symptoms of an open Diac or Triac?
(9 × 2 = 18)
13. What are the applications of cycloconverters?
14. Sketch the V-I Characteristics of a Triac.
15. Explain the resonant pulse commutation circuit of a Thyristor.
16. Give a brief note on Solid state relays.
17. Explain the construction and working of an SCR.
18. Explain the working principle of power MOSFET.
19. Explain the operation principle of a single phase bridge inverter.
20. Why is SCR always turned on by gate current?
21. Explain about power semiconductor devices.
(6 × 4 = 24)
22. Explain briefly about Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT)
23. The intrinsic standoff ratio for a UJT is determined to be 0.6. If the inter base
resistance is 10KΩ, what are the values of RB1 and RB2 ?
261
24. A uniform transistor has 10V between the bases. If the intrinsic standoff ratio is 0.65,
find the value of standoff voltage. What will be the peak point voltage if the forward
voltage drop in the pn junction is 0.7V?
25. An SCR full wave rectifier supplies to a load of 100Ω. If the peak a.c. voltage
between centre tap and one end of secondary is 200V, find
(i)
D.C output Voltage
(ii)
Load current for a firing angle of 60o.
26. With relevant diagrams explain the Single phase speed control system using SCRs or
TRIAC. What is a reversible control system.
(3×6=18)
27. Discuss the various power electronics converter. Give the advantages and
disadvantages of power electronics converter.
28. What is meant by Commutation? Explain the various commutation methods of SCR.
Give the circuit diagram of any one method and explain.
29. Describe the reverse recovery characteristics of power diode and its effects. Draw and
explain any base drive circuit of a power transistor switch.
30. Write brief notes on Buck, Boost and Buck Boost regulators. What are their
application?
(2 × 10 = 20)
262
Core Course: EM2CRT04 - ANALOGUE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. What is the function of OP-AMP?
2. What are the applications of op-amp?
3. What is the schematic symbol for an op-amp?
4. Explain the basic difference between digital and linear ICs.
5. What is the difference between monolithic and Hybrid ICs?
6. List the advantages of first generation OP-amp.
7. What are the characterestics of an ideal op-amp?
8. What is the voltage transfer curve of an op-amp?
9. List three open loop op-amp configurations.
10. Define CMRR.
11. Define input offset voltage.
12. What is the offset minimizing resistors?
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Explain the equivalent circuit of an op-amp with circuit.
14. Explain different types of open loop op-amp configurations.
15. Explain integrator circuit with different waveforms?
16. Explain the difference between dc and ac voltage followers.
17. What is comparator explain its function?
18. What is a window detector?
19. What is a voltage limit and why it is needed?
20. What are the applications of 555 timer?
21. Write a notes on band reject filter.
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. Explain the block diagram representations of an op-amp.
23. Explain non –inverter circuit and derive the expression?
24. Explain differentiator circuit and derive the expression for it? Also draw the input output
wave forms?
25. Explain the schmitt trigger circuit.
263
26. Explain 555 timer operation as monostable?
(3 x 6 = 18)
Part D (Long Answer/ Essay Questions)
Answer any 2 questions. Each carries 10 marks.
27. With block diagram explain the instrumentation amplifier.
28. Explain different types of sine wave generators.
29. With neat sketch explain VCO.
30. Explain 555 timer as astable and derive the expression for frequency.
264
Core Course: EM3CRT05 - MICROPROCESSOR AND ITS APPLICATIONS
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. What is the function of microprocessor?
2. What is the purpose of registers?
3. What is the function of CPU?
4. What is ALU and its operation?
5. What is DAA?
6. What is the function of stack pointer?
7. What is a subroutine?
8. What are the functions of control and status signals?
9. What is the function of flags?
10. What are the applications of microprocessor?
11. Mention advantages and disadvantages of microprocessor.
12. What is instruction cycle?
(9 x 2 = 18)
Answer any six questions. Each question carries 4 marks
13. Explain fetch cycle and execute cycle.
14. What is the function of interrupts? Explain different types.
15. With example explain opcode fetch and operand.
16. Explain the instruction format?
17. Explain the instructions ADD B , LXI H 8000, LDA addr 16, SHLD 5600
18. Explain addressing` modes with examples?
19. Classify the interrupts in detail.
20. Explain flags in detail.
21. What is the use of SUB A instruction? Specify the status of Z and CY flags after the
execution of this instruction.
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. Draw timing diagram for opcode fetch.
23. What are the advantages and disadvantages of assembly language?
24. Write an assembly language programme to find the smallest of N numbers.
25. Explain the working of RAL and RLC instruction.
265
26. How can you use stepper motor in 8085 explain?
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. With block diagram explain the architecture of 8085
28. Explain the pin out details of 8085
29. With neat sketch explain the working of machine controller using 8085
30. With neat sketch explain traffic light controller using 8085
(2 x 10 = 20)
266
Core Course: EM3CRT06 - TROUBLESHOOTING OF AUDIO EQUIPMENTS
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. What is a CD?
2. What are the various noises in recording?
3. What is AFT explain?
4. What do you mean by dolby system?
5. Explain flutter.
6. What are the various noises in recording?
7. What is interlased scanning?
8. What is mean by varactor tuning?
9. What is servo system?
10. Which recording format is used in CD recording?
11. What is sub codes and what is its function in CD recording?
12. Represent basic remote control system.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Explain the advantages in optical recording.
14. Explain AFT with block diagram.
15. Explain the block diagram of frequency synthesized TV time?
16. Explain the helical scanning for recording.
17. Explain the ac biasing system used in magnetic recording.
18. How data is write on the CD system.
19. Explain the astigmatic method for focus servo system.
20. Bring out the faults in AFT circuits.
21. Differentiate between CD and DVD.
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. Explain cross over network?
23. Explain different types of loud speakers.
24. Explain the working of ADC?
25. Explain tape transport mechanism of CD.
267
26. Explain Home theatre.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. With block diagram explain remote control system
28. Explain block diagram and mechanism of MP3 player
29. Explain dc based recording
30. Explain DVD player
(2 x 10 = 20)
268
Core Course: EM4CRT07 - NETWORK THEORY
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Define Dependent and Independent current source
State and explain Maximum Power Transfer theorem.
What is meant by RC time constant?
State Millman’s theorem.
What are poles and zeroes of a function?
What is meant by frequency spectrum of a periodic waveform?
What is meant by Transfer Function?
What is a convolution integral?
What are the characteristics of an impulse function?
What do you mean by a signal? Indicate the different properties of signal.
What is a positive real function?
Define Bandwidth, Rise time, Delay time.
(9 × 2 = 18)
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
State and explain Superposition theorem.
Obtain the response of an RL circuit when a step voltage of V volts is applied.
Explain the exponential form of Fourier series.
Find the Laplace transform of a square wave current of amplitude A and period 2T
sec.
What are the driving point impedance and admittance?
Find the Fourier transform of a function defined as f(t) = A for –T/2 < t <T/2
= 0 for all other t.
State and explain Reciprocity theorem.
State and prove Initial and Final value Theorem.
Test the following function for positive real function:-
12s 2  5
a)
2s 3  s
b)
1
s 1
2
c)
s4
s  2s  5
2
(6 × 4 = 24)
269
22. Find the Z- Parameter for the network.
23. A capacitor C is charged through a resistor R for a dc source E (a) Derive an expression for
instantaneous charge on the capacitor (b) C=10µF and R=1 mΩ, find the time taken by the
capacitor to receive 90% of its final charge. (c) What is the time constant of the circuit?
24. Find the current in the 10Ω resistor in the network Fig (a), by using Thevenin’s Theorem. Also
find the Thevenin’s Voltage, Short circuit current and determine the actual current flowing
through the 6Ω resistor in Fig (b).
Fig (a)
Fig (b)
25. State and explain the properties of Laplace transform. Give the relation between Laplace and
Fourier transform.
26. For the network shown in Fig, determine hybrid parameters and Transmission parameters
(3 × 6 = 18)
270
27. In the following network, K is changed from position a to b, at t = 0. Solve for i , ��/��
and d2i / dt2 at t=0+, if R=1000 Ω, L=1 H, C=0.1 µF and V=100 V. Assume that the
capacitor is initially uncharged.
28. Find equivalent T and π network for the circuit shown in figure below.
29. An attenuator is composed of symmetrical π = section having series arm of 100Ω and shunt
arm each of γ00Ω. calculate the characteristic impedance of this network and attenuation per
section.
30. Find V(t) for the following function using Pole-Zero plot.
V ( s) 
3s
( s  2)(s 2  2s  2)
(2 × 10 = 20)
271
Core Course: EM4CRT08 - TROUBLESHOOTING OF VIDEO EQUIPMENTS
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. What preliminary check up must be performed before starting picture tube set up?
2. Why is it necessary to have a synchronized raster when using cross batch generator
3. What is the effect of raster of rotating the yokr in its housing?
4. Explain the function of RF TUNER in TV.
5. What is ghost? What are its causes?
6. Draw the block of SMPS.
7. What is interlased scanning?
8. What are the needs for compression?
9. What is servo system?
10. What are the main points in troubleshooting DVD player?
11. What is quantization technique?
12. What is LCD?
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Explain the RGB and YVB representations of video signals.
14. Explain power supply requirements of VCD.
15. Explain how compression works.
16. Explain the compression format for video.
17. Explain the MPEG – XH.
18. What are the differences between analogue TV and digital TV?
19. Explain the POWER SUPPLY requirements of DVD.
20. Explain the difference between LED backlit and backlit LCD displays.
21. Compare LCD and PLASMA TV?
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. Explain DVD players and their standards.
23. Explain with block VCD.
24. Explain the tape transport mechanism in DVD.
272
25. Explain digital TV transmission techniques.
26. Explain encoding and decoding quantizing techniques.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. With block diagram explain DTH.
28. Explain LCD technology.
29. Explain plasma TV.
30. Explain LED TV.
(2 x 10 = 20)
273
Generic Elective Course: EM5GET01 - I C TECHNOLOGY
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Explain the general classification of integrated circuit.
2. Give expression for resistivity?
3. What is hybrid IC?
4. What is wire bonding?
5. “tate Fi k s First la .
6. Compare wet and dry etching.
7. List two short channel MOS structures.
8. Give a general classification of ICs based on number of components.
9. Explain the term Monolithic.
10. Explain trimming of resistors.
11. Name the different Lithographic technology.
12. Write down the advantages of thin film hybrid.
(9 × 2 = 18)
13. What are the different conducting materials used for making thick film conductors.
14. Explain CD cathode sputtering. What its advantage?
15. What do you mean by LPCVD?
16. What do you mean by die bonding?
17. Compare Epitaxy and Diffusion.
18. State the advantage of MOS technology
19. Compare thick film and thin film technology
20. Explain thick film dielectrics.
21. Write a short note on monolithic resistors.
(6 × 4 = 24)
22. Explain planar Technology.
23. How long does it take for a fixed amount of phosphorous disturbed over one surface
of a 25µ thick silicon wafer to become substantial uniform disturbed throughout the
274
wafer 1300°C? Consider that the concentration is sufficiently uniform if it does not
differ by more than 10% from that at the surface.
24. Draw the structure of an ion implantation system and explain the process.
25. Explain VLSI metallization and patterning.
26. Explain Twin well CMOS process.
(3 × 6 = 18)
27. Discuss the different steps in IC fabrication starting from silicon wafer substrate.
28. Explain with neat figures CZ crystal growth process.
29. Explain the various steps involved in the fabrication of monolithic transistor with
necessary figures.
30. Explain Quality and Reliability of Components. Write is the rate of Component
failure? How is it minimized?
(2 × 10 = 20)
275
Generic Elective Course: EM5GET02 – DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. What is the use of Random Signals?
2. What do you mean by aliasing in digital signal processing? How it can be avoided?
3. What are the differences between a microprocessor and a DSP processor?
4. What is the advantage of a Direct form II FIR over form I?
5. What is interpolation and decimation?
6. Difference between DFT and DTFT.
7. What is the concept of stability of an LTI system? How to check if a given system is stable?
8. In signal processing, why we are much more interested in orthogonal transform?
9. FFT is in complex domain, how to use it in real life signals optimally?
10. Why do we use Laplace transform?
11. Compare Laplace & Fourier transforms? Give any disadvantages for Fourier?
12. Explain circular convolution.
(9 × 2 = 18)
Part B (Short Answer)
13. Why should we go for digital signal processing where as the most of the real world data is in
analog mode?
14. Why do we need Fourier transform in DSP?
15. In signal processing, why we are more interested in orthogonal transform.
16. What are the properties of the system? Explain.
17. Explain the block diagram of IIR filter.
18. Explain cascade and parallel form realization.
19. Explain circular convolution.
20. Show that the discrete time system described by the input-output relationship
y[n] =n x[n] is linear?
21. State and explain sampling theorem.
(6 × 4 = 24)
Part C (Short Essay/Problem)
22. Explain recursive and non recursive systems.
23. Explain complex conjugation.
24. Explain briefly how the zeros in FIR filter is located.
25. Explain the finite word length effects in FIR digital filters.
276
26. Compute the DFT of the sequence whose values for one period is given by
̌
= { , , − , − }.
(3 × 6 = 18)
Part D (Essay)
27. Explain the difference and the similarity between DIT and DIF algorithm.
28. Explain the designing of FIR filters using windows.
29. Discuss the steps in the design of IIR filter using bilinear transformation for any one
type of filter.
30. Explain in detail about the polyphase implementation of FIR filters for interpolar and
decimators.
(2 x 10 = 20)
277
Generic Elective Course: EM5GET03 – Microcontrollers and Embedded System
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Explain in the difference between microprocessors and controllers.
2. Explain some 8 and 32 bit microcontrollers.
3. Explain stack and stack pointer.
4. Explain jump instructions.
5. Define single bit instructions.
6. Explain addressing modes in 8051.
7. Explain program counter.
8. Define call instructions.
9. Define interrupt modes in 8051.
10. Define memory counter and timer.
11. Explain the structure of assembling and running an 8051 program.
12. What is the function of registers?
(9 × 2 = 18)
13. Explain different types of 16 bit microcontrollers.
14. List the features of 8051.
15. List the alternate functions of Port3 in 8051.
16. What is the significance of ̅̅̅̅
�� pin?
17. What id program status word in 8051. Explain.
18. State the function of RS1 and RS0 bits status in the flag register of 8051.
19. What is the significance of DPTR in 8051?
20. Justify why the crystal oscillator frequency in 8051 chosen as 11.05MHz.
21. How Embedded Microcontrollers are differing than Embedding Microprocessor?
Explain with technical justification and application.
(6 × 4 = 24)
278
22. Draw the PIN diagram of 8051. Explain
23. Draw the program memory organization in 8051. Explain.
24. Explain internal RAM memory organization in 8051.
25. List the special function registers in 8051.
26. Explain the timer operation of 8051.
(3 × 6 = 18)
Part D (Essay)
27. Explain different types of serial communication.
28. Explain how baud rate is set in 8051 for serial data transfer using timer register?
29. Explain in detail digital to analog conversion.
30. Explain interfacing of Stepper motor.
(2 x 10 = 20)
279
Choice Based Course: EM6CBT01 - COMPUTER HARDWARE AND NETWORKING
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Define BIOS. Explain silent features of BIOS.
2. Define the track and a sector in hard disk?
3. Explain about Pentium processors.
4. Explain operating modes of 80386 processor.
5. What is a hard disk?
6. Which is the high speed memory placed between CPU and main memory?
7. What do you mean by computer virus?
8. Define POST.
9. What is multimedia?
10. What is the job of a network layer?
11. What is SMPS?
12. What is the function of Keyboard?
(9 × 2 = 18)
13. Explain the features of an 80286 microprocessors.
14. Differentiate between RAM and ROM.
15. Compare IDE and EIDE Systems.
16. Compare CRT and LCD Monitors.
17. Briefly explain Expansion buses of motherboard.
18. Discuss the superscalar architecture of Pentium processor.
19. Write a short note on digital camera with the help of a block diagram.
20. Write shorts notes on software diagnostics.
21. What are error codes?
(6 × 4 = 24)
22. Explain different types of memory used in a computer.
23. Explain the procedure for installing, Formatting and Troubleshooting a Hard disk.
24. What are the steps to install DOS to a PC which does not contain any OS.
25. Write notes on XT/AT diagnostics.
26. Explain briefly about the pointing and positional devices.
(3 × 6 = 18)
280
Part D (Essay)
27. Draw and discuss the internal organization of 80286.
28. Explain about type of Printers.
29. Discuss different types of Computer networks.
30. Explain the installing procedure for the following:a) Linux
b) Visual Basic
c) Pascal
d) Cobol
e) Windows 98.
(2 × 10 = 20)
281
Choice Based Course: EM6CBT02 – MODERN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Define Digital Communication.
2. What is Quantization?
3. What is Companding?
4. Define scattering losses.
5. What is radio communication?
6. What is cellular concept?
7. Define PSK.
8. Explain fiber splicing.
9. Explain fading.
10. Define CDNA.
11. Explain encoding.
12. Explain noise in PCM system.
(9 × 2 = 18)
13. Explain sampling theorem in PCM.
14. Explain the block diagram of time division multiplexing.
15. Explain in detail QPSK.
16. Explain step index and graded index.
17. Explain lensing scheme for coupling improvement.
18. Explain codeless telephone system.
19. Explain WLAN.
20. Explain SDMA.
21. Write a note on optical communication system.
(6 × 4 = 24)
22. Explain path loss and multi path fading.
23. Explain interference and system capacity in cellular system.
24. Explain cellular telephone system. How a cellular call is made.
25. Explain with block FSK.
26. Explain ADPCM.
(3 × 6 = 18)
282
Part D (Essay)
27. With block diagram explain delta modulation techniques.
28. Explain optical fiber connectors.
29. With block diagram explain FDMA.
30. Explain absorption and different types of scattering losses in optical communication.
(2 × 10 = 20)
283
Choice Based Course: EM6CBT03 – ADVANCED NETWORKS AND SYSTEMS
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Define Kirchhoff’s law.
Explain Thevenin’s theorem
Explain force current analogy.
Explain relation between transfer function and impulse response.
Define Laplace transform.
What is meant by frequency spectrum of a periodic waveform?
What is meant by Transfer Function?
What is a convolution integral?
What are the characteristics of an impulse function?
What do you mean by a signal? Indicate the different properties of signal.
What is a positive real function?
Define Bandwidth, Rise time, Delay time.
(9 × 2 = 18)
Answer any Six questions. Each question carries 4 marks.
13. State and explain maximum power transfer theorem.
14. Obtain the response of an RL circuit when a step voltage of V volts is
applied.
15. Explain the exponential form of Fourier series.
16. Find the Laplace transform of a square wave current of amplitude A and
period 2T sec.
17. What are the driving point impedance and admittance?
18. Find the Fourier transform of a function defined as f(t) = A for –T/2 < t
<T/2
= 0 for all other t.
19. State and explain Reciprocity theorem.
284
20. State and prove Initial and Final value Theorem.
21. Test the following function for positive real function:a)
12s 2  5
2s 3  s
b)
1
s 1
2
(6 × 4 = 24)
Answer any Three questions. Each question carries 6 marks
22. Explain D’ALEMBERT’S principle.
23.Find the current in the 10Ω resistor in the network Fig β(a), by using
Thevenin’s Theorem. Also find the Thevenin’s Voltage, Short circuit current
and determine the actual current flowing through the 6Ω resistor in Fig β(b).
Fig 1 (a)
Fig 1 (b)
24. For the network shown in Fig, determine hybrid parameters and
Transmission parameters.
25. State and explain the properties of
Laplace transform. Give the relation
between Laplace and Fourier transform.
26. State and explain Superposition theorem.
(3×6=18)
285
Part D (Essay)
Answer any Two questions. Each question carries 10 marks.
27. In the network shown in Fig 4, K is changed from position a to b, at t=0.
Solve for i , �/ � and d2i / dt2 at t=0+, if R=1000 Ω, L=1 H, C=0.1 µF and
V=100 V. Assume that the capacitor is initially uncharged.
28.Find equivalent T and π network for the circuit shown in Fig.
29.An attenuator is composed of symmetrical π = section having series arm of
100Ω and shunt arm each of γ00Ω. Calculate the characteristic impedance of
this network and attenuation per section.
30. Find V(t) for the following function using Pole-Zero plot.
V ( s) 
3s
( s  2)(s 2  2s  2)
(2 × 10 = 20)
286
Complementary Course: CA1CMT01 - COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Define control unit?
2. Differentiate input interface and output interface.
3. Multiply 11012 and 10102.
4. Name any four input devices?
5. Name any four output devices?
6. What is light pen?
7. What is a plotter?
8. Differentiate RAM and ROM.
9. Differentiate EPROM and EEPROM.
10. Add 110012 and 1102.
11. Multiply 11112 and 1012.
12. What are the uses of joystick?
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Explain about hexadecimal number system?
14. Discuss different types of scanners?
15. Differentiate mouse and trackball?
16. What are audio output devices? Explain.
17. Explain about cache memory?
18. Convert the following numbers.
(a) (67840)10 = (____)2
(b) (34529)10 = (_____)16
19. Convert the following numbers.
(a) (654330)8 = (_____)10
(b) (D35E0)16 = (_____)10
20. Convert the following number.
(a) (AC681D)16 = (_____)2
21. Explain the working of floppy disk?
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. What are the features of a computer?
23. Differentiate decimal and binary number systems.
287
24. Discuss about different types of keyboards.
25. Discuss about different types of monitors.
26. (a) Add 110010112 and 1100112
(b) Subtract 111002 from 1100110112
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Explain the generations of computer.
28. What is hard disk? Explain its working.
29. Discuss the basic computer organization?
30. Discuss about the working of a printer? Explain about any three printers.
(2 x 10 = 20)
288
Complementary Course: CA2CMT02 - OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING WITH C++
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. What is the full form of OOP?
2. Define variables.
3. What is assignment operator?
4. What is modulus operator?
5. What is the general form of declaring a function?
6. What is the structure of a C++ program?
7. What is the need of data abstraction?
8. What is inline function?
9. WAP to find the product of two numbers?
10. What is the general form of creating an object of a class?
11. What are the members of a class?
12. Write any two header files?
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Write about the declaration of a class.
14. Explain the two ways for defining a member function.
15. What are reference variables? Give example.
16. What are relational operators?
17. Discuss about function prototype.
18. Define function overloading.
19. WAP to arrange the given numbers in ascending order?
20. WAP to find the roots of a quadratic equation?
21. Discuss derived data types in C++?
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. Discuss about built- in data types?
23. Differentiate bitwise and logical operators with truth table.
24. Explain about arrays with example.
25. What is a friend function? Write its features.
26. Explain storage classes in C++.
(3 x 6 = 18)
289
27. Explain different types of constructors in C++.
28. Explain different types of functions.
29. Discuss about principles of OOP.
30. WAP to read the marks obtained in various subjects by each student in a class of n
student in a class of n students taking examinations in m subjects, and to compute
and print the total mark and grade.
(2 x 10 = 20)
290
Complementary Course: CA3CMT03 – JAVA PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Write a short note about java?
2. What are variables?
3. What are arithmetic operators? Give example.
4. Explain about assignment operator?
5. What is return statement?
6. WAP to find the factorial of a given number?
7. Define method overloading.
8. What is recursion method?
9. WAP to find the product of two numbers?
10. Discuss about this keyword.
11. Write the general form of creating a class.
12. Write any two import statement?
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Write the structure of a java program.
14. What are relational operators?
15. Discuss operator precedence.
16. WAP to find the given number id prime or not?
17. What is constructor? Give example.
18. Discuss about for loop.
19. Differentiate break and continue statements.
20. Differentiate nested and inner classes.
21. WAP to find the reverse of a given number.
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. Discuss principles of OOP.
23. Differentiate bitwise and logical operators with truth table.
291
24. Discuss the concept of object and class.
25. Differentiate while and do-while loops.
26. What are the primitive data types?
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Explain features of java.
28. Explain the two types of arrays with example.
29. Discuss about iteration statements with example.
30. WAP for finding the area of different shapes (triangle, rectangle, circle) using method
overloading.
(2 x 10 = 20)
292
Complementary Course: CA4CMT04 - THE JAVA LIBRARY
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. What are packages? Give examples.
2. Write the need of interfaces?
3. Name the types of inheritance used in java?
4. Write the general form of creating abstract method?
5. Write short note about Applet class?
6. WAP to find the factorial of a given number?
7. Differentiate audio clip interface and applet stub interface?
8. Name the five keywords used in exception handling?
9. WAP to find the area of a rectangle?
10. How we can import a package in a new class?
11. Write the general form of creating a new class from an existing class?
12. Write any two import statement?
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Discuss the concept of class with example.
14. What are the uses of final keyword in java.
15. What is the architecture of an applet?
16. What is the uses of getPriority() and setPriority() methods?
17. What is access protection?
18. WAP to find the biggest and smallest number from two numbers?
19. What is abstract class?
20. Discuss about finally() with example.
21. Explain any three methods in AWT?
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. Explain super keyword in java with example.
23. What are the HTML tags used in applet? Explain.
293
24. Discuss the different types of windows used in applet.
25. Discuss about thread priorities.
26. Explain the life cycle of threads?
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Explain exception handling techniques in java.
28. Explain in detail about applet skeleton.
29. What is synchronization? Give example.
30. Discuss with example.
(a) Method overriding
(b) Multithreaded programming
(2 x 10 = 20)
294
B. Sc. (Model III) Physics - Instrumentation
Core Course: IN1CRT01 – Basics of Mechanical Engineering
(For B. Sc. (Model III) – Instrumentation)
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Define Casting.
2. What is the use of spanners?
3. What is meant by riveting?
4. Define welding.
5. What is a gear?
6. List the applications of chain drive.
7. What is a worm gear?
8. List the advantages of gear drive.
9. Name any two operations done in lathe.
10. What are automatic power tools?
11. What is a power drill?
12. Explain the principle of milling machine.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. What is meant by galvanizing?
14. Discuss any two joining process?
15. List the advantages of painting?
16. Explain about rolling.
17. What is sintering?
18. List the applications of springs.
19. Explain about any five handheld tools.
20. What is a bearing? Explain any two bearings.
21. What is a clutch? Explain about power clutch.
(6 x 4 = 24)
295
22. Explain about the least count of vernier height gauge.
23. Discuss about the belt materials used in belt drives.
24. Calculate the length of belt for cross belt drive.
25. Derive the velocity ratio of belt drive.
26. Differentiate between shaper and planer.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Explain steps involved in casting.
28. Describe the principle and working of lathe.
29. Explain how measurements are taken using a vernier caliper?
30. What is an open belt drive? Calculate the length of belt for open belt drive.
(2 x 10 = 20)
296
Core Course: IN1CRT02 – Basic Instrumentation
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1.
Define measurement.
2.
Define resolution.
3.
Write the examples of dc sources
4.
Define form factor.
5.
What is the instrument used for power measurement?
6.
Define torque.
7.
Explain flux density.
8.
Define voltage and current.
9.
What are absolute instruments?
10.
Define unit.
11.
Differentiate accuracy and precision.
12.
Explain active and passive transducers.
(9 × 2 = 18)
Answer any Six questions. Each question carries 4 marks
13.
Define RMS value.
14.
Write short note on direct current.
15.
What are the advantages of moving iron instruments?
16.
Write the principle of energy meter.
17.
Define Kirchhoff’s voltage law.
18.
Define permeability.
19.
What are the characteristics of sine wave?
20.
An RLC circuit consists of a reactance 100Ω and a coil having a resistance of 50Ω and
inductive reactance of 150Ω. The combination is connected across 100V,50Hz. Compute
i)current, ii)power factor, iii)power taken by the circuit
21.
Explain wein bridge circuit.
(6 × 4 = 24)
297
Answer any Three questions. Each question carries 6 marks
22.
An alternating current is represented by i= 135.9 sin 700t. calculate its i)frequency, ii)rms
value, iii)average value
23.
Write short notes on magnetism
24.
In following figure shows P and Q supplying a common load through internal resistance,
calculate (a) the load currents and the currents supplied by the batteries. (b) the voltage at the
load, (c) the power deliver to the load.
25.
Explain any one d.c. bridge circuit.
26.
Describe a.c. through RLC circuit.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27.
(a) Explain different dynamic characteristics
(b) Draw functional block diagram
(c) Define about absolute instruments
28.
Define resonance and explain RLC circuit in series
29.
Write thevenin’s voltage and current law with proof
30.
Explain construction and working principle of D’Arsonaval meter
(2 x 10 = 20)
298
Core Course: IN2CRT03 – BASIC MEASUREMENTS
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1.
Define displacement.
2.
Define torque.
3.
Mention the name of any two methods of thickness measurement
4.
It is a timing device used to determine the number of revolutions, which device?
5.
Define density.
6.
What are the advantages of industrial viscometer?
7.
Define specific gravity.
8.
Write the applications of conductivity measuring instruments.
9.
Name any two speed measuring devices.
10.
Hygrometers are used for the measurement of …………………
11.
Write the difference between hydraulic and pneumatic force meter.
12.
Define gauge factor.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13.
Write the principle of radiation of thickness gauges
14.
Define weight
15.
Explain viscosity
16.
Define humidity
17.
Write the advantages of hydrometer
18.
Define proximity
19.
Write the working of proximity torque sensor
20.
How to measure the displacement using capacitive transducers
21.
Write short note on stroboscope
(6 x 4 = 24)
299
Answer any three questions. Each question carries 6 marks
22.
What is the principle of capacitance thickness gauge method?
23.
Explain the working of densitometer.
24.
How to measure the density of gas? Explain it.
25.
What is hydrometer? Explain it.
26.
Explain about revolution counter.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27.
28.
29.
30.
How to measure the force by using strain gauge load cell?
Describe with neat sketch, the construction and working of LVDT for displacement
measurement with its advantages and disadvantages.
Explain construction and working of different types of tachometer.
Define thickness, explain construction and working of ultrasonic vibration method.
(2 x 10 = 20)
300
Core Course: IN2CRT04 – INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION I
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Define pressure.
2. What is meant by vacuum?
γ. State Boyle’s Law.
4. 1Kg/cm2 = ……….psi
5. Define temperature.
6. Define throughput.
7. What is meant by vacuum sputtering?
8. Define pumping speed.
9. Name any two pressure measuring devices.
10. What is PTC and NTC?
11. What is absolute pressure?
12. Explain about pressure switch.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Describe different vacuum ranges.
14. What is a positive displacement pump?
15. Discuss about different temperature scales.
16. What is a barometer?
17. What is the significance of Pt100 RTD?
18. List two advantages of using mercury in thermometers.
19. Explain about gas flow mechanism in vacuum system.
20. Explain about vacuum application in food industry.
21. Describe about a detector with positive temperature coefficient.
(6 x 4 = 24)
301
22. How does root blowers work?
23. Discuss about McLeod Gauges.
24. How are ionization gauges used in vacuum measurement?
25. Explain about temperature switches.
26. Discuss about thermal conductivity gauges.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Explain the principle of dead weight tester. Describe pressure gauge calibration using dead weight
tester.
28. Discuss about conductance in vacuum.
29. Describe the principle, construction and working of rotary pumps.
30. Explain temperature measurement with filled system thermometers.
(2 x 10 = 20)
302
Core Course: IN3CRT05 – INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION II
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Define level.
2. What is pH?
3. Define flow.
4. What is meant by smart sensor?
5. What is MEMS?
6. List advantages of ultrasonic method.
7. Discuss the principle of electromagnetic flowmeter.
8. What is a smoke detector?
9. What is SPM?
10. Name any two flow measuring techniques?
11. What is the relation between flow and pressure?
12. Explain about quantities involved in vibration measurements.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. What is meant by a detector?
14. Describe about sight glass level measurement.
15. List the application of pH measurement in industries.
16. Discuss about CO analysers.
17. Describe about flow nozzle.
18. List the advantages of rotameters.
19. List the advantages and disadvantages of electromagnetic flowmeter.
20. Explain float and displacer method of level measurement.
21. Describe flow measuring using venturimeter.
(6 x 4 = 24)
303
22. Discuss different types of pH electrodes.
23. Explain non-contact type level measurement.
24. Explain about dissolved oxygen meters.
25. Discuss about the recent trends in sensor technology.
26. How vibration is measured using seismic transducer?
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Describe level measurement using pressure gauge.
28. How flow is measured using orifice.
29. Discuss about glass electrode pH measurement.
30. Explain about any one LPG detector.
(2 x 10 = 20)
304
Core Course: IN3CRT06 – TRANSDUCERS AND SIGNAL CONDITIONING
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1.
Define transducers.
2.
Write one example of first order system.
3.
What is active and passive filter?
4.
Write need for modulation.
5.
What is dot matrix?
6.
What is LCD?
7.
Why recorders are needed?
8.
How the recorders are differ from display devices?
9.
What is LVDT?
10.
Name two display devices .
11.
Mention the name of different standard inputs.
12.
Define transfer function.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13.
What is ADC
14.
Define modulation
15.
What are the advantages of LCD
16.
Write about seven segment display
17.
Write any four applications X-Y recorders
18.
Write about inkjet printers
19.
Write zero order system
20.
How to work sample and hold circuit
21.
Explain about adder used in instrumentation
(6 x 4 = 24)
305
22.
Explain the construction details of CRT
23.
What are the applications of strip chart recorder
24.
Explain about laser printers
25.
Describe the working of LCD.
26.
Explain about inverting and non-inverting amplifiers.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27.
Write second order system with step input.
28.
What is instrumentation amplifier? How the gain varied?
29.
Explain the construction and working principle of LED
30.
Explain the construction and working principle of circular chart recorder
(2 x 10 = 20)
306
Core Course: IN4CRT07 – MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1.
What is a register?
2.
What is branching instructions?
3.
Explain address bus.
4.
What are the addressing modes of 8085?
5.
What is program counter?
6.
What is interrupt?
7.
Define ALE.
8.
Write one example of data transfer instructions.
9.
Define microprocessor.
10.
What are the use of microcontrollers?
11.
What is the difference between microprocessor and microcontroller?
12.
What is PROM?
(9 x 2 = 18)
13.
Differentiate JUMP and CALL instruction.
14.
What is the difference between MOV and MVI?
15.
What is meant by control bus?
16.
Why do we need to multiplex address and data bus?
17.
Which are the different registers of 8086?
18.
How are 8051 instructions classified?
19.
Discuss the role of various flags in 8085.
20.
Explain instruction word size in 8085 with example.
21.
What is physical memory organization?
(6 x 4 = 24)
307
22.
Draw the pin diagram of 8086 with details
23.
Write addition of two number program in 8086
24.
Explain different addressing modes in 8051
25.
Write a program to add two numbers.
26.
Write a program to divide two numbers.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27.
Explain memory mapped I/O and I/O mapped I/O in 8085.
28.
Draw the architecture of 8086 and explain the terms.
29.
Write different addressing modes of 8086 with example.
30.
Draw different machine cycles and timing diagram of 8051
(2 x 10 = 20)
308
Core Course: IN4CRT08 – INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. What is meant by automation?
2. Define SCADA.
3. What is a relay?
4. Define DCS.
5. Explain about RTU.
6. List the advantages of SCADA.
7. What is ERP?
8. What is PLC?
9. What is NC and NO contacts?
10. List the advantages of DCS.
11. List the advantages of PLC.
12. What are the benefits of industrial automation?
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Which are the requirement of communication network for PLC ?.
14. Explain different parts of PLC.
15. List the advantages of SCADA.
16. What are the different types of automation systems ?.
17. What is meant by computer control of process ?.
18. List the advantages of computers in control system.
19. Explain the benefits of automation.
20. Discuss about fundamental PLC wiring.
21. What is the difference between RTU and MTU ?.
(6 x 4 = 24)
309
22. What are the advantages of DCS?
23. Discuss about the performance criteria for DCS and other automation tools.
24. What are the different programming methods in PLC?
25. Explain PLC architecture.
26. Explain about relays.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Explain about role of automation in industries.
28. Develop PLC Ladder programming for basic digital logic gates. (NOT, AND, OR, NAND, NOR,
XOR, XNOR)
29. Explain the architecture of DCS.
30. Describe the architecture of SCADA.
(2 x 10 = 20)
310
Generic Elective: IN5GET01: DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Convert the decimal number 146.8 in to octal number.
Find the results using β’s complement technique. -55 +26
Write the truth table of XOR gate..
Draw the diagram 4 bit adder/subtractor.
Why ASCII code is required in a digital computer system?
Write a short note on minterms.
What is an encoder?
Sketch the logic system for a clocked SR flip flop.
Describe an application of decade counter.
How many flip-flops are required to produce a divide-by-128 device?
11. Derive the Boolean expression for the logic circuit shown below:
12. State De Morgan’s theorem.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13.
Convert the following SOP expression to an equivalent POS expression.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Why NAND gate is called a universal gates? Explain with the help of logical circuits.
Simplify the expression F=(A’BC’)’
Write down the rules for grouping 1s in K map.
What is a multiplexer? Draw the logic diagram of 4 to 1 multiplexer.
Draw the logic diagram of 4 bit ladder D/A converter and explain.
Write the logical expression of sum and carry output of full adder in terms of its input.
311
20. Draw the block diagram of a negative edge triggered T flip flop.
21. What is the difference between synchronous and asynchronous counter.
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. Draw The logic circuit of the expression AB + CDE using only NAND gates.
23. Draw the logic circuit for the logic expression F= BC(A+B+C’)’ , also simplify the expression
and draw the new logic circuit.
24. What is a decoder? Draw the logic diagram of 3 to 8 decoder and explain its working. Also draw
its truth table.
25. With help of diagram explain the working of positive edge triggered RS Flip Flop.
26. Draw the logic diagram and truth table for a three flip-flop ripple counter operating in countdown
mode.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Simplify the Boolean expression f(a,b,c) = Σ(0,β,γ,4,6) and f(a,b,c) = Σ(0,1,β,4,5,6,8,9,1β,1γ,14)
using K-map.
28. Explain the block diagram and working of a β’s complement adder/subtractor circuit.
29. With the aid of diagrams explain the working of binary ladder type D/A converters.
30. What is a flip-flop? Discuss the different types of flip flops.
(2 x 10 = 20)
312
Generic Elective: IN5GET02 – Process Control Instrumentation
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1.
Define process.
2.
Define transient regulation.
3.
Explain process lag.
4.
Write one example of two position mode controller.
5.
Write the equation of PID controller.
6.
Write the notes of pneumatic and electronic output.
7.
What is relay?
8.
Define controlling element.
9.
Give an example of final control element.
10.
Name any two digital controllers.
11.
Depending upon the actuating medium how to classify the automatic controller.
12.
Draw the block diagram of control loop with all basic elements.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13.
What is the use of signal conversion
14.
Explain process lag
15.
Define offset
16.
The temperature as a range of 500 to 650⁰K and a set point of 558⁰K. find the percentage of
span error when the temperature is 569⁰K
17.
Define optimum control
18.
Explain tuning
19.
Explain basic three types of control valves
20.
Explain different control system parameters
21.
What are the characteristics proportional mode
313
(6 x 4 = 24)
22.
Write short note on PLC
23.
Explain Ziegler – Nichols method of tuning
24.
A magnetic amplifier requires a 10 to 15V input signal from 4- 20mA control signal. Design a
conversion system to provide this relationship
25.
Explain various process control types.
26.
Describe any one analog controller.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27.
Explain different types of electrical actuators
28.
Explain composite control modes
29.
Write the notes of following
(a) Data logging
30.
(b) supervisory control
Explain cascade control system with example
(2 x 10 = 20)
314
Core Course: IN5GET03 – BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. What is EEG?
2. What is SD curve?
3. Define cell.
4. Explain about man machine interface.
5. Which are the parameters measured in biomedical instrumentation?
6. What is infant incubators?
7. Define Laser.
8. What is hemodialysis?
9. Name different electrodes used in biomedical fields.
10. What is EMG?
11. What is the difference between direct and indirect blood pressure measurement?
12. Describe about generalized bioinstrumentation system.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Discuss about defibrillators.
14. What are the advantages of using electrodes in biomedical measurements?
15. Explain about heart sounds.
16. What are ventilators?
17. What is meant by micro and macro shock hazards?
18. List the advantages of lead system.
19. Explain about the safety requirements in biomedical instruments.
20. Describe about the electrical activity of excitable cells.
21. Which are the various transducers used in biomedical instruments?
(6 x 4 = 24)
315
22. Discuss about cardiac pacemakers.
23. Describe about applications of lasers in biomedicine.
24. Explain about Electroneurogram.
25. What is cardiac catheterization ?.
26. Explain the physiological effects of electricity.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Explain ECG measurement.
28. Describe indirect blood pressure measurement.
29. Discuss about infant incubators.
30. Explain about direct blood pressure measurements.
(2 x 10 = 20)
316
Choice Based Course: IN6CBT01 – Analytical Instrumentation
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1.
Define analytical instruments.
2.
Explain spectrum.
3.
Define wave number.
4.
What is filter?
5.
What is sensors and transducers?
6.
What is spectroscopy?
7.
What is chromatography?
8.
Mention the name of different types of detector.
9.
State Beer’s Law.
10.
What is AAS?
11.
What are the uses of grating?
12.
State Beer-Lambert law.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13.
Explain interaction radiation with mater.
14.
What is Raman effect?
15.
What are the properties sample holder?
16.
Write the principle of X-ray spectroscopy.
17.
What do you meant NMR?
18.
What do you meant by radio chemical instruments?
19.
Explain different elements of an analytical instruments.
20.
Explain the working of double beam filter photometer.
21.
Draw and explain the working of UV spectroscopy.
(6 x 4 = 24)
317
22.
Explain about slit width, monochromators.
23.
Explain different types radiation sources.
24.
What are the advantages of gas chromatography?
25.
Write the applications of spectroscopic method.
26.
Explain atomic absorption spectrophotometers.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27.
Explain in details how IR spectrometer is working
28.
How to analyze the chemical using ESR spectrometer
29.
Give the principle, construction details of NMR spectrometer
30.
Explain principle, construction and working of liquid chromatography
(2 x 10 = 20)
318
Choice Based Course: IN6CBT02 – Ultrasonic and Optoelectronic Instrumentation
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. What is meant by ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Laser.
3. What is polarization?
4. Explain biomedical application of laser.
5. What are moiré fringes?
6. What is an interferometer?
7. Explain piezoelectric effect.
8. What are the applications of laser in medical field?
9. Name a semiconductor laser.
10. What is LED?
11. List the advantages of ultrasonic waves.
12. What are the various factors affecting in ultrasonic measurement?
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. How is length measured by interferometer method?
14. Explain about Q-switching of laser.
15. How is thickness measured using ultrasonic waves?
16. List the advantages of laser.
17. What is meant by acoustical holography?
18. Explain the industrial application of laser.
19. Explain ultrasonic level measurement technique.
20. Describe about reflection and transmission coefficients.
21. How are ultrasonic waves generated?
(6 x 4 = 24)
319
22. Describe the working principle of laser.
23. Explain the working of laser gyroscope.
24. Discuss about laser Doppler velocity meter.
25. Explain the working of ruby laser
26. Explain about various types of lasers.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Discuss the application of ultrasound in medical diagnosis.
28. Explain ultrasonic method of flow measurement.
29. Describe about different types of lasers.
30. Explain about holographic interferometers and its applications.
(2 x 10 = 20)
320
Choice Based Course: IN6CBT03 – Power Plant Instrumentation
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. What is nuclear fission?
2. What is PWR?
3. List out the calorific value of common fuels.
4. How are fuels classified?
5. What is a condenser?
6. Discuss about FBC.
7. What is FBR?
8. What is the use of moderator in nuclear reactor?
9. What is SPM?
10. Explain about interlocks.
11. Explain brayton cycle.
12. Discuss MFT turbine trip control.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. What is a fire tube boiler ?.
14. Differentiate between fire tube and water tube boilers.
15. Discuss Rankine cycle.
16. Describe the working of water purity meter.
17. What is meant by burner tilting ?.
18. Explain about bypass damper.
19. Describe about GCR.
20. Explain de-aerator level control.
21. How is power generated in nuclear power plant ?.
(6 x 4 = 24)
321
22. Explain the harmful effects of power plant pollutants.
23. Discuss one line diagram for electrical instrumentation system.
24. Explain H2 generator cooling system.
25. Draw and explain the online line diagram for simple pressure control system.
26. Draw and explain the online line diagram for simple temperature control system.
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Draw the ANSCI symbols for lines, valves, heat transfer and dryer.
28. Explain about combustion control techniques.
29. Describe the one line diagram for pressure control.
30. Explain smoke density measurement technique.
(2 x 10 = 20)
322
Complementary Course: EL1CMT01 – Basic Electronics
(For B.Sc. (Model III) Physics-Instrumentation)
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. Give the colour code for γ90KΩ resistor
2. Give an example for variable capacitor
3. What is the impedence of a series L.C.R network
4. According to maximum power transfer theorem, maximum power will be transferred
from source to load when --------------------------5. What is doping?
6. Give an example for p-type impurity
7. Give the expression for current gain of CE configuration
8. What is operating pont?
9. Give the expression for current gain of CB configuration
10. What is stability factor?
11. Write a short note on any one of the fixed capacitor
12. Write about gang capacitor.
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. Distinguish between active & passive network
14. State and explain maximum power transfer theorem
15. What are the properties of PN junction
16. What is the use of filters
17. What is load line?
18. What are the advantages of CB amplifier
19. Explain air core type inductor
323
20. What is positive clipper?
21. What is avalanche breakdown?
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. What is voltage divider biasing?
23. Explain V-I characteristic of PN junction diode
24. Explain the working of photodiode
25. What is zener breakdown?
26. Explain the working of zener diode as voltage regulator
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Explain about intrinsic & extrinsic semiconductors
28. Explain Thevenin’s theorem. Find the open circuit voltage and Thevenin’s resistance
of a simple β terminal network. In it two resistors β0Ω & γ0Ω & a source of 100V are
in series and the terminals are the ends of γ0Ω resistance.
29. Explain the working of pnp transistor.
30. Derive the expression for efficiency of full wave rectifier.
(2 x 10 = 20)
324
Complementary Course: EL2CMT02 – Amplifiers and Oscillators
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. How amplifiers are classified based on Q-point
2. Write any two applications of class B amplifier
3. What is a positive feedback amplifier
4. Draw the circuit for current series feedback circuit
5. State Barkhausen criteria
6. What is oscillator
7. What are the terminals of JFET
8. What are the types of MOSFET
9. Name any two types of high frequency oscillator
10. How amplifiers are classified based on coupling element
11. What is loading effect?
12. What are the disadvantages of RC coupled amplifier?
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. What are the advantages of negative feedback amplifier
14. What are the effects of positive feedback in an amplifier
15. What is damped oscillations
16. What are the requirements for sustained oscillations in Hartley oscillator?
17. Compare FET against BJT
18. What is transconductance (in the case of JFET).
19. Explain the frequency response of RC coupled amplifier
20. Derive the expression for voltage gain of negative feedback amplifier
21. How gain stability can be achieved in negative feedback amplifiers?
(6 x 4 = 24)
325
22. What is the effect of negative feedback in frequency response curve?
23. What are the differences between amplifier and oscillator
24. Explain P channel JFET
25. Explain channel JFET as amplifier
26. Explain the effect of negative feedback on input impedence
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Explain direct coupled amplifier
28. Explain different types of voltage feedback circuits
29. Explain the working of Collpits oscillator
30. Explain depletion MOSFET
(2 x 10 = 20)
326
Complementary Course: EL3CMT03 – Communication Electronics
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. What is simplex communication?
2. What are the uses of Ku band?
3. What is modulation?
4. What are the limitations of AM modulation
5. What is binary number system
6. What is sampling?
7. What is bus topology?
8. What is star topology?
9. What is modulation index
10. What is quantization
11. What is Bounded channel
12. What is unbounded channel
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. What is modulation index?
14. What is frequency modulation?
15. What are the advantages of digital system?
16. What are the steps to convert analog signal to digital?
17. What is FDM?
18. What is TDM?
19. What is the need for modulation?
20. Derive the expression for amplitude modulated wave
21. What is the importance of modulation index?
(6 x 4 = 24)
327
22. State and explain sampling theorem
23. Explain I2C
24. What is CAN?
25. Explain any one type of wireless communication method
26. Explain ASK
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Explain EM spectrum – bands, properties and typical uses of each band.
28. What is AM modulation? Explain AM modulator.
29. Draw and explain (a) PAM , (b) PTM
30. Explain OSI model in detail
(2 x 10 = 20)
328
Complementary Course: EL4CMT04 – Operating System and Python Programming
Time: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 80
1. List some input devices
2. What is register?
3. What is a process?
4. Why Linux is called as an open source operating system?
5. Give the python syntax for print operation
6. List some operators in Python language
7. Modules in Python are simply Python files with the ----- extension
8. What is Visual Python
9. What is CPU?
10. What is a child process?
11. What is CPU?
12. What is real time operating system?
(9 x 2 = 18)
13. What are the different types of storage spaces in computers?
14. What is cache?
15. What are the advantages of Python?
16. How comments can be incorporated in Python programming
17. What is a module?
18. What is matplotlib?
19. Explain the use of cache.
20. List the Differences between UNIX and Linux.
329
21. What are the features of Linux?
(6 x 4 = 24)
22. Explain Python interpretor.
23. Give the syntax for simple i/o operations in Python.
24. How conditional statements can be given in Python program.
25. What are the conditional statements used in python language? Explain?
26. How arrays are defined in python?
(3 x 6 = 18)
27. Explain different types of operating systems
28. Explain linux kernel architecture
29. Explain in detail basic python syntax – comments, variable types, operators
30. How graphs can be generated by using Python
(2 x 10 = 20)
330
List of Participants in the work shop and Contributors
1.
Sri. Ens Mathews, Assistant Professor, Dept. of Physics, Bishop Abraham
Memorial College, Thuruthicad
2.
Dr. Saji Agustine, Dept. of Physics, Deva Matha College, Kuruvilangad
3.
Augustine J Edakkara, Assistant Professor, Dept. of Physics, St. Thomas
College, Pala
4.
Prof. Raju Mathew T, St. Thomas College, Pala.
5.
Dr. Ginson Joseph, St. Thomas College, Pala.
6.
Dr. Ison V Vanchipurkal, Assistant Professor, St. Thomas College, Pala.
7.
Prof. M S Abraham (Rtd), St. Thomas College, Pala.
8.
Dr. Minu Joy, Alphonsa College, Pala.
9.
Prof. Santhosh Kumar, St. George College, Aruvithura.
10. Dr. Saji Joseph, Pavanathma College, Murikkasserry.
11. Dr. Simon Augustine, St. Thomas College, Pala.
12. Sri. Binil Thomas Zachariah, Assistant Professor, Dept. of Computer Science,
Bishop Abraham Memorial College, Thuruthicad
13. Ms. Joli Joseph, Dept. of Physics, Assumption College, Chenganacherry.
14. Dr. Sherin Thomas, Assistant Professor, Dept. of Physics, Assumption College,
Chenganacherry.
15. Ms. Sijina G S, Assistant Professor, Dept. of Physics, N S S Hindu College,
Chenganacherry
16. Ms. Dhanya K S, Assistant Professor, Dept. of Physics, N S S Hindu College,
Chenganacherry
17. Ms. Lizymol Xaviour, Associate Professor, Dept. of Physics, St. Aloysius
College, Edathua
18. Ms. Rani George, Assistant Professor, Dept. of Physics, St. Aloysius College,
Edathua
19. Ms. Rosmin John, Assistant Professor, Dept. of Physics, St. Aloysius College,
Edathua
331
20.
Dr. Vinu T Vadakel, Assistant Professor, Dept. of Physics, St. Aloysius
College, Edathua
21.
Dr. Saban K V, Associate Professor, Dept. of Physics, St. Aloysius College,
Edathua
22.
Sri. Babu K Thomas, Assistant Professor, Dept. of Physics, St. Aloysius
College, Edathua
23.
Ms. Rani Mohan, Lecturer, Dept. of EEM, St. Aloysius College, Edathu
24.
Ms. Supriya Kurian, Lecturer, Dept. of EEM, St. Aloysius College, Edathua
25. Sri. Sajith Babu S, Asst. Professor, Dept. of Physics, Catholicate College,
Pathanamthitta
26. Ms. Veena S, Dept. of Physics, Mar Thoma College, Thiruvalla
27. Dr. Roy Sebastian K, Associate Professor, Dept. of Physics, St. Josephs College,
Moolamattom
28. Ms. Shiny Ettiachan, Associate Professor, Dept. of Physics, MSHS Colege,
Angamaly
29. Sri. K. C. Zachariah, Associate Professor, Dept. of Physics, St. Thomas College,
Kozhenchery
332

B. Sc. Physics (Model

Transcription

Similar documents

EXPERIENCE TISHA B`AB AT BEVIS MARKS SYNAGOGUE

Homo habilis Postcrania

Visual Techniques

2- Serum

international academy of computer graphics multimedia

Test Specification Table (Jadual Spesifikasi Ujian) Manual This

Post Graduation - Chaitanya Colleges

syllabus relating to the subjects for direct recruitment to the post of

Changing Ringtones and Alert Tones

Visual Arts sample written examination format